l1006-unitrol6800 user manual

8/15/2019 l1006-Unitrol6800 User Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/l1006-unitrol6800-user-manual 1/933

UNITROL 6800 User Manual L1006

UNITROL® 6800 User Manual

Document No. L1006

Revision Status Rev.Z

Date 2013



ii L1006 UNITROL 6800 User Manual

DEC reserves all rights to this document and to the information and topics

contained in it. This also applies to any possible claims to copyright orpatents. Forwarding and/or the duplicating of this document without theexpress permission of DEC is forbidden.

This document has been prepared and checked with great care. Ifhowever it still contains errors, then the user is asked to report these toDEC.



UNITROL 6800 User Manual L1006 iii

Table of Contents

Table of Contents ............................................................................................................... ii i

List of Figures .................................................................................................................... vi i

List of Tables ...................................................................................................................... ix

Terms and Abbreviations .................................................................................................. xi

Chapter 1 -

Introduct ion .................................................................................................1-1

1.1. General .......................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2.

Field of Application ........................................................................................................ 1-1

1.3.

Contents of this Manual ................................................................................................. 1-2

1.4.

Manufacturer’s Address ................................................................................................. 1-3

Chapter 2 - System Overview .........................................................................................2-1

2.1. General .......................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2. Description of the Excitation System ............................................................................. 2-1

2.2.1.

Introduction .................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2.2.

Main Technical Data (Example) ..................................................................................... 2-2

2.2.3.

Type Designation ........................................................................................................... 2-4

Chapter 3 - Safety Instructions ......................................................................................3-1

3.1.

General .......................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.

Intended Audience ......................................................................................................... 3-1

3.3. Qualifications and Responsibilities ................................................................................ 3-2

3.3.1. Qualifications and Responsibilities ................................................................................ 3-2

3.3.2.

Consequences of Non-Compliance ............................................................................... 3-2

3.4.

Safety Concept .............................................................................................................. 3-3

3.4.1.

General .......................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.4.2.

Safety Rules .................................................................................................................. 3-3

3.4.3. Door Locking Concept of the Cubicles (if applicable) .................................................... 3-4

3.4.4. Residual Danger Areas .................................................................................................. 3-4

3.5. Safety Regulations ......................................................................................................... 3-5

3.5.1.

Structure of Safety Instructions ...................................................................................... 3-5 3.5.2.

General Safety Instructions ........................................................................................... 3-6

3.5.3. Additional Safety Instructions ........................................................................................ 3-7

3.6. Instructions for Emergency Situations ........................................................................... 3-7

3.6.1. Firefighting ..................................................................................................................... 3-7

3.6.2. First Aid Measures for Electrical Installations ................................................................ 3-8

3.6.3. Pacemaker ..................................................................................................................... 3-8

3.7.

Danger Signs ................................................................................................................. 3-9

Chapter 4 - Transportation, Storage and Decommissioning .......................................4-1

4.1. General .......................................................................................................................... 4-1



iv L1006 UNITROL 6800 User Manual

4.2.

Safety Regulations ........................................................................................................ 4-1

4.3.

Transportation ............................................................................................................... 4-2

4.3.1.

Transport Conditions ..................................................................................................... 4-2

4.3.2. Loading, Unloading and Moving on Site ....................................................................... 4-2

4.4.

Preservation and Storage ............................................................................................. 4-2

4.4.1. Storage Conditions ....................................................................................................... 4-2

4.4.2.

Preparing Excitation System for Storage ...................................................................... 4-3

4.4.3.

Periodical Inspections ................................................................................................... 4-3

4.5.

Storage and Handling of Spare Parts ........................................................................... 4-4

4.6.

Decommissioning .......................................................................................................... 4-5

4.6.1. Short-Term Standstill .................................................................................................... 4-5

4.6.2. Long Term Storage ....................................................................................................... 4-6

4.6.3.

Dismantling the Excitation System and Disposal .......................................................... 4-6

Chapter 5 - Mechanical Installation .............................................................................. 5-1

5.1.

General ......................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2.

Safety Regulations ........................................................................................................ 5-1

5.3.

Installation Planning ...................................................................................................... 5-1

5.3.1.

Safety Aspects .............................................................................................................. 5-1

5.3.2. Ambient Conditions on Site ........................................................................................... 5-1

5.3.3. Dimensions and Clearances ......................................................................................... 5-2

5.3.4.

Foundation, Floor Leveling ........................................................................................... 5-3

5.4.

Moving Excitation System to Installation Site ............................................................... 5-3

5.4.1.

Receipt of Delivery ........................................................................................................ 5-3

5.4.2. Storage ......................................................................................................................... 5-4

5.4.3. Unpacking ..................................................................................................................... 5-5

5.4.4. Moving Equipment to Place of Installation .................................................................... 5-6

5.5.

Mechanical Installation .................................................................................................. 5-8

5.5.1.

Preparation for Floor Anchoring .................................................................................... 5-8

5.5.2. Alignment of Cubicles ................................................................................................... 5-9

5.5.3. Joining Transport Units ................................................................................................. 5-9

5.5.4. Floor Anchoring ........................................................................................................... 5-10

5.6. Concluding Work ......................................................................................................... 5-11

Chapter 6 - Electrical Installat ion .................................................................................. 6-1

6.1. General ......................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2. Safety Regulations ........................................................................................................ 6-1

6.3. Planning ........................................................................................................................ 6-2

6.3.1. Requirements for Cable Layout .................................................................................... 6-2

6.3.2.

Electrical Drawings ....................................................................................................... 6-2

6.4. Connecting Main PE Ground ........................................................................................ 6-3

6.5. Connecting the Auxiliary and Control Cables ............................................................... 6-4

6.5.1.

Preparation of Cable Inlet ............................................................................................. 6-4

6.5.2. Connecting the Cables to Customer Terminals ............................................................ 6-4

6.5.3. Cable Routing, Shield Grounding and Strain Relief ...................................................... 6-5

6.6. Connecting Power Connections .................................................................................... 6-6

6.6.1. General ......................................................................................................................... 6-6

6.6.2. Power Connections with Cables ................................................................................... 6-7

6.6.3.

Power Connections with Rigid Bus ............................................................................... 6-8

6.6.4.

Transformer Connections ........................................................................................... 6-10



UNITROL 6800 User Manual L1006 v

6.6.5. Connections for Ground Fault Relay ........................................................................... 6-10

6.7. Bridging Transport Separation ..................................................................................... 6-11

6.8. Concluding Work ......................................................................................................... 6-14

Chapter 7 - Commissioning ...........................................................................................7-1

7.1. General .......................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2.

Safety Regulations ......................................................................................................... 7-1

7.3. Commissioning Process ................................................................................................ 7-1

7.4. Concluding Work after Commissioning .......................................................................... 7-2

Chapter 8 -

Operation .....................................................................................................8-1

8.1. General .......................................................................................................................... 8-1


8.3.

Operation of the Excitation System ............................................................................... 8-2

8.3.1.

Check before Switching on ............................................................................................ 8-2

8.3.2.

Switch-on Sequence ...................................................................................................... 8-3

8.3.3. Check during Operation ................................................................................................. 8-5

8.3.4. Shut-down Sequence .................................................................................................... 8-5

8.3.5. External Trip .................................................................................................................. 8-6

8.3.6.

Event/Trip ...................................................................................................................... 8-7

8.4.

Description of the Control Functions .............................................................................. 8-8

8.4.1.

ON/OFF Commands ...................................................................................................... 8-8

8.4.2.

Operation Modes and Setpoint Adjustment ................................................................... 8-9

8.4.3. Channel and Mode Changeover .................................................................................. 8-11

8.5.

Control Commands ...................................................................................................... 8-16

8.5.1.

Remote/Local Control .................................................................................................. 8-16

8.5.2.

Remote Control, Hardware Interface ........................................................................... 8-16

8.5.3.

Remote Control, Excitation Control Terminal (ECT) .................................................... 8-17 8.5.4.

Remote Control, Fieldbus ............................................................................................ 8-17

8.5.5.

Local Control, ECT ...................................................................................................... 8-18

8.6. Analog In- and Outputs ................................................................................................ 8-19

8.6.1.

Analog Inputs ............................................................................................................... 8-19

8.6.2.

Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................ 8-19

8.7.

Event Messages .......................................................................................................... 8-19

8.7.1.

Impact of Event States ................................................................................................. 8-19

8.7.2. Status and Event Messages ........................................................................................ 8-20

8.8. Description of the Excitation Control Terminal (ECT) .................................................. 8-22

8.8.1. Overview of the Screen after Start-up and the Display Elements ................................ 8-22

8.8.2. Function Selection Buttons .......................................................................................... 8-24

8.8.3.

System Status Bar ....................................................................................................... 8-25

8.8.4. Login Procedure .......................................................................................................... 8-26

8.8.5. Operation ..................................................................................................................... 8-27

8.8.6. Parameters .................................................................................................................. 8-29

8.8.7. Event Logger ............................................................................................................... 8-29

8.9. Description of the Converter Control Panel (CCP) ...................................................... 8-30

Chapter 9 - Preventive Maintenance .............................................................................9-1

9.1. General .......................................................................................................................... 9-1


9.3. Standard Procedures for Maintenance .......................................................................... 9-2



vi L1006 UNITROL 6800 User Manual

9.4.

Operating Conditions during Maintenance Work .......................................................... 9-3

9.5.

Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................................. 9-4

9.6.

Specific Maintenance Tasks ......................................................................................... 9-5

9.6.1. Visual Inspection ........................................................................................................... 9-5

9.6.2.

Functional Inspection .................................................................................................... 9-6

9.6.3. Check Busbar and Cable Connections ....................................................................... 9-11

9.6.4.

Check Protective Devices ........................................................................................... 9-12

9.6.5.

Maintenance Work, Cleaning ...................................................................................... 9-14

9.6.6.

Maintenance Work, Fans ............................................................................................ 9-16

Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 10-1

10.1.

General ....................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2. Safety Regulations ...................................................................................................... 10-1

10.3.

Standard Procedures for Troubleshooting .................................................................. 10-2

10.4.

Event Messages ......................................................................................................... 10-4

10.5.

Operating Conditions during Repair Work .................................................................. 10-4

10.6.

Replacement of Defective Components ..................................................................... 10-5

10.7.

ON-LINE Repair .......................................................................................................... 10-6

10.7.1.

Converter Module, Draw-out Version (Configuration Standard and Twin) .................. 10-6

10.7.2. AVR Channel 1 or 2 .................................................................................................... 10-6

10.7.3. Backup Channel (CCM BU) ........................................................................................ 10-7

10.8.

OFF-LINE Repair ........................................................................................................ 10-7

10.8.1.

Converter Module, Draw-out Version (Config. Economic; w/o redundancy) ............... 10-7

10.8.2.

Converter Module, Fixed Version ............................................................................... 10-7

10.8.3. AVR Channel 1 ........................................................................................................... 10-7

10.8.4. Crowbar, Deexcitation ................................................................................................. 10-8

10.9. Restart after Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 10-8

10.10.

Diagnosis - LED Status ............................................................................................... 10-9

10.11.

Spare Parts ................................................................................................................. 10-9

Chapter 11 - Technical Descript ion .............................................................................. 11-1



UNITROL 6800 User Manual L1006 vii

List of Figures

Figure 1-1 General View of the Excitation System (Typical configuration) ...................................... 1-1

Figure 5-1 Required Free Space around Equipment ....................................................................... 5-2

Figure 5-2 Abided Floor Unevenness ............................................................................................... 5-3

Figure 5-3 Transport Markings on Crate .......................................................................................... 5-4

Figure 5-4 Unpacking the Equipment ............................................................................................... 5-6

Figure 5-5 Moving with Suspension Beams ..................................................................................... 5-7

Figure 5-6 Moving with Lifting Plates ............................................................................................... 5-7

Figure 5-7 Moving the Excitation System ......................................................................................... 5-8

Figure 5-8 Bolting together Transport Units ................................................................................... 5-10

Figure 5-9 Floor Anchoring with Base Frame ................................................................................. 5-11

Figure 5-10 Floor anchoring without Base Frame (e.g. detached AVR) ........................................ 5-11

Figure 5-11 Eyebolts on Base Frame ............................................................................................. 5-11

Figure 6-1 Possible Arrangement of a Ground Busbar .................................................................... 6-3

Figure 6-2 Cable Inlet with Gland Plate at Bottom of Cubicle .......................................................... 6-4

Figure 6-3 Front and Side View of the +ER Cubicle ........................................................................ 6-5

Figure 6-4 Cable Holder for Fixing Cable Binders ............................................................................ 6-6

Figure 6-5 Cable Connections to Busbars ....................................................................................... 6-8

Figure 6-6 Basic Assembly of Cable to Busbar ................................................................................ 6-8

Figure 6-7 Busbar Connections to Busbar (Entry from Top) .......................................................... 6-10

Figure 6-8 Basic Assembly of Busbar to Busbar Connections ....................................................... 6-10

Figure 6-9 Connecting Ground Bus (Typical Layout) ..................................................................... 6-11

Figure 6-10 Connection of Control Cables to Transport Separation Point (View from Top) .......... 6-12

Figure 6-11 Auxiliary Supply Bus Connection at Transport Separation Point (View from Top) ..... 6-13

Figure 6-12 Connecting Busbars.................................................................................................... 6-13 Figure 8-1 Switch ON Sequence of Generator ................................................................................. 8-4

Figure 8-2 Switching OFF Sequence of the Generator .................................................................... 8-6

Figure 8-3 Q-/PF-Regulators ............................................................................................................ 8-9

Figure 8-4 Q-/ PF-Setpoint ............................................................................................................. 8-11

Figure 8-5 Changeover with Dual Channel System ....................................................................... 8-12

Figure 8-6 CH1 to CH2 Changeover States ................................................................................... 8-12

Figure 8-7 Changeover from AUTO to MANUAL Mode ................................................................. 8-13

Figure 8-8 AUTO to MANUAL Changeover States ........................................................................ 8-13

Figure 8-9 Changeover to Backup Field Current Regulator ........................................................... 8-15

Figure 8-10 Backup Channel Changeover States .......................................................................... 8-15

Figure 8-11 Overview Remote/Local Control ................................................................................. 8-16

Figure 8-12 States of the Excitation System .................................................................................. 8-19

Figure 8-13 Excitation Control Terminal (Typical layout after start-up) .......................................... 8-22

Figure 8-14 Static Display Elements .............................................................................................. 8-23

Figure 8-15 Login Procedure .......................................................................................................... 8-26

Figure 8-16 Command Buttons (Typical Layout) ............................................................................ 8-28

Figure 8-17 Panel Control and Release Button .............................................................................. 8-28

Figure 8-18 Warning before Clearing Events ................................................................................. 8-29

Figure 8-19 Converter Control Panel ............................................................................................. 8-31

Figure 9-1 Definition of the Active and Inactive Channels .............................................................. 9-10

Figure 9-2 UNS 3020 ..................................................................................................................... 9-13

Figure 9-3 BENDER IRDH 275 ...................................................................................................... 9-14

Figure 9-4 Washing Instructions for Filter Mats .............................................................................. 9-16



viii L1006 UNITROL 6800 User Manual

Figure 10-1 Event Details .............................................................................................................. 10-3



UNITROL 6800 User Manual L1006 ix

List of Tables

Table 2-1 Machine Data ................................................................................................................... 2-2

Table 2-2 Ambient Conditions .......................................................................................................... 2-2

Table 2-3 System Output Values ..................................................................................................... 2-2

Table 5-1 Tightening Torques for Supplied Bolts ........................................................................... 5-10

Table 6-1 Tightening Torques for Cables and Mechanical Connections .......................................... 6-7

Table 6-2 Tightening Torque for Busbar Connections, Bolt Size M12 ............................................. 6-9

Table 8-1 Customer Commands for Remote Control (Hardwired) ................................................. 8-16

Table 8-2 ECT, Commands in Remote Control .............................................................................. 8-17

Table 8-3 Customer Commands for Remote Control (Fieldbus) .................................................... 8-18

Table 8-4 ECT, Commands in Local Control .................................................................................. 8-18

Table 8-5 Examples of the System Event Matrix ........................................................................... 8-20

Table 8-6 Description of Event Types ............................................................................................ 8-20

Table 8-7 Status and Event Messages (Hardwired) ....................................................................... 8-20

Table 8-8 ECT, Available Function Selection Buttons .................................................................... 8-24

Table 8-9 ECT, Display of the Status Bar ...................................................................................... 8-25

Table 8-10 Access Levels, Default Factory Settings ...................................................................... 8-27

Table 9-1 Maintenance Schedule..................................................................................................... 9-4

Table 9-2 Maximum Fan Operating Hours ....................................................................................... 9-7

Table 9-3 Converter Fan Changeover .............................................................................................. 9-7

Table 9-4 Fan Supply Changeover .................................................................................................. 9-8

Table 9-5 Thyristor heat sink and air temperature of the converter ................................................. 9-8

Table 9-6 Measured Values for Machine, Converter and Transformer ............................................ 9-9

Table 10-1 Operating Conditions for Replacement of Components ............................................... 10-5

Table 10-2 Software Release Control of the Units (ECT) .............................................................. 10-6 Table 10-3 LED Allocation for AC 800 PEC Controller .................................................................. 10-9

Table 10-4 LED’s, Status Indication CCM, CCI and CIO ............................................................... 10-9



UNITROL 6800 User Manual L1006 xi

Terms and Abbreviations

AC Alternating Current

APD Advanced Power Distributor

AUTO Automatic Voltage Regulation

(Auto Mode)

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

Batt Battery

BOD Break Over Diode

BU Backup Channel (Regulation)

CB Circuit Breaker

CCI Converter Control InterfaceCCM Communication Control Measurement Device

CCM BU Communication Control Measurement Device (Backup Channel,BU)

CCP Converter Control Panel

CH1 Channel 1 of the Automatic Voltage Regulator

CH2 Channel 2 of the Automatic Voltage Regulator (Dual channelsystem)

CIO Combined Input/Output Device

CSV Comma separated values (Text file format)

CT Current Transformer

DC Direct Current

EA AC Power inlet Cubicle

ECT Excitation Control Terminal

EDR Ethernet Device Router

EDS Ethernet Device Switch

EG Converter Cubicle

EE De-excitation Cubicle

ER Control Cubicle

ESD Electrostatic Discharge

EXC Excitation

FCB Field Circuit Breaker

GDI Gate Driver Interface

GEN Generator

GFR Ground Fault Relay (Rotor Ground Fault Protection)

HW Hardware

ICU Input Coupling Unit

IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor



xii L1006 UNITROL 6800 User Manual

MANUAL Field Current Regulation(MANUAL Mode)

OEL Overexcitation Limiter

PC Personal Computer

PCB Printed Circuit Board

PDF Portable Document Format

PE Protective Earth (Protective Ground)

PF Power Factor

PPE Personal Protective Equipment

PS Power Supply

PSU Power Supply Unit (consists of APD + PS + ICU)

PT Potential Transformer

Q Reactive Power

R Release button ECT

SCI Snubber Control Interface

SCP Service Control Panel

SES Static Excitation System

SW Software

UEL Underexcitation Limiter

V/Hz Volt per Hertz (-Limiter)



Chapter 1 - Introduction

1-2 L1006 UNITROL 6800 User Manual

The excitation system is a thyristor-based static system for medium andlarge synchronous machines. It is used with 50 Hz, 60 Hz or 16 2/3 Hzpower supplies for field currents up to 10 000 A.

The excitation system is typically used for generator excitation in electricpower stations.

The excitation system provides automatic voltage regulation with single ordual channel microprocessor-based regulators and optionally an addi-tional backup current regulator.

The excitation system is designed to be fully integrated into higherhierarchical control systems.

1.3. Contents of this Manual

Chapter 1 - Introduction describes the contents of the User Manual andmentions the manufacturer’s address.

Chapter 2 - System Overview outlines the scope of supply and theapplicable codes.

Chapter 3 - Safety Instructions explains the various safety instructionlevels and provides general instructions on safety, which need to bestrictly observed.

Chapter 4 - Transportation, Storage and Decommissioning provides

information on environmental conditions to be maintained duringtransportation and storage, together with instructions for packing andunpacking, information on disposal and recycling of materials.

Chapter 5 - Mechanical Installation specifies the requirements for theinstallation site and gives instructions on how to mount the excitationsystem.

Chapter 6 - Electrical Installation provides information on cable routingand termination of control, power and auxiliary cables.

Chapter 7 - Commissioning provides information on preparing the devicefor commissioning.

Chapter 8 - Operation describes the actions for normal operation.Furthermore, the chapter provides an introduction into the control andredundancy principle, describes the use of the control and displayelements as well as calling up and displaying actual data and eventmessages.

Chapter 9 - Preventive Maintenance contains the maintenance scheduleand step-by-step instructions for specific maintenance tasks to be carriedout by the customer.

Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting provides instructions on how to proceedwhen encountering problems.




UNITROL 6800 User Manual L1006 1-3

The Appendix contains all project-specific technical information, such assystem description, technical data, electrical and dimensional drawings,parts list, parameter and event lists as well as descriptions and testreports.

1.4. Manufacturer’s Information

If any questions arise, consult the local ABB representative or themanufacturer:




Chapter 2 - System Overview

2.1. General

Chapter 2 - System Overview provides the project-specific technical dataon the excitation system.

This chapter contains:

Description of the excitation system.

Main technical data

Type designation

2.2. Descript ion of the Excitation System

2.2.1. Introduction

The Static Excitation System (SES) is based on long-standing know-howand proven technology. It contains microprocessor controllers and utilizes

state-of-the-art technology of printed circuit boards and highly-efficientsemiconductor circuits. The digital Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR)module is a multi-purpose power electronic controller. It not only controlsthe output of the power converters but also contains limiters, monitoringfunctions and other control circuits as listed in the scope of supply. Thecontrolled DC output of converters is equipped with a field suppressioncircuit in order to protect the generator field as well as the excitationsystem.





2.2.2. Main Technical Data (Example)

Machine data

The Static Excitation System has been designed for a synchronousmachine with the following name plate data:

Table 2-1 Machine Data

Sign Description

Sn Rated power MVA

Un Rated stator voltage kV

f n Rated frequency Hz

p.f. Rated power factor -

Ifn Rated field current A dc

Ambient Condi tions

Additionally, the following ambient conditions have been considered:

Table 2-2 Ambient Conditions

Sign Description

Tdes System design ambient temperature 40 °C

Tsto Temperature range during storage -40…+55 °C

Max. relative humidity (no condensation) 95 %

H Max. altitude of installation 1000 m.a.s.l

System Output Values

If operated under the specified ambient conditions, the output values ofthe excitation system are as follows:

Table 2-3 System Output Values

Sign Description

IEN Rated system continuous DC output current A

UEN Rated system continuous DC output voltage V

Ip System ceiling current A

Up On-load system ceiling voltage V

kUmin Undervoltage factor to reach ceiling voltage

tp Ceiling application time s

Rcr Response ratio (ANSI/IEEE Std 421.1-1986) s-

Tr Response time ms





The excitation system regulates the terminal voltage and the reactivepower flow of the synchronous machine by controlling the field currentusing converters.

For a so-called shunt or self-excitation, the excitation power is taken from

the machine’s terminals. The field current of the synchronous machineflows through the excitation transformer and the power converter. TheField Circuit Breaker can be located on the AC-side of the converter or onthe DC-side. The excitation transformer reduces the generator terminalvoltage to the required input voltage of the converter, provides thegalvanic separation between the machine terminals and the field windingand acts at the same time as the commutating reactance for the converter.The power converter converts the AC current into a controlled DC current.

At the beginning of a start sequence, the field flashing energy is takenfrom an auxiliary supply. As soon as the input of the converter reaches 10to 20 V, converter and control electronics are ready for operation and the

start-up energy is now derived from the generator terminals. After synchronizing with the network, the excitation system can operate in AVR mode, regulating the generator terminal voltage and reactive powerflow. It can also operate in one of the superimposed control modes, i.e.the machine’s Cos-phi (power factor) control or MVAr (reactive power)control. In addition, it can be included in an overall joint voltage andreactive control of the power plant.

The purpose of the field suppression equipment is to disconnect theexcitation system from the field winding and to discharge its energy asfast as possible. Depending on the nominal field current, the fieldsuppression circuit consists of a

Field circuit breaker with discharge contacts and field suppressionresistor, or a

Field circuit breaker, field suppression resistor and Crowbar thyristorswith their associated triggering electronics.

The brand-specific setup is already shown in the single-line diagram.





2.2.3. Type Designation

The Type-Designation of the excitation system is:

A 6 S - O/ U2 3 1 - S 4500

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

(1)

S

D

A

T

Configuration

Single channel (AUTO&MAN), incl. manual operation mode

Double channel (AUTO/MAN), independent MAN controller

2 AUTO channels (AUTO&MAN/AUTO&MAN), each incl. manual operation mode

Triple: (AUTO&MAN/AUTO&MAN/MAN)

(2)

5

6

Hardware

UNITROL 5000

UNITROL 6xxx

xxx: 800: PEC 800 (High /or very complex applications)080: PEC 80 (AVR or Low End SES applications)

(3)

S

T

Converter Configuration

Standard (n-1 redundancy)

Standard Twin (1+1 redundancy, 100% cold reserve)

(4)

(5)

O

Additional Functions

WithOut additional functions





(6)

U2

U5

Converter Type

UNL 13300

UNL 14300

(7) Converter Coupling / Connection

(8)

1

Converter Additional information

1 thyristor per bridge arm, 3-ph; 6-pulse

(9)

(10)

A

S

D

Breaker Configuration

AC-breaker on low voltage side of excitation transformer

DC-breaker, Single pole rupturing

DC-breaker, at least Double pole rupturing

(11) Breake Rated Current （ Amps)





The static excitation system contains the following major function groups:

Excitation Transformer (-T01)

Three-phase dry-type transformer with 2-stage temperature monitoring:

Power Converter (-G01)

The redundant power converter is designed in such a way that the loss ofone converter module has no influence on the output values.

Field Suppression (-Q02, -R02)

The field circuit breaker of the following type is connected to the DC sideof the Converter.

The discharge circuit comprises a Crowbar and a combination ofnonlinear discharge resistors as follows:




Chapter 3 - Safety Instructions

3.1. General

Chapter 3 – Safety Instructions includes the safety instructions that mustbe followed during installation, operation and maintenance of theexcitation system. Please read all instructions carefully before operatingthe device and save this manual for future reference.

3.2. Intended Audience

The User Manual addresses the following target groups:

Installation personnel.

Operators.

Maintenance and repair personnel.

The manual is not intended for commissioning staff (commissioning iscarried out by specially trained ABB personnel).

The installation personnel are mainly responsible for:

Preparing the installation.

Installing the excitation system on the mounting site (unpacking etc.).

Connecting transport separation.

Connecting cables (power cables, control cables).

Cooling water (if applicable)Connecting and preparing the cooling circuit .

Preparing commissioning.

The operators are mainly responsible for:

Operation.

The maintenance personnel are mainly responsible for:

Periodical checks of the excitation system.

Simple maintenance tasks.

Fault finding and calling ABB repair service.

Installation

Operation

Maintenance





3.3. Qualifications and Responsibi lities

3.3.1. Qualifications and Responsibili ties

Maintenance and repair personnel must have been trained in workingwith the excitation system and must be aware of the related dangersaccording to the currently valid regulations.

Maintenance personnel must be trained in emergency switch-offmeasures and need to know how to isolate the equipment from the mainsin case of an emergency.

Maintenance personnel must be familiar with accident preventionmeasures that apply to their workplace and must possess first aid andfirefighting skills.

The operator guarantees that all persons involved in maintenance andrepair activities on the excitation system have received appropriatetraining together with the necessary instructions, and have thoroughlyread and clearly understood the safety instructions in this chapter.

3.3.2. Consequences of Non-Compl iance

Failure to comply with the safety instructions increases the risk of electricshock and damage to the equipment. Third parties who approach theinstallation are also at risk.

If the scheduled maintenance activities are performed only partially or notat all, damage may occur with associated expensive repair costs.Particularly soiling and dust deposits on the converters increase the riskof voltage flashovers that can cause substantial damage.





3.4. Safety Concept

3.4.1. General

The safety regulations in this chapter generally apply when working onthe excitation system. You will find additional instructions and warningsrelated to particular topics or actions throughout the manual whererelevant.

The following regulations must be strictly observed:

The technical specifications and the typical application of theexcitation system (see Chapter 1 - Introduction, Field of Application) must be strictly adhered to.

Training of personnel: only trained personnel are allowed to install,operate, maintain or service the excitation system. Personnel mustbe specially instructed and informed about the danger areas.

Modifications without authorization: modifications and constructionalchanges of the excitation system are not allowed.

Duty of maintenance: the owner must ensure that the excitationsystem is used only under proper conditions and in a fully serviceablestate.

Operating environment: the user must fulfill the specified ambientconditions.

3.4.2. Safety Rules

The following safety procedures according to EN 50110-1 must absolutelybe followed if any (maintenance) work is carried out on the excitationsystem:

1 Disconnect completely.

2 Secure against re-connection.

3 Verify that the installation is dead.

4 Carry out grounding and short-circuiting.

5 Provide protection against adjacent live parts.





Hot cooling water (if applicable).

3.5. Safety Regulations

3.5.1. Structure of Safety Instructions

Symbol

Signal Word!

Situation – Type of Hazard Statement

Possible consequence – Consequence Statement

Essential safety measure – Avoidance Statement

The signal word is divided into five categories and emphasized by the use

of the following safety signs:

DANGER!

This symbol indicates an imminent danger resulting from mechanicalforces or high voltage. Non-observance leads to life-threatening physicalinjury or death.

!

WARNING!

This symbol indicates a dangerous situation. Non-observance may

result in bad or life-threatening physical injury or death.

CAUTION!

This symbol indicates a dangerous situation. Non-observance may leadto physical injury or cause damage to the installation.

NOTICE!

This symbol emphasizes important information. Non-observance maycause damage to the installation or to objects close to it.

IMPORTANT!

This symbol indicates useful information. Not to be used to indicatedangerous situations.





3.5.3. Addi tional Safety Instructions

Local and factory safety regulations must be followed strictly for allactivities while the system is in operation and when the doors to theconverter cubicle (+EG) are open.

For additional safety, it isrecommended to wear protectiveclothing, a face shield and hearingprotection.(PPE = Personal ProtectiveEquipment)

Additional measures must be implemented: Access to the work area must be restricted (safety fence) and yellowwarning signs with the words “Caution Extremely Dangerous HighVoltage" must be displayed.

Steps must be taken to ensure that switched-off systems cannot beswitched on, either due to control errors or by third parties (e.g. preventpossibility to switch on the system by means of padlocks).

3.6. Instructions for Emergency Situations

3.6.1. Firefighting

All personnel must be familiar with the location of fire extinguishers andemergency exits and must be able to operate the fire extinguishers.

Fire extinguishers are carbon dioxide (CO2) or foam-based.

CO2 fire extinguishers are intended for fighting fires in electricalinstallations and may not be directed at persons.

Foam extinguishers are intended for fighting fires in non-electricalequipment. They may be directed at persons but must not be usedfor extinguishing fires in electrical equipment.

DANGER!

In case of fire,

Be aware of voltage, toxic gases, overheating.

See the instructions below.





1 Shut down the system.

Operators must be familiar with the emergency shutdown sequence.

2 Put on a protection mask.

3 Use only CO2 to extinguish the fire, no foam, no water.

3.6.2. First Aid Measures for Electrical Installations

In case of an emergency, follow the instructions below:

DANGER!

A person is in contact with electricity.

There is a danger of electric shock for the first aider as well.

Do not touch the person until the system is grounded.

1 Shut down the plant.

Operators must be familiar with the emergency shutdown sequenceof the system.

DANGER!

Residual voltage of the rotating machine is present immediately aftershut-down of the system.

There is a danger of electric shock.

Wait until the system is grounded.

2 Switch off all power supplies and ground the system.

3 Remove the injured person from the dangerous location.

4 Provide first aid for electric shock.

5 Call for emergency assistance.

3.6.3. Pacemaker

DANGER!

Electrical and magnetic fields.

The system can cause malfunction of pacemakers.

Avoid being close to the excitation system.





Electrical and magnetic fields may influence pacemakers. It is difficult topredict the general sensitivity of pacemakers.

3.7. Danger Signs

Danger signs are attached to any equipment/location with a potentialdanger.

The degree and likelihood of such dangers are described by the signalwords DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION. The content of the warningsign contains information about the respective situation and thepreventive safety measures that must be taken.

Structure of danger signs:

Sign Description

DANGER

Hazardous voltage inside.

Disconnect power and

ground equipment before

maintenance work.

Signal word

Situation

Essential safety measures

Meaning of signal words and consequence statement:

Sign Descrip tion of the signal word

DANGER DANGER, electrical

This symbol indicates imminent danger that will resultin life-threatening physical injury or death.

WARNING WARNING, electrical

This symbol indicates a possible dangerous situationthat could result in serious physical injury or death.

CAUTION CAUTION, electrical

This symbol indicates a possible dangerous situationthat could result in moderate physical injury. This signalword can also be used for warnings related toequipment damage.




Chapter 4 - Transportation, Storage and

Decommissioning

4.1. General

Chapter 4 - Transportation, Storage and Decommissioning provides allinstructions for transportation, storage and decommissioning of theexcitation system. It also contains information on how to dispose of andrecycle materials and how to handle spare parts.


NOTICE!

First read and understand the general safety instructions in Chapter 3 -Safety Instructions before starting to work on the excitation system.

DANGER!

The top cover plate is not designed to carry loads.

The roof may collapse and there is risk of injury.

Do not step on the top cover plate.

NOTICE!

Converter components can be damaged while transporting theexcitation system.

The excitation system must be transported and stored in uprightposition.



Chapter 4 - Transportation, Storage and Decommissioning


4.3. Transportation

4.3.1. Transport Condit ions

The transport conditions are based on IEC 60721-3-2 "Classification ofenvironmental conditions".

Classification: 2K4 / 2B1 / 2M1 (with empty cooling circuit).

Transport time: max. 2 months.

4.3.2. Loading, Unloading and Moving on Site

For detailed instructions refer to Chapter 5 - Mechanical Installation.

4.4. Preservation and Storage

The storage procedures described below must be followed in order toavoid damage or a degradation of quality due to corrosion, dirt ormechanical damage. The corresponding precautions must be observedfrom the time the equipment is put into storage until the time it is takenout of storage and installed.

4.4.1. Storage Conditions

The equipment must be stored in the original packing, in a closed roomand must be placed on pallets or wooden supports. The storage roommust be clean, dry and dust-free.

The minimum requirements for storage are defined on the basis of IEC60721-3-1 "Classification of environmental conditions".

Classification: 1K2 */ 1B1 / 1C1 / 1S1 / 1M1.

Time of storage: 1 year.

Microclimatic class: X2 / Y1.

* max. allowed temperature: +55 °C.

Make sure that the following environmental conditions are fulfilled duringthe entire period of storage. ABB recommends keeping the airtemperature and the relative air humidity constant:

Air temperature : -25 °C to +55 °C (-13 °F to +131 °F).

Relative air humidity: 5% to 85%.

Access to the storage rooms should be restricted to authorized personnel.

In order to minimize the risk of damage, all equipment must be easily

Storage Buildings andLocations





accessible for inspection and/or repairs.

Equipment must be stacked in such a way that no item can be damagedby the weight of any other part.

Fire-fighting equipment must be present and easily accessible. Thestorage room must be kept clean at all times and the accumulation ofwaste and old packing material must be avoided. In order to preventsoiling or damage to the equipment, precautions must be taken to preventinsects and small animals from getting into the storage area.

4.4.2. Preparing Excitation System for Storage

If the excitation system must be stored for a period of up to one year, takethe following measures (in case of a longer storage period contact the ABB service organization):

1 Install and fix the excitation system on a wooden frame or pallet.

2 Cover all cable and air inlets and outlets with an impermeable plasticor aluminum foil and fix it with a wooden plate.

3 Add desiccant of appropriate quality:

1 desiccant unit (30 g) absorbing 6 g water vapor. Use the followingquantity with respect to the packaging material:

PE foil: 10 units/sqm foil.

ALU foil: 8 units/sqm foil.

4 Close all doors and lock them.

5 Use high-quality polyethylene or aluminum-combination foil as ahumidity barrier:

PE foil: 0.3 g/sqm/24 h water vapor diffusion.

ALU foil: 0.01 g/sqm/24 h water vapor diffusion.

6 Place humidity indicators (e.g. mechanical hygrometers) within thepackaging. Place them e.g. on the converter front doors.

4.4.3. Periodical Inspections

The storage conditions, the condition of the cubicles and the packagingshould be checked monthly for the whole storage period.

The following items must be checked:

1 Identification and label.

2 Covers and seals.

3 Protective coatings and materials.

4 Desiccants.

5 Mechanical damage.

6 Cleanliness.





NOTICE!

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic boards andcomponents!

Do not touch printed circuit boards or other sensitivecomponents without taking static-sensitive handling precautions.

Do not touch the components without wearing a wrist groundingstrap.

Put the board or component on a grounded working surfacewhich is protected against electrostatic discharges.

Hold a board only at the edge.

Handle a faulty board with care.

4.6. Decommissioning

!

WARNING!

Decommissioning work must be carried out with the appropriateknowledge and experience and using the right tools.

Otherwise, it could lead to injuries.

Make sure that only qualified personnel are performing such jobs.

4.6.1. Short-Term Standstil l

In case of a short-time standstill of the excitation system (less than 6months), the following instructions must be observed in order to avoid any

damages:1 Switch off all power supplies and ground the system.

2 Switch the circuit breaker to test position (if applicable).

3 Protect the excitation system against dust, humidity, dirt or otherdetrimental influences (see Chapter 4.4 - Preservation and Storage).

4 Periodically inspect the excitation system condition (see Chapter 4.4.3 - Periodical Inspections).





4.6.2. Long Term Storage

DANGER!

The excitation system operates with dangerous voltages of up to1500 V ac.

Handling live parts can lead to life-threatening situations, injury of thepersons involved or damage to equipment.

All decommissioning activities must be carried out while the system isswitched off and grounded.

1 Switch off all power supplies and ground the system.

2 Turn the circuit breaker to its test position (if applicable).

3 Discharge the circuit breaker spring system (if applicable).

4 Perform the following cable disconnection sequence:

1 Mark all cable connections.

2 Disconnect the power cables.

3 Disconnect the control cables.

4 Disconnect the grounding cables / bars.

5 Refer to Chapter 4.4.1 - Storage Conditions for all other storage

measures.

4.6.3. Dismantling the Excitation System and Disposal

Used materials can serve as raw materials for recycling or other purposes.For an ecological separation of materials and waste handling pleasecontact your community or the local waste disposal company.

Dispose of the following components according to local regulations:

Batteries.

Capacitors.

Printed circuit boards.

Electronic components.




Chapter 5 - Mechanical Installation

5.1. General

Chapter 5 - Mechanical Installation provides information on therequirements for the installation site and contains instructions for movingand installing the excitation system.

Refer to the Dimensional Drawing in A Client Appendix, Section A01 onthe data storage device.


All mechanical installation activities must be carried out by qualifiedpersonnel in compliance with local regulations.

NOTICE!

Before starting to work on the excitation system, the general safetyinstructions in Chapter 3 - Safety Instructions must be read andunderstood.

5.3. Installation Planning

In order to ensure a safe and faultless installation, a careful planning andpreparation is essential.

5.3.1. Safety Aspects

Adequate lighting and access to the place of installation must be ensured.Local safety regulations must always be considered (e.g. door locks forelectrical room, safety signs).

5.3.2. Ambient Condit ions on Site

Ambient factors such as relative humidity, air contamination, shock andvibration must be in compliance with the maximum permissible levels.

The following requirements must be met:

Maximum ambient temperature: according to technical data.





Transportation and storage as stated in Chapter 4 - Transportation,Storage and Decommissioning.

Operation with respect to climatic and environmental conditionsbased on IEC 60721-3-3 (3K3/3B1/3S2/3M3).

Wide fluctuations in temperature under conditions of high humidity are tobe avoided. If necessary, the installation site must be heated.

Condensation must be avoided.

5.3.3. Dimensions and Clearances

The cubicle must be mounted with adequate free space. The length of theexcitation system depends on the type. The height and depth are type-independent (see Figure 5-1).

The top should have a clearance of at least 500 mm (20") for installationpurposes.

1000 mm (40") of free space is required at the rear side of the excitationsystem. However, it facilitates the installation procedure when there issufficient working space behind the cubicles.

At least 1500 mm (60") clearance should be allowed in front of theconverter as an escape route. However, this distance may vary accordingto local regulations.

Front View

Top View

Figure 5-1 Required Free Space around Equipment





The exact dimensions of the actual configuration are given in theDimensional Drawing in A Client Appendix, Section A01 (see DataStorage Device).

5.3.4. Foundation, Floor Leveling

The floor must be made of non-flammable material, with a smooth andnon-abrasive surface. It must also be leveled and protected againsthumidity diffusion. In addition, the floor must be capable of supporting theweight of the cubicles (see Technical Data).

The maximum allowable overall unevenness must not exceed 5 mm per5 m (0.20" per 15’). In case of an uneven floor, the excitation system mustbe leveled by placing leveling plates between base frame and floor. Astrip foundation can also be used to obtain the required evenness.

Figure 5-2 Abided Floor Unevenness

The gap between base frame and foundation must be sealed with asuitable material (paste) to prevent unfiltered air from entering the

cubicles. The dimensions of the base frame are given in the DimensionalDrawing.

5.4. Moving Excitation System to Installation Site

5.4.1. Receipt of Delivery

1 All crates should be checked for external transport damage upondelivery and before unpacking.

If the packing shows signs of damage, the equipment must beunpacked in the presence of insurer’s and manufacturer’srepresentatives. External damage must immediately be written downon the shipping papers. Damage discovered after unpacking must bereported in writing to the insurers and the manufacturer within 1 week.

NOTICE!

The manufacturer will not accept any liability unless the damage isproperly reported.

Foundation





2 Unload the equipment from the transport vehicle by crane or forklift

truck.When moving crates with lifting gear, the gear must be applied at thepoints marked with the chain symbol according to DIN 55402, symbolG. See Figure 5-3.

When raising and moving the equipment packaged in foil, use theeyebolts with a suspension beam or lifting plates as shown in Figure5-5 and Figure 5-6.

NOTICE!

In order to avoid damage to the equipment do not remove the packingbefore moving the equipment to the site of installation.

Chain symbol for applying lifting gear

Figure 5-3 Transport Markings on Crate

5.4.2. Storage

3 If the equipment has to be stored prior to installation, proper storageconditions must be fulfilled according to Chapter 4 - Transportation,Storage and Decommissioning.

Transporting thePacked Equipment





5.4.3. Unpacking

NOTICE!

The excitation system must not be unpacked unless the surroundingarea is clean and dust-free. Furthermore, as long as the doors and cablecovers are open, no dust and dirt producing works are allowed duringthe installation.

Dust inside the excitation system can reduce the creepage distancesand increase the thermal stress.

If construction work is necessary, always cover the equipment withplastic sheets and carefully remove the dust.

Keep the doors and all other openings closed as good as possible inorder to avoid unnecessary pollution inside the cubicle.

Proceed as follows when unpacking the equipment:

4 Check the equipment: labels and nameplates must be checkedagainst the order. If there are any discrepancies between thedelivered items and the order, immediately contact the responsibleproject management at ABB.

5 Remove the top of the crate.

In case of foil packaging: remove all packaging material carefully. Donot use sharp or pointed tools to open the packaging. Continue withStep 7.

6 Remove the front, rear and side walls of the crate.

7 Do not take away the crate floor or the pallet when moving the unit byforklift. See Figure 5-4.

8 Check the cubicles for transport damage. Pay special attention to:

Bent doors and side walls.

Loose or unassembled parts.

Damaged parts.

Dust layers.

Water or humidity.

Damages caused by insects or vermin.

9 Record any damages as instructed in Chapter 5.4.1 - Receipt ofDelivery.





Rear wall Top of crate Side wall

Side wall Crate floor Front wall

Figure 5-4 Unpacking the Equipment

Some parts (e.g. spare parts) may be delivered in separate packages.

NOTICE!

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electronic boards and

components.

All electrical components must be handled with care.

Do not touch printed circuit boards or other sensitive componentswithout taking static-sensitive handling precautions.

5.4.4. Moving Equipment to Place of Installation

10 After unpacking, move the equipment to the place of installation by

crane or round bars.The equipment must always be put on a level surface. Make surethat the equipment cannot topple while being moved.

If moving the equipment by crane using the eyebolts or the lifting plates,the following must be assured:

When lifting the equipment with the base frame, always use theeyebolts attached to the base frame!

The equipment must be transported in such a way that it does notsuffer any shocks.

Unpacking AdditionalParts

Moving by Crane





Table 5-1 Tightening Torques for Supplied Bolts

Bolt size M6 M16

Torque (Nm) 4.5 80

Screw M6x16and washer

M16 bolts

Bolting together cubiclestructures

Bolting together base frames

Figure 5-8 Bolting together Transport Units

12 Check again all doors and covers for correct function (they must beopened/closed or removed without jamming or twisting). If this is notpossible, repeat the aligning process.

5.5.4. Floor Anchoring

After alignment, the equipment is anchored to the floor foundations.

13 Fix the excitation system to the floor. Refer to Figure 5-9 andFigure 5-10.

The anchoring holes are located in the corners of each transport unit.

Cubicle

Base plateBase frameScrew anchor M16 (2/3")

Foundation





Figure 5-9 Floor Anchoring with Base Frame

8 5 0 m m ( 3 3 .5 0 " )

Screw anchor M16 (2/3")

Figure 5-10 Floor anchoring without Base Frame (e.g. detached AVR)

14 Remove the eyebolts at the base frame or lifting plates (Figure 5-11).

15 Keep transport aids for later use.

Eyebolt

Figure 5-11 Eyebolts on Base Frame

5.6. Concluding Work

1 Check that the eyebolts are removed from the base frame (ifapplicable).

2 Remove all foreign objects, such as tools, packing materials or cableleft-overs from the cubicle.

3 Wipe insulated parts with an anti-static cloth. Do not use any solvents!

Depending on the design and the required protection type (>IP 21/ >IP 31), measures must be taken to seal the cubicles at the site ofinstallation. Sealing material and sealing strips are supplied.

The joined ends between the transport units must be sealed.

4 Treat and degrease the frame sections with a suitable cleaning agentbefore sealing them. The joint should then be sealed with sealer.

Sealing of Joined Endsof Transport Units





If the device has been delivered with lifting plates, the roof plate must besealed:

5 Plug the holes in the roof plate with the sealing plugs and applysealer.

If any damage to paintwork has occurred during transport and installation,the damaged spots must be touched up before commissioning theequipment.

Only polyurethane paints may be used for touching up damagedpaintwork, since only these are guaranteed to adhere properly to theoriginal coatings.

Small chips and scratches can be touched up using a fine-hairedbrush.

Fitting of Sealing Plugs(lifting platesdismantled)

Damage to Paintwork



Chapter 6 - Electrical Installation


4 Install the cables outside the cubicle according to local regulations.Use cable trays or ducts and strain relief for cable protection.

5 Carefully insert the cables through the respective holes in the glandplates.

6 Connect the cables according to the Electrical Drawings. Use thecable holders for cable shield grounding. For details refer to Chapter 6.5.3 - Cable Routing, Shield Grounding and Strain Relief.

It is recommended to apply cable identification tags.

7 Perform a wiring check.

6.5.3. Cable Routing, Shield Grounding and Strain Relief

IMPORTANT!

Strain relief is mandatory. However, instead of attaching the controlcables inside the cubicles as described below, they can also be fixedoutside the cubicle entry (e.g. in the neighboring cable tray). Localregulations must be observed.

Figure 6-3 shows a typical layout of the front and the sides of the +ERcubicle with the customer cable duct and customer terminals.

Cable strain relief fittings are situated under the customer cable duct.Strain relief can be achieved by fixing the cables to the cable holder withcable binders.

Customer cable ducts

Customer terminalblocks

Figure 6-3 Front and Side View of the +ER Cubicle

Remark: This is a typical layout. The actual layout can be different.

Cable Routing





The +ER cubicle is equipped with cable holders at the bottom. The cable

holders can be removed if not used.The cables are fixed to the cable holder using cable binders. The cableholders can be used for EMC grounding of the cable shield. Therefore, inorder to allow electrical contact with the shield, the cables must bestripped for approximately 50 mm (2”) in the area of the cable holder.

Figure 6-4 Cable Holder for Fixing Cable Binders

6.6. Connecting Power Connections

6.6.1. General

When laying the cables and wires the following must be observed:

Power cables must be isolated from the control cables. If possible,separate ducts must be used, otherwise the control cables must bekept apart from the power conductors by means of internal partitions.

The power cables must be well-fixated.

Keep the power cables as short as possible in order to minimizesensitivity to interference and voltage drops.

Busbar connections are always system-specific and defined in the

Dimensional Drawing.Busbar connections must be bolted (see Figure 6-6).

In order to avoid cold welding, screw sets for power connectionsmust be lubricated with contact grease MOLYKOTE® D Paste* beforemounting.(*Registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation)

Cable Strain Relief andGrounding





CAUTION!

The external power conductors must be fixed firmly to retainers in orderto withstand the high dynamic stresses that can arise in the conductorsin case of crowbar activation.

CAUTION!

Do not cut conductors and do not drill inside the cubicles.

Electrically conducting dust and chips may cause short circuits, whichcan lead to damage or malfunction.

Dust and chips caused by drilling, cable cutting and stripping must notenter the cubicle.

6.6.2. Power Connections with Cables

For the cable selection, refer to the standard IEC 60502 or DIN VDE 0276.

The power cables can be connected directly to the busbar with cable lugs.Proceed as follows:

1 Measure the required conductor length, strip the cables, apply cablelugs and place them beside the corresponding busbar through thecable duct. Do not yet connect the conductors.

2 Check the insulation of each cable before connecting them accordingto the specifications of the cable manufacturer.

3 Clean the contact surfaces of the busbar thoroughly using a lint-freecloth. Where the surfaces are very dirty, use a cleaning agent (e.g.alcohol) or a soft brush. The surfaces must be absolutely free of dirtand grease.

Because of oxidation, the cables must be immediately connected to thebusbars:

4 In order to avoid cold welding, lubricate the screw sets with contactgrease MOLYKOTE® D Paste before mounting.

5 Connect the phase cables to the corresponding busbars. Observelocal regulations and standards for tightening torques.

Table 6-1 Tightening Torques for Cables and Mechanical Connections

Bolt size M6 M10 M12 M16

Torque (Nm) 4.5 20 40 80





6 Verify that the conductors are arranged in the correct phase order. Wrong phase order may result in damaging the equipment.

7 Fix the external power cables with supports and retainers for strainrelief as shown in Figure 6-5.

8 Seal the cable entries and exits to prevent air, dust, humidity andanimals from entering into the cubicles. The seals must be made ofinsulating material and be fireproof.

Front view Side view

DC cable strain relief

Figure 6-5 Cable Connections to Busbars

screw-bolt lock washer busbar

cable lug washer hex-nut

Figure 6-6 Basic Assembly of Cable to Busbar

6.6.3. Power Connections with Rigid Bus

The alternative is to make the power connections with rigid busconnectors. Proceed as follows:

The external bus connectors are connected directly to the busbars in thecubicle. The internal busbars are provided with slots for M12 bolts.

1 Remove the busbar cover plate from the top of the cubicle.





2 Measure the required lengths for the bus connector and cut them tolength. For a dimension plan of the terminal bars refer to the Dimensional Drawings.

CAUTION!

Do not cut conductors and do not drill inside the cubicles.

Electrically conducting dust and chips may cause short circuits, whichcan lead to damage or malfunction.

Dust and chips caused by drilling, cable cutting and stripping must notenter the cubicle.

3 Drill the required holes into the bus connectors.

4 Lay the busbars to their final position.

5 Verify that the conductors are arranged in the correct phase order. Wrong phase order may result in damage of the equipment.

6 Clean the contact surfaces thoroughly using a lint-free cloth. Wherethe surfaces are very dirty, use a cleaning agent (e.g. alcohol) or asoft brush. The surfaces must be absolutely free of dirt and grease.

Because of oxidation, the busbars must immediately be connected:

7 In order to avoid cold welding, lubricate the screw sets with contactgrease MOLYKOTE® D paste.

8 Connect the phase conductors to the corresponding busbars asshown in Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8. Follow local regulations andstandards for tightening torques.

Table 6-2 Tightening Torque for Busbar Connections, Bolt Size M12

Number of busbars n = 2 n ≥ 3

Torque (Nm) 40 60

CAUTION!

The external power conductors must be fixed firmly with retainers towithstand the high dynamic stresses that can arise in the conductors incase of crowbar activation.

9 Fix the external phase conductors with supports.

10 Refit the busbar cover plate to the top of the cubicle.

11 Seal the conductor entries and exits to prevent air, dust, humidity andanimals from entering into the cubicles. The seals must be made ofinsulating material and be fireproof.





Figure 6-7 Busbar Connections to Busbar (Entry from Top)

The busbar to busbar connection is illustrated in Figure 6-8.

Screw-bolt Washer Busbar Hex-nut

Spring washer Washer Conical Spring washer

Figure 6-8 Basic Assembly of Busbar to Busbar Connections

6.6.4. Transformer Connections

Connect the external excitation transformer according to themanufacturer’s instructions and local regulations.

6.6.5. Connections for Ground Fault Relay

(if applicable)

For installation instructions refer to the ABB Instruction ManualHIER 95140 in B Common Appendix, Section B04 – 06 on the DataStorage Device.





6.7. Bridging Transport Separation

(if applicable)

A set of loose mounting material, which is supplied together with theequipment in a separate cardboard box, is required for the installation ofthe equipment.

The ground busbars mounted in the front part must be connected withM12 bolts to a separate connecting plate. Torque for the screws is givenin Table 6-1.

1 Mount the connecting plate for the ground bus between the transportunits (plate and bolts are included in loose mounting material)

(Figure 6-9).

- Screw M6x10- Lock washer- Washer

Figure 6-9 Connecting Ground Bus (Typical Layout)

The control and supply conductors of the transport units must beconnected as follows:

Each transport unit is equipped with terminal blocks, which must be joinedas shown in Figure 6-10.

1 Make the connections between the terminal blocks by means of shortwire bridges. These are supplied with the equipment and attached to

one of the terminal blocks.For details see the Electrical Drawings.

Loose MountingMaterial

Ground Busbar

Control Cables





Wire bridges

Terminals of transport unit 1 Terminals of transport unit 2

Figure 6-10 Connection of Control Cables to Transport Separation Point(View from Top)

The fiber optic cables and the supply cables from the converter cubiclesare retracted through the roof cable duct.

1 Connect the retracted fiber optic cables and the supply cables to theCCI board on the converter cubicles.

IMPORTANT!

Handle fiber optic cables with care. Do not touch the ends of the fibers,they are extremely dirt-sensitive. When unplugging a fiber optic cable,always hold the connector, not the fiber.

Observe the maximum long-term tensile load of 1.0 N and the minimum

bend radius of 25 mm (1").

The auxiliary supply bus is fed through the cubicles with a Woertz-System-Bus. Connections between the adjoining cubicles are made witha special connection box as shown in Figure 6-11.

1 Connect the flat cable supply bus from both cubicles to each other.Remove the protection caps from the terminals and insert wires asshown in Figure 6-11.

2 Refit the protection caps.

Control Cable Duct,Fiber Optic Cable

Auxiliary Supply Bus





Figure 6-11 Auxiliary Supply Bus Connection at Transport SeparationPoint (View from Top)

The principle of the power busbar connection is shown in Figure 6-12:

1 Connect the busbars using the connection pieces and M12 bolts (partof loose material). The required torque for the bolts is given inTable 6-1.

flexible connections

Connecting pieces M12 Bolts

Figure 6-12 Connecting Busbars

Power Busbar





6.8. Concluding Work

NOTICE!

Cable entries and exits must be sealed to prevent air, dust, humidity andanimals from entering into the cubicles. The seals must be made ofinsulating material and be fireproof.

Cubicles with floor plate:

1 Visually check that all cable glands are properly sealed.

Carry out the following final checks:

2 Check all busbar and frame connections of the joined transport units.

3 Check that the protection class requirements are fulfilled, especiallywith regard to floor plates and the cable inlet at the top of the cubicle.

4 General visual inspection: appearance, cleanliness, completeness,markings and presence of foreign objects.

5 Check that all cable connections and wirings made on site are correctand complete.

6 Check that the cable shields are correctly grounded where enteringthe cubicle.

7 Close all cubicle doors.

NOTICE!

If desiccant bags are supplied with the cubicles: Do not remove themuntil commissioning starts.

If the installation and wiring work must be interrupted, precautions mustbe taken to protect the equipment against dust, dampness and foreignobjects:

1 Close all cubicle doors.

2 Cover the equipment with plastic sheets.

3 Provide heating for the installation site or connect the cubicle heaters(if installed).

Systems with FloorCable Inlet

Final Checks

Special Instructions





NOTICE!

If desiccant bags are delivered with the cubicles: Do not remove themuntil commissioning starts.

!

WARNING!

In order to prevent condensation inside the cubicles, the cubicle heatersmust be connected. Before energizing the heaters make sure that:

The heaters are not covered.

There is no flammable material near the heaters.

See Chapter 5.6 - Concluding Work Damage to Paintwork



Chapter 7 - Commissioning


When commissioning is completed, the commissioning report is signed bythe customer as a sign of acceptance and by the ABB commissioningengineer. A copy of this report is handed out to the customer, the secondcopy is sent to ABB.

ABB provides the customer with the following files in electronic form:Test and Commissioning Report, updated as commissioned.

Hardware drawings, updated as commissioned.

Current parameter & signal file saved as commissioned (snapshot).

7.4. Concluding Work after Commissioning

After commissioning work is finished, the filter mats in the doors mustbe replaced. A set of replacement filter mats is included in the loosematerial.

See Chapter 9 - Preventive Maintenance

Acceptance



Chapter 8 - Operation


4 Temporary safety grounding equipment has been removed.

5 Battery supply for field circuit breaker (FCB) control and power supplyunit (24 V) is present.

6 No event messages are pending.

7 The excitation control system is switched to remote control mode.

8 The excitation regulation is switched to automatic voltage regulation(AUTO) mode.

9 Generator runs at nominal rotation speed.

8.3.2. Switch-on Sequence

e.g. Remote ECT

Proceed as follows: Indication on

ECT status bar:

1 To close the field circuit breaker (FCB), use thecommand FCB On (See in Figure 8-1).

The FCB is switched on.

AUX: On

2 Check that no event, alarm or inactive channel alarmis active.

Fault: - Alarm: -StbyAlarm: -

3 If the excitation system is supplied directly from thegenerator terminals through the excitationtransformer, check that the auxiliary voltage is

present.

4 Check that the rotation speed of the turbine is above90% of the nominal speed.

5 To switch on the excitation system, use the commandEXC On (See in Figure 8-1).

The voltage builds up within 5 to 20 s.The generator runs without load.

EXC: On

NOTICE!

The field flashing circuit may only be activated for 1 minute per hour. After 4consecutive unsuccessful attempts (5 s each), wait for at least one hourbefore attempting field flashing again.

6 Adjust the generator voltage by means of the raise/lower commands to the voltage setpoint (see inFigure 8-1) until it matches the network voltage.

The excitation system is now ready for operationunder load.





7 Close the generator circuit breaker as soon as thenetwork and generator voltage are synchronous (see in Figure 8-1).

The reactive power of the generator is close to zero. NET: OnLine

8 Set the desired reactive power within the operatinglimits of the generator by means of the raise/lowercommands to the voltage setpoint (see in Figure8-1).

The generator voltage is regulated and the generatorproduces reactive power.

NOTICE!

The excitation system will issue a TRIP message as soon as the powersupplies are missing.

1

2

5

3

4

r.p.m.

Generator

breaker

ON/OFF

Excitation

ON/OFF

Loadoperation(onnetwork)

ON

OFF

Synchron.system

VoltageRemote

control

Local

control

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Setpoint

Reference

RAISE/

LOWER

Byoperatingpersonnel

ON

OFF

Reactive

Power

Regulation

ON/OFF

Noevent

Noalarm

ResettoPresetvalue

FCB

On

FCB

Off

EXCOn

EXCOff

Q-Reg

On

Q-RegOff

Common

AlarmorTrip

Figure 8-1 Switch ON Sequence of Generator

(Refer to the text for explanation of to ).





5

8

9

6

7

r.p.m.

Generatorbreaker

ON/OFF

Excitation

ON/OFF

Loadoperation(onnetwork)

ON

OFF

Resettopresetvalue

VoltageRemotecontrol

Localcontrol

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Setpoint

Reference

RAISE/LOWER

ON

OFF

Reactive

Power

Regulation

ON/OFF

Noevent

Noalarm

FCB

On

FCB

Off

EXCOn

EXCOff

Q-Reg

On

Q-Reg

Off

CommonAlarm

orTrip

Figure 8-2 Switching OFF Sequence of the Generator

8.3.5. External Trip

Events in a number of peripheral devices can, in certain cases, cause asituation where neither remote nor local control of the excitation system ispossible. In such situations, it must still be possible to switch off theexcitation in an emergency. An Emergency OFF signal "External Trip"can be given out to the input terminal (See also A Client Appendix, A02 Electrical Drawings on the Data Storage Device).

An Emergency OFF signal switches off the generator and the excitationsystem. The supply voltages to the excitation system are not switched off.

It is essential that the operator knows how to carry out the emergencyshutdown.





NOTICE!

With the generator circuit breaker closed, the excitation system cannot

be switched off (by remote control), before the generator circuit breakerhas opened.

The Emergency OFF procedure should only be used, if it is not possibleto switch off the system by means of the normal OFF command.

8.3.6. Event/Trip

As soon as an event occurs, an error code is generated. The event loggerprovides a dynamic list of the actual events and an event log table withthe corresponding time stamp.

Touch the information button or double-click the event to get theinformation including troubleshooting instructions. Do not forget to savethe recorded event log table (see Chapter 8.8.7 - Event Logger ).

If an event occurs during operation, the system can normally continueoperation. Automatic shutdown takes place if the event is a trip.

CAUTION!

The event logger provides important information on the excitationsystem.

Cleared data complicate the diagnostics for maintenance ortroubleshooting.

It is not allowed to clear the event logs before the event log table issaved. (refer to Chapter 8.8.7 - Event Logger )





8.4. Description of the Control Functions

8.4.1. ON/OFF Commands

In this section the different commands and their effect on both theexcitation system and the generator are described briefly.

The ON command closes the field circuit breaker, as long as no trip signalis active.

The field circuit breaker can only be opened if the generator circuitbreaker is already open and the excitation switched off (generator is in

no-load condition).

The command EXC ON is used to initiate the excitation of the generator.The excitation feeds the generator rotor with field current so that thegenerator voltage rapidly builds up to nominal voltage.

The ON command is non-effective as long as a trip command is active.The excitation cannot be switched ON before the field circuit breaker isclosed. A typical Start/Stop sequence for generators is shown in Figure8-1 and Figure 8-2.

The command EXC OFF can only be carried out if the generator circuit

breaker is already open (generator is in no-load condition). It is notpossible to execute the command FCB/EXC OFF from local control.

The firing angle of the converter is thereby shifted to inverter mode (forfield energy feedback) and the discharge resistor is switched in parallel tothe rotor winding, so that the generator can be quickly discharged throughthe converter and the discharge resistor. After 60 s, the firing pulses tothe converter are blocked so that the converter is completely switched off.

If the generator is connected to the network and the AUTO mode is in

operation, the chosen superimposed regulator can be switched ON. Bothregulators are superimposed to the voltage regulator, but react slowly tochanges in the operating conditions.

Short-term network disturbances therefore do not influence thesesuperimposed regulators. They are absorbed by the voltage regulator.

All limiters of the AUTO mode are enabled and, if necessary, have impacton the voltage regulator output including the superimposed components.For further details refer to Chapter 8.4.2 - Operation Modes and Setpoint Adjustment.

Field Circuit BreakerON/OFF

Excitation ON/OFF(Start, Stop)

Reactive Power/

Power FactorRegulator ON/OFF





S e t p o i n t

Q / PF

Regulator

S e t p o i n t

AV R

raise

lower

raise

lower

SuperimposedRegulator VoltageRegulator

Figure 8-3 Q-/PF-Regulators

The reactive power regulator and the power factor regulator (Cos φ) havetheir own setpoint (setpoint integrator). If the superimposed regulators areswitched off, the setpoint always follows the actual value. Therefore theoperating point of the generator will remain unchanged in case of atransition from the automatic voltage regulator to the superimposedregulator.

Low-frequency oscillations of the generator magnet wheel and/or thenetwork frequency can be damped by means of the power systemstabilizer (PSS).

The PSS is enabled as soon as the generator‘s active power reaches acertain adjustable value and the generator voltage is within an adjustablerange (e.g. 90 to 110% UGN). The power system stabilization does notrequire any settings done by the operating personnel.

The PSS can always be switched off manually and is switched offautomatically if the generator’s active power and voltage are out of the

selected ranges or if the generator is no longer connected to the network.

In case of a trip (e.g. by the generator protection), the excitation system isautomatically switched off and the field circuit breaker is opened.

Further procedure:

After the excitation has been switched off due to a trip, the eventmessages must be checked on the ECT. The disturbance has to beeliminated by authorized personnel. Further advice for troubleshootinginternal trips is given in Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting.

8.4.2. Operation Modes and Setpoint Adjustment

In the excitation ON sequence, the internal setpoint automatically followsthe preset value with a steady increase. (Reference tension = 100%).

However, the setpoint can also be supplied externally as an analog valueor across a fieldbus interface.

The setpoint adjustments can also be accomplished manually by meansof raise/lower commands from the excitation control terminal (ECT). Afeedback indication MIN / MAX appears, when the setpoint is reached.

Power SystemStabilizer ON/OFF

Switching OFF due toan Event/Trip

Setpoint





With "Bus Voltage Tracking" equal to “true”, the internal AVR-setpoint isadjusted to the value of the busbar voltage. In this way, the generatorthen follows the busbar voltage as long as both are not synchronized.The following conditions deactivate the "Bus Voltage Tracking" function:

- Loss of "Bus Voltage" signal- Status signal “Generator synchronized”.- Raise / Lower command of “synchronizing unit”- Off command for “Bus Voltage Tracking”

In AUTO mode, the setpoint of the generator voltage is adjusted bymeans of the raise / lower commands. In no-load operation, changing thissetpoint adjusts the generator voltage, in operation under load, thisadjusts the reactive power. If the operating limit of the rotor and/orgenerator stator is exceeded, limiting regulators will inhibit furtherchanges of the raise / lower commands.

If the generator voltage setpoint reaches its minimum or maximum, the

message "Active regulator MIN-POS/MAX-POS" will appear. If the raise/lower keys are pressed together, no adjustment of the setpoint will takeplace. When the excitation system is switched on, the generator voltagesetpoint will automatically be set to the nominal value.

The MANUAL mode is not active in normal operation. The operator canchoose this mode for tests or troubleshooting purposes. An automaticchangeover to MANUAL mode can only take place if the generatorvoltage measurement is lost.

In MANUAL mode, the setpoint of the field current is adjusted by means

of the raise/lower commands. In no-load operation, changing this setpointadjusts the field current and thus the generator voltage; in operationunder load, this adjusts the reactive power. In MANUAL mode, only a PQ-Restrictor for underexcitation (to prevent generator slipping) and a V/Hz-Restrictor (to prevent magnetic saturation) are available. Unlike for AUTOmode, the setpoint is not limited in case an operating limit of the rotorand/or generator stator is exceeded. Therefore it must be ensured thatthese operating limits (according to the power diagram) are neverexceeded.

If the field current setpoint reaches its minimum or maximum, themessage "Active regulator MIN-POS/MAX-POS" appears. If the raise/lower keys are pressed together, no adjustment of the setpoint will takeplace. When the excitation system is switched on and when the generatorcircuit breaker opens, the field current setpoint is automatically set toapproximately 90% of the no-load field current value.

NOTICE!

While MANUAL mode is selected, the operating condition of thegenerator should be watched carefully.

Do not leave the unit unattended in this condition.

Bus Voltage Tracking

in AUTO Mode

in MANUAL Mode





The slow reaction of the superimposed Q-/PF-Regulator must beconsidered when adjusting the setpoint. Otherwise the system couldreach an unintended operating condition due to the regulator lagging.

If the reactive power/power factor setpoint reaches its minimum ormaximum, the message "Active regulator MIN-POS/MAX-POS" willappear.

In order to gain better control over this setpoint adjustment, the setpointintegrator of this regulator can be integrated in the control system of thecontrol room. The output of the setpoint integrator is then supplied directlyto the excitation system as a remote setpoint for the reactive powerregulator/power factor regulator (e.g. as 4 to 20 mA signal).

If the remote setpoint reaches the internal minimum or maximum, it has

no effect beyond these internal limits and the message "Active regulatorMIN-POS/MAX-POS" appears (see Figure 8-4).

t

R E M O T E R E F E R E N C E V

A L U E

I N T E R N A L R

E F E R E N C E V

A L U E

0mA

4mA

20mA

AIxLOWVALUE

AIxLIVEZERO

AIxHIGHVALUE

REFERENCEVALUEMINACTIVE

ALARMAIxFAIL

HLREF

LLREF

REMOTEREFERENCEVALUE

REFERENCEVALUEMAXACTIVE

-Q-/PF-REFERENCEVALUE

+Q-/PF-REFERENCEVALUE

Figure 8-4 Q-/ PF-Setpoint

8.4.3. Channel and Mode Changeover

Applies to dual channel systems only

This excitation system features two fully independent control channels,channel 1 (CH1) and channel 2 (CH2). Both channels are equivalent, sothat either channel can be freely selected as the active one. Theremaining backup (or inactive) channel is continuously and automaticallyupdated to match the active channel.

in Reactive Power/Power FactorRegulator Mode

Changeover fromCH1 to CH2





The changeover from the active to the backup channel does not changethe regulation mode.

AVR

FCR

CH1

CH1

AUTO

MANUAL

AVR

FCR

AUTO

MANUAL

CH2 CH2

Figure 8-5 Changeover with Dual Channel System

Figure 8-6 CH1 to CH2 Changeover States

Basically, a channel changeover can be carried out at any time, except in

the following situations:If an event is detected in the active channel that requires channelchangeover, an emergency changeover to the second channel willtake place automatically. It is not possible to switch back to thedefective channel until the reason for the event has been eliminated.

A manual changeover from the active to the inactive channel is notpossible if the inactive channel is defective.

If an event causes a channel changeover, a dynamic disturbance in thegenerator voltage can occur simultaneously. However, the inactivechannel (to which changeover automatically takes place at this instant)should not follow this dynamic disturbance in the generator voltage. Inorder to achieve this, the inactive channel always follows up with theactual generator voltage relatively slowly and with a delay.

This relatively slow follow-up of the inactive channel must be taken intoaccount in case of a manual changeover from the active to the inactivechannel: immediately after a change in the generator voltage thechangeover is delayed for a short time. In this way, a bumplesschangeover is always achieved.





Each channel features an automatic voltage regulation (AUTO) mode anda field current regulation (MANUAL) mode.

In AUTO mode, the generator voltage is regulated in a way that thevoltage produced at the generator terminals is as constant as possible.

On the contrary, in MANUAL mode, the field current is kept constant. Incase of a fluctuating generator load, the field current setpoint must bemanually followed up to keep the generator voltage constant.

AVR

FCR

AUTO

MANUAL

Figure 8-7 Changeover from AUTO to MANUAL Mode

Figure 8-8 AUTO to MANUAL Changeover States

Basically, it is possible to switch between operating modes at any time,because there is always an automatic follow-up control from the active tothe inactive regulator. The following should be taken into account:

If an event that requires channel changeover is detected in AUTOmode, an emergency changeover to MANUAL mode will take placeautomatically. It is not possible to switch back to the defectivechannel until the reason of the event has been eliminated.

There will be no changeover from AUTO to MANUAL mode if there isa disturbance in the field current regulator.

The generator can operate in AUTO mode within extreme yetpermitted operating ranges, which lie outside of the permitted (andset) operating ranges for MANUAL mode. In these cases, the fieldcurrent regulator can no longer follow up with the automatic voltage

regulator. The feedback indication "CH XFER" (Channel balanced -or Ready on the Status bar of the ECT) allows checking the follow-upof the field current regulator.

In MANUAL mode, it is possible to reach generator voltages outsidethe range of the AUTO setpoint. In that case, the voltage regulatorcan no longer follow up with the field current regulator.

Changeover from AUTO to MANUALMode





If an event causes an automatic changeover to MANUAL mode, thesetpoint prior to the event is maintained. For this purpose, the follow-upcontrol of the field current regulator reacts with a delay and relativelyslowly to changes in the field current.

This relatively slow follow-up behavior of the field current regulator mustbe taken into account for a manual changeover from AUTO to MANUALmode. The behavior is comparable to a changeover from CH1 to CH2.

NOTICE!

The MANUAL mode is designed as field current regulation (noregulation of the generator voltage). Therefore, in MANUAL mode it isnecessary that the operating personnel expertly monitor the excitation ofthe generator.

As long as the generator current and voltage transformer signals arepresent, an underexcitation limiter also prevents a dangerousunderexcitation of the machine in MANUAL mode, which in extremecases could lead to slipping. In addition, in no-load operation withreduced rotational speed, a V/Hz restrictor reduces the excitation toprevent oversaturation of the machine and the connected transformers.The operating variables such as generator voltage, generator currentand reactive power must be monitored by the operating personnel and ifnecessary adjusted by changing the field current setpoint.

The excitation system contains an additional independent backup fieldcurrent regulator with its own gate controller.

In case of a failure of both regular channels (AUTO and MANUAL mode),control is automatically switched over to the backup channel. This backupchannel has limited functions: It only provides field current regulation(MANUAL mode) and contains an excitation transformer overcurrentmonitor.

Therefore, the operation with the backup channel is only a temporaryemergency situation. If the backup channel is activated, the excitationsystem should be switched off in an orderly manner and the failuresrepaired (see Chapter 8.3.4 - Shut-down Sequence).

Backup Field CurrentRegulator in Operation





8.5.3. Remote Control, Excitation Control Terminal (ECT)

The ECT can be used as a remote and/or local control terminal (seeFigure 8-11).

Table 8-2 ECT, Commands in Remote Control

Command +Release button

Command Remote Feedback

- Field breaker -FCB OffFCB On

Field Circuit Breaker open or close XX

FCB OFFFCB ON

- Excitation -EXC OffEXC On

Excitation switch OFF or ON XX

Exc. OFFExc. ON

- Channel -CH1CH2

- Channel - Active channel chosen CH1 or CH2 X

XChannel1Channel2

- Mode - AutoMan

- Mode -Operation mode in AUTO or MANUAL X

X Auto

Manual

- Q-Regulator -Q-reg OffQ-reg On

- Q-Regulator -Reactive power regulator switch OFF or ON X

XOFFON

Setpoint reference button Indication

Raise, Lower1 Setpoint of the active regulator X 90 to 110%

1): The commands from the Hardware Interface are released in this mode as long as the system is not

synchronized.

8.5.4. Remote Control, Fieldbus

The following protocols are supported by the Excitation Control Platform:

Modbus RTU.

Modbus TCP.

Profibus DP V0.

OPC DA/A&E.

The commands and feedback indications for remote control of theexcitation system are the same as in the hardwired case.





Table 8-3 Customer Commands for Remote Control (Fieldbus)


Field Circuit Breaker ON, OFF X X

Excitation ON (START), OFF (STOP) X X

The fieldbus connection to the external control is done via Anybus-Smodules. For more information see the document "Serial LinkInterconnections" in A Client Appendix, Section A04 RemainingDocuments on the Data Storage Device. It describes the serialcommunication concept with different fieldbus adapters includinginstallation and Start-up Guide.

8.5.5. Local Control, ECT

The ECT can be used as a remote and/or local control terminal. (SeeFigure 8-11)

Table 8-4 ECT, Commands in Local Control

Command +Release button


- Field breaker -FCB Off

FCB On

Field Circuit Breaker open or close X

X

FCB OFF

FCB ON

- Excitation -EXC OffEXC On

Excitation switch OFF or ON XX

Exc. OFFExc. ON

- Channel -CH1CH2

- Channel - Active channel chosen CH1 or CH2 X

XChannel1Channel2

- Mode - AutoMan

- Mode -Operation mode in AUTO or MANUAL X

X Auto

Manual

- Q-Regulator -Q-reg Off

Q-reg On

- Q-Regulator -Reactive power regulator switch OFF or ON X

X

OFF

ON

Setpoint reference button Indication

Raise, Lower1 Setpoint of the active regulator X 90 to 110%

1): The commands from the Hardware Interface are released in this mode as long as the system is not

synchronized.





8.6. Analog In- and Outputs

8.6.1. Analog Inputs

The following analog input signals can be processed in the excitationsystem:

Temperature of the excitation transformers PH1 to PH3.

Remote setpoint.

8.6.2. Analog Outputs

The following analog outputs can be connected to output terminals and

can be used in the control room.

Field current signal.

For details, see A Client Appendix, Section A02 Electrical Drawingson the Data Storage Device.

8.7. Event Messages

8.7.1. Impact of Event States

Normal operation states.See Chapter 8.3.

EventsThese are categorized in up to 8 event arraysof 12 categories each that initiate a certainaction. See table below.

Normal Operation States Event Action

Figure 8-12 States of the Excitation System





The following event array shows examples of events that are allocated tocertain groups.

Table 8-5 Examples of the System Event Matrix

Signal nameEvent Description 6

: O t h e r c h a n n e l H W

f a u l t

7 : B U C h a n n e l H W

f a u l t

8 : C h a n n e l t o B U l i n k l o s s

9 : E m e r e n c

s t o

1 0 : T r i 1

1 1 : T r i 2

1 2 : S t a r t - u

i n h i b i t

ConvRed1Flt Converter redundancy fault level 1 is reached. X

FCB1TurnOnFlt FCB 1 ON failure X

OvrCurrInstFlt Overcurrent instantaneous fault is reached. XCCMLinkFlt CCM Link is faulty. X

Additionally, the events in the ECT are subcategorized as follows.

Table 8-6 Description of Event Types

Event Type Description

Information Typically displays a message initiated by an action

Alarm Typically displays a failure of a system or of a part of the system

Error Displays a serious system fault, initiates a trip

8.7.2. Status and Event Messages

In addition to the feedback indications, the following status and eventmessages are displayed in the control room (see A Client Appendix,Section A02 Electrical Drawings on the Data Storage Device).

Table 8-7 Status and Event Messages (Hardwired)

Feedback

Ready for changeover AUTO/MANUAL

Local control

Under-/Overexcitation limiter

Common event

Spare digital output

A smooth changeover from AUTO to MANUAL mode will only beguaranteed if the feedback indication appears.

Ready for Changeover





This status message means that the system cannot be operated byremote control.Remedy: Changeover to remote control.

Either an overexcitation or underexcitation limiter is now active. Theformer reduces the field current, whereas the latter increases the fieldcurrent. The generator voltage regulator or superimposed regulator (ifswitched on) is no longer effective. Operation with continuous limitation ispermitted. However, this generally impairs the dynamic behavior of theexcitation system in case of load changes.

Remedy: If possible, deactivate limiter by adjusting the setpoint.

In case of an event, the maintenance personnel must be notified. Thesystem continues normal operation. But in case of a fault, automatic

shutdown takes place. However, the system must not be started up aftera shutdown until all causes of events have been eliminated and thecorresponding messages have disappeared.

Local Control

Under-/Overexcitationlimiter

Event





8.8. Descript ion of the Excitation Control Terminal (ECT)

8.8.1. Overview of the Screen after Start-up and the Display Elements

The description of the Excitation Control Terminal (ECT) in this chapter isbased on the Operating instructions of the Control Terminal which can befound in Operating Instructions on the Data Storage Device.

Figure 8-13 Excitation Control Terminal (Typical layout after start-up)

The ECT is used to control and monitor the excitation system. The ECTcan be installed as a door panel at the excitation system for local controland/or in the control room for remote control purposes.

The ECT is a powerful industrial PC with a user friendly Human Machine

Interface that runs independently of the control CPUs. The TFT touchscreen provides a range of selectable screens showing information aboutthe actual status of the system in graphical and numerical form. Inaddition, authorized personnel can view and adjust all parameter values. Analyzing tools for troubleshooting are also available. Important data isstored in the ECT and can be displayed on the TFT or exported for furtherinvestigation.

In order to protect the system against unauthorized manipulation, differentpassword-protected operation levels can be defined.

The ECT requires a hard lock (Dongle in green color) to function.





To make sure that the operator has an overall process overview, the mostimportant system display elements are always visible on the screen:

System status bar

Panel control button(to switch to Active Control Mode)

Not logged in with a password, anECT with higher priority is in

operation or there is no connection tothe UNITROL-System.

gray

The system cannot be operated ormonitored

red

The operation of the system isauthorized

green

Function selection buttons

Setpoint indication and setpoint

command buttons raise and lower .

Command buttons

Figure 8-14 Static Display Elements

Static DisplayElements





8.8.2. Function Selection Buttons

Table 8-8 ECT, Available Function Selection Buttons

Selection Button Descrip tion

Operations Start-up window, instruments andcommand buttons

Powerchart Visualization of operating point ofmachine, actual values of the system

Diagrams Simplified single line diagram, actualvalues of the system

Slow Trending Graphs, cycle time > 100 ms

Fast Trending Graphs, cycle time ≥ 1 ms

Transient Recorder Oscilloscope for a short time data logging

Events Event logger, alarm list

Parameters Parameter and signal selection andadjustments

Login or Logout Password input or back to level -

Options Application Settings(requires operation level 5)

The operator has operation to a set of screens that inform about theexcitation system status.

All indications on the screens are based on real-time information from thesystem. This means that all data is retrieved directly from the selectedchannel.





8.8.4. Login Procedure

Users without password can only supervise the system.

- After touching LOGIN the

window [Login] opens toenter the User ID and thePassword

- To open the User ID, touchthis button

[Login]

- Scroll to the desiredOperation Level[up] or [down]

- Accept or reject the UserID [OK] or [cancel]

[Users]

,

[Users]

,

- To open the PasswordText Editor, touch this button

- Enter the password for thedesired operation level

- Accept or reject thepassword [OK] or [cancel]

- Accept or reject the Login

[OK] or [cancel]

[Login]

[Text Editor]

,

[Login]

,

Figure 8-15 Login Procedure





General rule for passwords and operation levels: A higher operation level includes all lower level functions as well.

Table 8-10 Operation Levels, Default Factory Settings

PasswordDefault Value Operation Level Permitted ActivitiesDefault Settings

administrator Administrator Full operation, inclusive password andrule definition rights

sample (e.g.) Sample = PersonalOperation Level

User with a Personal Operation Levelcan be defined by the Administrator

test5 5 = Commissioning The settings menu is available

test4 4 = Maintenance Permission to change parameters,event list can be cleared

test3 3 = Diagnostics Operation to the backup channel, EventLogger

test2 2 = Operator All control buttons are available,Trending

-- - = Viewer Only status and actual values can beviewed

8.8.5. Operation

After login, the color of the panel control button (hand)changes to red.

Operation modes After touching the button the color changes to greenThe system can now be operated locally or remotely.Both modes have the authorization to operate thesystem.

Notice: The Service operation mode has a higher priority than the localECT operating mode. If the system is operated in the former modes, theECT loses authorization, a changeover is not possible.

The priority of the operation modes are as follows:

1. Service2. Local ECT 3. Remote operation4. Fieldbus Master5. Fieldbus6. Remote operation ECT

Remark: A failure of the ECT or an interruption in the communication ofthe ECT to the hardware has no influence over the system operation,because the Remote Operation is taking over the command (defaultsetting).

Operation Levels





Screen Operations

The main functions of the excitation system can be controlled with the

command buttons. The corresponding status feedback shows a differentbackground color.

The following figure gives the available standard commands:

Figure 8-16 Command Buttons (Typical Layout)

Before one of the command buttons can be used, the following conditionsmust be fulfilled:

Touch panel control button

green hand Control Mode is active.

The user can control the excitation systemaccording to the selected operation level

A red hand allows only viewer operation.

Select the release button R within the next 5 s

The red lock changes to green.

to

Figure 8-17 Panel Control and Release Button

CH1 to CH2 or back

- Touch the command buttons R CH2 or R CH1

AUTO to MANUAL or back

- Touch the command buttons R Man or R Auto

Command Buttons

Channel Changeover

Mode Changeover





8.8.6. Parameters

Password Operation level 4

Commands without buttons are found in the parameter list

Screen Parameters

Choose path [Control IT \ In \ SM_StateMachine] Command … (e.g.ForceChannel1)Value -> True (double touch of the signal opens the Editor Screen)

8.8.7. Event Logger

Screen Events

The event indications on the status bar of the ECT are collectivemessages for all events/trips that occur in the excitation system. Details

can be viewed on screen Events of the ECT.

Screen Events

Buttons to save/print the event logtable

Screen Events

Button to reset the events.

Not available if the ECT is configured as a remote panel.

Password Operation level 4

Screen Events

Button to clear the event log table.

Figure 8-18 Warning before Clearing Events

Commands without

Buttons

Event Messages

Save, Print

Reset the Events

Clearing Event LogTable





8.9. Descript ion of the Converter Control Panel (CCP)

The converter control panel for the UN6800 system provides the following

features:

Monitoring of three actual converter parameter values.

Parameter viewing.

Event logger.

Real time clock and synchronization with PEC controller.

Soft Key commands:

The soft key commands are defined in the bottom line of the LCD display

just above each key.

Display Contrast:

To adjust display contrast, simultaneously press the MENU and Up orDown key.

Use the Main Display to read information on the converter status. To viewthe Main Display, press EXIT until the LCD display shows the followinginformation.

The LCD Display is divided into three main areas:

The top line of the display shows the basic status information of theconverter: OFF, ON, ISOLATED.

The middle area includes three lines displaying customizedparameter values or the menu for PARAMETERS, EVENT LOGGERand CLOCK SET.

The bottom line shows the currently allocated command for the twosoft keys, such as MENU, ENTER.

The status LED is located on the top left area of the panel:

- Green: Normal operation.- Flashing green: Event (Alarm) pending.- Red: Event (Fault) pending.

General DisplayFeatures

Main Display

Status LED




Chapter 9 - Preventive Maintenance

9.1. General

Chapter 9 - Preventive Maintenance contains the maintenance scheduleand the step by step instructions for the specific maintenance tasks. Itaddresses qualified personnel who are responsible for the excitationsystem.

NOTICE!

To maintain safe and reliable operation of the excitation system, ABBrecommends taking out a service contract with the local ABB serviceorganization. For more information contact your local servicerepresentative.

NOTICE!

ABB recommends periodical training for the maintenance personnel.

NOTICE!

During the warranty period, any repair work must be carried outexclusively by ABB service personnel.

The customer is responsible for observing the maintenance intervals. Aperiodic maintenance can prevent system malfunctions.

ABB is not liable for defects as a result of neglecting maintenance work.

Operation of the excitation system during a preventive maintenanceactivity is carried out with the ECT and based on Chapter 8 - Operation.

NOTICE!

Several password operation levels are necessary when operating theECT. Regular operation requires operation level 2; for other activitiesrefer to Chapter 8, Table 8-8 ECT, Available Function Selection Buttons.






Before starting to work on the excitation system, the general safety

instructions in Chapter 3 - Safety Instructions must be read andunderstood.

Some situations require ON-LINE maintenance activities. Otherwise, it isnot allowed to work without the excitation system in grounded condition.Local and factory regulations must be strictly followed for all activities.

DANGER!

Dangerous voltage.

The live parts are located directly behind the door, any contact with

them will cause serious or even fatal injury.If the excitation system is in operation, it is absolutely forbidden to openthe right door of the DC Deexcitation cubicle (+EE) and the door of the AC Power inlet cubicle (+EA), not even for visual inspection.

9.3. Standard Procedures for Maintenance

As mentioned in Chapter 9.1 - General, the excitation system is operatedwith the ECT.

For maintenance works proceed as follows:

1 On the Excitation Control Terminal (ECT), switch the excitationsystem to local mode.

NOTICE!

Operation level 4 is required for a mode change.

2 Check the Event Logger for active events.

On the ECT, select Events, dynamic list of actual events and the

event log table.

CAUTION!

The event logger provides important information on the excitationsystem.

Cleared data will complicate the diagnostics for maintenance ortroubleshooting.

It is not allowed to clear the event logs before the event log table issaved.





If an event is pending, refer to Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting.

3 Carry out the inspections, checks and maintenance work accordingto the instructions in this chapter.

NOTICE!

For your own safety, follow exactly the instructions for inspections andmaintenance work according to the maintenance schedule in thischapter. Do not carry out any maintenance work which is not mentionedin these instructions.

4 Switch back to ECT Remote Mode.

9.4. Operating Conditions during Maintenance Work

When planning and carrying out maintenance work, the operatingcondition of the whole system should be considered.

Therefore ABB recommends coordination of maintenance work on theexcitation system with the plant maintenance.

Distinction is made between the following levels of system operatingconditions:

All power supplies (main and auxiliary power supplies) shut down anddisconnected, and the excitation system grounded.

NOTICE!

Power supply for the stand-still heater remains ON.

Auxiliary power supplies present (battery and AC supply)

Generator running at rated speed (excitation OFF)

Generator running in no-load operation at rated speed (excitation ON)

Generator in parallel operation (synchronized).





9.5. Maintenance Schedule

Table 9-1 Maintenance Schedule gives an overview of all required

maintenance actions.

Table 9-1 Maintenance Schedule

Action OC Level*) Check intervals

3 months Annual

9.6.1 Visual Inspection X

Excitation transformer X Air filter mats X Converter fans X Door fan, +ER cubicle X Spare parts -- -- -- -- -- X

9.6.2 Functional Inspection X

Status bar ECT X Event logger ECT, CCP X Converter fans operating hours X Converter fan changeover test X Fan supply changeover test X Thyristor heat sinks and cooling air X Generator voltage and active power X Redundant regulation circuits XChannel and mode changeover test X

9.6.3 Check Busbar and Cable Connections X

Busbar, cable X

Insulators X 9.6.4 Check Protective Devices X

General XExcitation transformer temperature monitoring XCrowbar, BOD XGround fault protection XInsulating monitoring device XTripping XControl signals X

9.6.5 Maintenance Work, Cleaning X

Excitation transformer XCubicles XInsulators X

Thyristor heat sinks XPower switches (FCB, Isolator) XControl electronics X

9.6.6 Maintenance Work, Fans Ifnecessary

Ifnecessary

Air filter mats XConverter fan X+ER cubicle, door fan X

*) OC system operating conditions (refer to Chapter 9.4 - Operating Conditions during Maintenance Work)

If it is possible or if it makes sense, the maintenance could be done with a lower level of system operating conditions.





9.6. Specif ic Maintenance Tasks

The intervals for maintenance tasks given in the maintenance schedule

must be strictly followed, especially in the first year of operation. Anoptimum maintenance interval can then be worked out based on theresults of the regular inspections. In particular, the accumulation of dirtmust be observed in the first year of operation.

9.6.1. Visual Inspection

For visual inspection proceed as follows:

Refer to Chapter 2 - System Overview for the identification of theindividual components.

Visual inspection is carried out with system operating condition generator runs in parallel operation (synchronized).

Visually inspect the following items:

1 Check for dust, dirt and abnormal noises of the transformer.

NOTICE!

Watch out for the magnetic fields.

Contamination of the air filter mats.

2 Check the air filter mats on the +EE and +EA cubicle doors.

3 Check the air filter mats on the +ER cubicle door (only if an ECT ismounted).

4 Check for abnormal noise.

Since it is not possible to lubricate the bearings, fans with excessivenoise must be replaced at the next overhaul.

For more information see the Operating Instructions for Convertertype UNL14300 in B Common Appendix, Section B04 – 01 ConverterModule on the Data Storage Device

Excitation Transformer

Air Filter Mats

Converter Fans





Inspection of the heat sinks is NOT allowed while the excitation system isin operation.

DANGER!

Dangerous voltage.

The live parts are located directly behind the cover, any contact withthem will cause serious or even fatal injury.

When the excitation system is in operation and the converter cubicledoors (+EG) have been opened, the front cover of the converter modulemust not be removed for any reason.

5 Check for dust and dirt, normal airflow and abnormal noises.

Since it is not possible to lubricate the bearings, fans with increasednoise must be replaced at the next overhaul.

6 Check for completeness.

The spare parts list can be found in A Client Appendix, Section A04 –

Remaining Documents – Recommended Spare Parts on the DataStorage Device.

9.6.2. Functional Inspection

Functional inspection is carried out with system operating condition generator runs in parallel operation (synchronized).

Inspect the following items:

1 Check the indications on the status bar and compare them with theactual system configuration.

See Chapter 8 Operation, ECT, Table 8-3 Customer Commands forRemote Control (Fieldbus) and Table 8-4 ECT, Commands in LocalControl.

Converter Module

Door Fan,+ER Cubicle

Spare Parts

Status Bar, ECT





5 Check the fan supply changeover:

Select Parameters, choose path [Control IT \ In \ …(see table below

for the rest of the parameter)

Table 9-4 Fan Supply Changeover

…Path] Converter # Signal name Togglebutton

Conv_ConverterFanControl1] 1 Fan 1Supply 1 to 2Supply 2 to 1Fan 1 to 2

Supply 1 to 2Supply 2 to 1Fan 2 to 1

SupplyChangeOverSupplyChangeOverFanChangeOver

SupplyChangeOverSupplyChangeOverFanChangeOver

True-FalseTrue-FalseTrue-False

True-FalseTrue-FalseTrue-False

Conv_ConverterFanControlX] X Fan 1Supply 1 to 2Supply 2 to 1Fan 1 to 2Supply 1 to 2Supply 2 to 1Fan 2 to 1

SupplyChangeOverSupplyChangeOverFanChangeOverSupplyChangeOverSupplyChangeOverFanChangeOver

True-FalseTrue-FalseTrue-FalseTrue-FalseTrue-FalseTrue-False

The fan rotates and no event message should be indicated.

6 Check the temperature of the thyristor/converter:

Select Parameters and choose path [Control IT \ Out \ …(see table below

for the rest of the parameter)

Table 9-5 Thyristor heat sink and air temperature of the converter

…Path] Converter # Signal name Criterion

Conv_ConverterModule1]1 Sensors 1 to 6

Cooling air 1,2ThyrCaseTemp1 to 6ConverterAirTemp1, 2

<90 °C<90 °C

Conv_ConverterModuleX] 3 Sensors 1 to 6Cooling air 1,2

ThyrCaseTemp1 to 6ConverterAirTemp1, 2

<90 °C<90 °C

Optional: ThyCaseTemp1 to 6.If the temperature is over 90 °C, clean the thyristor heat sink and replacedirty air filter mats according to Chapter 9.6.6 - Maintenance Work, Fans.

Fan SupplyChangeover Test

Thyristor Heat Sinksand Cooling Air





supplies) shut down and disconnected, and the excitation systemgrounded.

1 Check tightness of bolted connections of the busbars.

2 Check that all screw connections on screw terminals, etc. are tight.

3 Check tightness of bolted connections.

We recommend that all bolted connections are checked after the first yearof operation, afterwards ca. every 4 years.

9.6.4. Check Protective Devices

Checking protective devices is carried out in system operating condition

Auxiliary power supplies present (battery and AC supply).

NOTICE!

For the following function checks, the system must be switched off andthe power section of the excitation transformer must be isolated from thegenerator. Moreover, AC and DC sources must be grounded.

1 Open the field circuit breaker and ground the excitation system onboth sides. The regulator electronics are still supplied from the stationbattery via the input circuit.

2 When the system is dead, switch over to local operation and close thefield circuit breaker again on the ECT.

3 Test the protection equipment and functions (if provided).

4 Reset the alarm and close the field circuit breaker again each time aprotection feature has been triggered.

1 Simulate an overtemperature situation by disconnecting themeasuring cable on one side of the input terminals (see terminalsplan).

Busbar and Cable

Insulators

General

Excitation TransformerTemperatureMonitoring

Crowbar, BOD





To carry out a functional test of the crowbar, ask for ABB servicepersonnel or trained and certified customer personnel.

UNS 3020 (if applicable)

1 Press the TEST key on unit -F75.This will simulate a ground fault.

This is indicated by the illumination of theLEDs ST1 and ST2 on the unit itself. Nosignal to the regulator electronics isissued.

2 To check the controller for a trip oran alarm signal, swap the solderingbridge from S1202 to S1201 and

activate the external test input 3_09(jumper from terminal 3_08 to 3_09).

3 Remove the jumper after completingthe test.

4 Restore the soldering bridge to itsoriginal position.

For further information, see theOperation Manual of the Rotor GroundFault Protection in B Common Appendix,Section B04 Components – 06 Protection

and Monitoring Devices on the DataStorage Device.

Figure 9-2 UNS 3020

BENDER IRDH 275(B) (if applicable)

1 Use the TEST button to verify thefunctions of the unit, including theconnections to the mains and toground.

2 Press the INFO button and importantinformation, such as the systemleakage capacitance and devicesettings will be displayed.

3 Press the RESET button to delete theinsulation alarms.

For further information, see the BenderManual in B Common Appendix, SectionB04 Components – 06 Protection andMonitoring Devices on the Data Storage

Ground FaultProtection

Insulation MonitoringDevice





Device.

Figure 9-3 BENDER IRDH 275

1 Test the excitation trip.

Command:

See ECT, select Parameters, choose path [Control IT \ In \

Prot_SystemGroupFaults] command ForceTrip1 (True-False).

As a result of the trip, the field circuit breaker must open.If hardwired, a feedback signal "Excitation Trip" will be given to thecustomer terminal.See Electrical Drawings.

1 To test the inputs, locate the signal sources with the hardwareschematic diagram and simulate the triggering of the indicator contact.

2 Simulate the outputs to the control room and the commands to thefield circuit breaker.

9.6.5. Maintenance Work, Cleaning

Cleaning is carried out with system operating condition All powersupplies (main and auxiliary power supplies) shut down and disconnected,and the excitation system grounded.

1 Clean off dust and dirt with a dry cloth, vacuum cleaner orcompressed air (not high pressure). Do not use any solvents.

2 Clean the air inlets at the cubicle doors and the air outlets of theconverter cubicles.

Tripping

Control Signals

Excitation Transformer

Cubicles





3 Clean the fan inlets and outlets.

NOTICE!

No compressed air must be used for cubicle cleaning.

4 Clean the insulators with a dry cloth.

5 Clean with a brush and vacuum cleaner. Never use solvents.

For more information see the Operating Instructions for Converter TypeUNL14300 in B Common Appendix, Section B04 – 01 Converter Moduleon the Data Storage Device.

Field circuit breaker (-Q02) and Isolator (-Q08):

6 Check for contact charring. Clean with a brush and dry cloth. Ifnecessary, remove charring using emery paper.

7 Lubricate all sliding surfaces using appropriate grease.

8 Check the arc chamber each time the breaker is tripped due to shortcircuit, remove smoke residue and dust using compressed air, scruboff cinder.

Consult the separate Maintenance Instructions for the Breaker in BCommon Appendix, Section B04 Components – 02 Field CircuitBreaker on the Data Storage Device.

9 Check the printed circuit boards.

Under normal conditions, no dirt and dust will accumulate on the printedcircuit boards. Use a vacuum cleaner and soft brushes to clean theboards. Never use solvents.

Insulators

Thyristor Heat Sinks

Power Switches

Control Electronics





9.6.6. Maintenance Work, Fans

Maintenance of the fans is carried out with system operating condition

Generator in parallel operation (synchronized).

Change or wash dirty air filter mats.

+ER cubicle door (applicable only if an ECT is mounted)

Remove filter mats Wash, then dry

Figure 9-4 Washing Instructions for Filter Mats

EE and EA cubicle doors

1 The filter mats are installed in the cubicle doors of the +EE and +EAcubicle. In order to dismantle the fan grid, open the lock by means ofa quarter-turn.

2 Replace or wash the filter mat. Then dry the mat.

3 Afterwards, reinsert the fan grid and turn the lock horizontally. Closethe lock with finger pressure.

4 Replace the fans after approximately 40 000 hours of operation. Readthe operating hours of the fans from the ECT.

Do not forget to reset the operating hours counter.

Select Parameters, choose path [Control IT \ Out \

Conv_ConverterFanControl#, command Fan#RunningHours.

For more information see the Operating Instructions for ConverterType UNL14300 in the B Common Appendix, Section B04Components – 01 Converter Module on the Data Storage Device.

5 Replace the door fan of the excitation system after approximately25 000 hours of operation.

Air Filter Mats

Converter Fan

+ER Cubicle, DoorFan



UNITROL 6800 User Manual 3BHSxxxxxx E80 Rev. - 10-1

Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting

10.1. General

Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting provides instructions on how to proceed incase of a problem with the excitation system. It addresses qualifiedpersonnel who are responsible for repairing the excitation system.

NOTICE!

To maintain safe and reliable operation of the excitation system, ABB

recommends taking out a service contract with the local ABB serviceorganization. Fore more information contact your local servicerepresentative.

NOTICE!

ABB recommends periodical training for the maintenance and repairpersonnel.

NOTICE!During the warranty period, any repair work must be carried outexclusively by ABB service personnel.


Before starting to work on the excitation system the general safetyinstructions in Chapter 3 - Safety Instructions must be read andunderstood.

When planning and carrying out maintenance work, the operatingcondition of the whole system should be considered.See Chapter 10.5 - Operating Conditions during Repair Work.

Some situations require ON-LINE maintenance activities. Otherwise, it isnot allowed to work without the excitation system in grounded condition.Local and factory regulations must be strictly followed for all activities.





DANGER!

Dangerous voltage.

The live parts are located directly behind the door; any contact with

them will cause serious or even fatal injury.When the excitation system is in operation and the converter cubicledoors (+EG) have been opened, the front cover of the converter modulemust not be removed for any reason.

10.3. Standard Procedures for Troubleshooting

Before doing any repair work, be sure that the reason for an event is clearand that you fully understand the corrective actions to undertake.

For repair work proceed as follows:

1 On the Excitation Control Terminal (ECT), switch the excitationsystem to local mode.

NOTICE!

Operation level 4 is required for a mode change.

2 Check the event logs for active events.

On the ECT, select Events, dynamic list of actual events and the

event log table.

Do not clear the event logs now.

CAUTION!

The event logs provide important information on the excitation system.

Cleared data will complicate the diagnostics for maintenance ortroubleshooting.

It is not allowed to clear the event logs before the event log table issaved.

3 Identify the event.

To get the help text, scroll to the event line and touch the Info button

or double-touch the event line.

The help text provides the operator with information on what hashappened and gives possible hints for successful troubleshooting.

Check the actual time stamp in the left corner.





8 After the failure is repaired, reset the events and clear the event logs.If the troubleshooting was successful, start the excitation systemaccording to Chapter 10.9 - Restart after Troubleshooting.

If a restart is not possible and an event is still pending, call the ABB

service representative.

10.4. Event Messages

The list of all event messages is provided in a separate document, whichidentifies all events together with information, hints and possible actionsto repair the system.

If further assistance is needed, call the ABB Service organization (seeaddress in Chapter 1.4 – Introduction, Manufacturer’s ) or your local

representative.

IMPORTANT!

Before calling ABB Service always check the events for other, possiblyrelated messages.

10.5. Operating Conditions during Repair Work

When carrying out repair work, the operating condition of the wholesystem should be considered.

Distinction is made between the following levels of system conditions:

All power supplies (main and auxiliary power supplies) shut down anddisconnected, and the excitation system grounded, i.e. operatingcondition for OFF-LINE Repair:

NOTICE!

Power supply for the stand-still heater remains ON.

Auxiliary power supplies present (battery and AC supply).

Generator running at rated speed (excitation OFF).

Generator running in no-load operation at rated speed (excitation ON).

Generator in parallel operation (synchronized), i.e. operating conditionfor ON-LINE Repair





10.6. Replacement of Defect ive Components

The following table gives an overview of all possible replacement actionsthat can be carried out either with the system OFF-LINE () or with thesystem ON-LINE ().

Before doing any repair work with the system ON-LINE, read theinstructions in Chapter 3 - Safety Instructions and 10.5 OperatingConditions during Repair Work.

Table 10-1 Operating Conditions for Replacement of Components

Replacement OC*)

OFF-LINE ON-LINE

10.7.1 Converter Module, Draw-out Version (Configuration Standard and Twin)

- Converter module- Thyristor, Converter module removed or in replacement position- Fan box, redundant or single- Converter Control Interface (CCI)

XXXX

10.7.2 AVR Channel 1 or 2 (only dual Channel system)

Controller AC800PECCommunication Control Measurement Device (CCM)

XX

10.7.3 Backup Channel (CCM BU) X

10.8.1 Converter Module, Draw-out Version (Config. Economic; w/o redundancy)

- Converter module- Thyristor, Converter module removed or in replacement position- Fan box, redundant

- Fan box, single- Converter Control Interface (CCI)

XX

XX

X

10.8.2 Converter Module, Fixed Version (Configuration standard and twin)

- Thyristor, Converter module in fixed position- Fan box, redundant or single- Converter Control Interface (CCI)

XXX

10.8.2 Converter Module, Fixed Version (Config. Economic; w/o redundancy)

- Thyristor, Converter module in fixed position- Fan box, redundant- Fan box, single- Converter Control Interface (CCI)

X

XX

X

10.8.3 AVR Channel 1

Controller AC800PEC

Communication Control Measurement Device (CCM)

X

X10.8.4 Crowbar, Deexcitation X

*) OC system operating conditions (refer to Chapter 10.5 - Operating Conditions during Repair Work)If possible and reasonable, the maintenance could be done with a lower level of system operating conditions.

Before installing a new component, compare its type, settings etc., withthose of the device to be replaced. The settings can also be found in thedocument Testing and commissioning report for UNITROL 6800 StaticExcitation Systems in the A Client Appendix, Section A03 Test Reports on the Data Storage Device .

Operating Conditions

Prerequisites forRepair Work





This includes in particular the following checks:

Specification on the rating plate

Type, hardware status

Settings Firmware version

Check the SW Release of the failed unit. (E.g. for CIO 1.0.03).By the replaced unit, the first figure (1.) of SW Release must be equal, theremaining figures can be equal or higher.

See ECT, select Parameters and choose path [Control IT \ Out \ …(see

table below for the rest of the parameter)

Table 10-2 Software Release Control of the Units (ECT)

Unit # …Path] Signal Name

AC800PEC Sys_ExcitationSystem] SoftwareVersionPEC800CCM Sys_ExcitationSystem] SoftwareVersionCCM

CCMBackup Sys_ExcitationSystem] SoftwareVersionCCMBackup

CCI# Conv_ConverterSystem# SoftwareVersionCCI#

CIO# Meas_CIOConfig SoftwareVersionCIO#

The download of the Software Release package (Installer Archive ZIP-file)takes place with the PECInstaller Tool.

10.7. ON-LINE Repair

10.7.1. Converter Module, Draw-out Version (Configuration Standard and Twin)

Repair work is described in detail in the Operating Instructions forConverter Type UNL14300, Draw-out Version in B Common Appendix,Section B04 – 01 Converter Module on the Data Storage Device.

10.7.2. AVR Channel 1 or 2

NOTICE!

Be sure that this channel is in backup operation.

1 Switch OFF the Advanced Power Distributor (APD) of the particulardevice (AC 800PEC or CCM).Be careful, the APD belongs to a device and is accordingly labeled(see Electrical Drawings).

2 Unplug all connectors.

3 Replace the hardware.





7 Start-up the excitation system.

Follow the instructions in Chapter 8.3.2 - Operation, Switch-onSequence.

10.10. Diagnosis - LED Status

AC 800PEC

Table 10-3 LED Allocation for AC 800 PEC Controller

LED # Color Marking Status and Meaning in Running State

LED_1 Red F(ault) LED is turned OFF.

LED may be turned ON to indicate a severesystem fault.

LED_2 Green R(un) LED is turned ON if FPGA is configured.LED is turned OFF if the FPGA is cleared.

LED_3 Green P(ower) LED is turned ON.LED is turned OFF if supply is out of range.

LED_4 Green S(upervisor) LED is turned ON.LED is turned OFF if any operatingconditionis out of range.

LED_5 Yellow T(ransmission) PowerLink supervision.LED is flashing if PowerLinks are available.

LED_6 Yellow A(ctivity) Normal state: Led is flashing.LED is turned OFF if any watchdog error is

CCM, CIO and CCI

Table 10-4 LED’s, Status Indication CCM, CCI and CIO

LED # Color Name Description

1 Red F (Fault) LED OFF: Normal state

LED ON: Indicates a severe system fault

2 Green R (Run) LED OFF: FPGA is not configured

LED ON: FPGA is configured

3 Green P (Power) LED OFF: Power supply is out of rangeLED ON: Power supply is in range

4 Yellow A (Activity) LED OFF: Watchdog error detected

LED flashing: Normal state

10.11. Spare Parts





See A Client Appendix, Section A04 – Remaining Documents –Recommended Spare Parts on the Data Storage Device.



ABB

2 3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C Operating Instructions

ABB reserves all rights to this document and to the information and topicscontained in it. This also applies to any possible claims to copyright orpatents. Forwarding and/or the duplicating of this document without theexpress permission of ABB is forbidden.

This document has been prepared and checked with great care. Ifhowever it still contains errors, then the user is asked to report these to ABB.



ABB


5.5.3.

Scaling of the Signals in the Graph .............................................................................. 33

5.5.4. Display Settings ........................................................................................................... 34

5.5.5. Stop, Start, Timer......................................................................................................... 35

5.5.6. Save, Export Trending Files and Load the Graph......................................................... 36

5.6. Fast Trending............................................................................................................... 39

5.6.1.

Selection of the Channel .............................................................................................. 39

5.6.2. Selection of the Signals and Start of the Recording...................................................... 40

5.6.3. Stop, Start, Timer......................................................................................................... 41

5.6.4. Scaling of the Signals in the Graph .............................................................................. 41

5.6.5. Display Settings ........................................................................................................... 42

5.6.6. Save, Export Trending Files and Load the Graph......................................................... 42

5.7. Transient Recorder ...................................................................................................... 43

5.7.1. Channel Selection and Settings of the Trigger conditions............................................. 44

5.7.2. Selection of the Signals and Start of the Recording...................................................... 45

5.7.3. Auto and Manual Trigger, Reading, Timer.................................................................... 46

5.7.4. Scaling of the Signals in the Graph .............................................................................. 47

5.7.5.

Display Settings ........................................................................................................... 47

5.7.6.

Save and Export Recorded Files or Load the Graph .................................................... 48

5.8. Events.......................................................................................................................... 49

5.9. Parameters and Signals List/Selection......................................................................... 52

5.9.1. Changing of a Parameter Value ................................................................................... 55

5.9.2. Defining My Groups ..................................................................................................... 56

5.9.3. Creating a Snapshot (Upload)...................................................................................... 58

5.9.4. Opening a Snapshot .................................................................................................... 59

5.9.5. Compare Snapshots .................................................................................................... 60

5.9.6. Update Target (Download) ........................................................................................... 62

5.9.7. Save Parameter to Flash.............................................................................................. 64

5.9.8. Setting and Save Boot Parameters to Flash................................................................. 66

5.9.9.

Definition of the Parameters/Signals ............................................................................ 66 5.10. Options ........................................................................................................................ 67

5.10.1. General ........................................................................................................................ 67

5.10.2. Alarms & Events........................................................................................................... 70

5.10.3.

Tools............................................................................................................................ 73

5.10.4. Powerchart................................................................................................................... 74

5.10.5. Operations ................................................................................................................... 74

5.10.6. Diagrams...................................................................................................................... 80

5.10.7. Trending....................................................................................................................... 80

5.10.8. Transient Recorder ...................................................................................................... 81

5.10.9. Security........................................................................................................................ 81

5.10.10. Appendix 1 to Chapter Options .................................................................................... 85

Chapter 6 - Installation and Disposal............................................................................. 87

6.1. Mechanical installation ................................................................................................. 87

6.2. Grounding .................................................................................................................... 87

6.3. Disposal ....................................................................................................................... 87

Chapter 7 - Commissioning............................................................................................ 88

Chapter 8 - Maintenance and Faults .............................................................................. 89

Chapter 9 - Appendix ...................................................................................................... 92

9.1.

General Data................................................................................................................ 92

9.2. Mechanical Dimensions ............................................................................................... 93



ABB


List of Tables

Table 3-1 Panel Configuration........................................................................................................ 14

Table 3-2 Default value of the Channels......................................................................................... 14

Table 4-1 Operation Levels, Default Factory Settings..................................................................... 16

Table 4-2 Application Settings........................................................................................................ 19

Table 5-1 Static Display Elements.................................................................................................. 21

Table 5-2 Display of the Status Bar ................................................................................................ 22

Table 5-3 Available Screens of the ECT, Selection Buttons ........................................................... 23

Table 5-4 Settings for Fast Trending .............................................................................................. 40

Table 5-5 Event Type..................................................................................................................... 50

Table 5-6 Description of the Available Tags ................................................................................... 54

Table 5-7 Setting and Saving Procedure of the Boot Parameters................................................... 66

Table 5-8 List of Settings relating to the Operation Level................................................................ 84

Table 5-9 Description of the Device Configuration Settings............................................................ 85



ABB

3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 7

General Information

Manufacturer’s Address

If any questions arise, consult the local ABB representative or the factory:

IMPORTANT!

If calling ABB, please leave your name, department and phone number.This will allow the responsible ABB representative to call back withoutdelay.

ABB Switzerland Ltd Static Excitation Systems, Voltage Regulatorsand Synchronizing EquipmentCH-5300 Turgi / Switzerland

Telephone: +41 58 589 24 86Fax: +41 58 589 23 33Email: [email protected]: http://www.abb.com/unitrol

24 h – Hotline for urgent service inquiries: +41 844 845 845

Email contact for service inquiries: [email protected]

ABB is constantly striving for the best product and service offerings forour customers. Therefore ABB appreciates your valuable feedback orsuggestions for improvements of UNITROL products.

Please send your comments to "[email protected]". Yourinformation will be forwarded to the responsible persons in order toimprove ABB’s future offerings.

Quality Certificates and Applicable Standards

SQS herewith certifies that ABB Switzerland Ltd, CH-5300 Turgi,Switzerland has a management system which meets the requirements ofthe normative bases.

• ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management SystemISO 14001:2004 Environmental Management SystemOHSAS 18001:2007 Safety at Work Management System,

Health and Safety Management System.

• EC Conformity Declaration of the excitation system.

• List of standards the excitation system complies with.



ABB

Operating Instructions 3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 8


1.1. General

The safety instructions shall be followed during commissioning, operationand maintenance of the excitation system. Read these instructions andthe excitation system User Manual carefully before operating the deviceand keep this document for future reference.

1.2. Required Qualification and Responsibilities

Personnel involved in installation work and commissioning in connection

with the Excitation Control Terminal (ECT) must be familiar, speciallyinstructed and informed about the residual danger areas according to theregulations currently in force.

The operator must be familiar with the functions of the ECT in order tooperate the excitation system.

Only specially instructed personnel can carry out maintenance and repairwork. The maintenance personnel must be informed about theemergency shutdown measures and must be capable of turning off the

system in case of emergency.The maintenance personnel must be familiar with the accident preventionmeasures at their workplace and must be instructed in first aid and firefighting.

It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that each person involved in theinstallation and commissioning has received the appropriate training orinstructions and has thoroughly read and clearly understood the safetyinstructions in this Chapter and the User Manual of the excitation system.

1.3. Safety Signs and Labels

Safety signs and labels are used to highlight a potentially dangeroussituation when working on the excitation system. There is absolutely nodanger to operate the system when the cubicle doors are closed.

For more information see Chapter 3 – Safety Instructions of the excitationsystem.

Installation Work and

Commissioning

Operating Personnel

MaintenancePersonnel

Responsibilities



ABB


Chapter 2 - Device Description

2.1. Introduction

The Excitation Control Terminal (ECT) is used for controlling andmonitoring the excitation system with a different regulation configuration.

The ECT can be located in the door panel of the excitation system forlocal control and/or in the control room for remote control.

The Excitation Control Terminal is a powerful industrial PC with a userfriendly Human Machine Interface that runs independently of the controlCPU’s. The ECT can be added to an excitation system to support the

operating and maintenance staff. The TFT touch screen provides theoperator with a range of selectable screens showing information aboutthe current status of the system in graphical and numerical form. Additionally, authorized engineers can read and adjust all parametervalues. Further, analysis tools for troubleshooting are available as well.

The ECT includes long-time recordings and auto save functions. Theseare indispensable features for quick and precise analyses.

Important data are saved and are ready to be shown on the ECT or to beexported for further investigation.

In order to protect the system against unauthorized manipulation, differentpassword-protected Operation Levels can be defined.

2.2. Operational Features

• Independent industrial PC with 15" color touch screen

• Modbus/TCP communication

• To use as local and/or remote CT terminal

• Password protected Operation Levels

• Selectable languages.



ABB Chapter 2 - Device Description

3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 11

2.3. Data Representation

To ensure that the operator keeps a clear overview of the process,important data are always directly shown on the screen. The informationis either shown as symbols or as text representing the status of the

respective signals.

Analog measurements are shown as numbers in an analog instrument oras graphics in the Trending and Transient Recorder.

A detailed description of the screens, the data representation and thefunctionalities, is given in Chapter 5 - Functional Description.

2.4. Operation

The operator has a range of screens at his disposal, which informs aboutthe status of the excitation system. A detailed description of all screenscan be found in Chapter 5 - Functional Description.

If the operator has logged in "Active Control Mode" (Password protected)he is entitled to perform active control such as opening and closingbreakers, adjusting setpoints, selecting an operation mode etc.

These operating principles follow the rules below to ensure easy and fail-safe operation:

• ECT requires a hard lock (Dongle) otherwise the panel is notworking.

• To control the system with the ECT:

• A password is necessary according to theOperation Level

• "Active Control Mode" must be selected (Panelcontrol button on "green")

• The release button must be touched first, beforethe command buttons can be activated.

• Users without password can supervise the system, but have nocontrol over it.

All indications on the screens are real feedback information from the

system. This means that all data shown on the screen are retrieveddirectly from the selected channel.

NOTICE!

A failure of the ECT or an interruption of the hardware link has noinfluence on the current operation. The default value of the operatorlocation is remote. In this case the access to the ECT is immediatelydisabled.



Chapter 2 - Device Description ABB


2.5. Area of Application

The Excitation Control Terminal is used for controlling and monitoring theexcitation system. This ECT with its software is suitable only for this areaof application in connection with the control system of the UNITROL

6800/6080.

Figure 2-1 Example of an Excitation System




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 13

2.6. Hardware

• Structure

The ECT is mechanically robust. The unit

cover is made of galvanized sheet-steel.The connections, slots and interfaces areon the left sidewall of the case.

• Installation

The seamless sealed front panel protectsreliably against ingress and dust, dirt andspray water.The green LED indicates power supply OK

• Mounting

The ECT can be installed in racks, cubicle doors and desks.It is designed as a fanless system but due to the temperature inside thecubicle the pure convection cooling could be not sufficient.See Chapter 9.1 - General Data.

• Hard lock

The software of the ECT does not workwithout a hard lock (Dongle).

• Dimensions

The mechanical and fitting dimensions are described inChapter 9.2 - Mechanical Dimensions.

Device Connections (This figure shows a possible case version)

Only the Ethernetsocket is used(RJ-45)

Hard lock (Dongle)(right UBS socket)

+= 24 VDC-= 0 VDC

Connector:Phoenix ContactPC 4/2-G-7.62

Figure 2-2 Hardware



ABB


Chapter 4 - Settings

This Chapter describes the following settings:

• Description and setting of the password-dependent Operation Levels

• Settings of the ECT configuration (Options, Brief Description)

• Settings of the IP Address from local TCP/IP Network.

4.1. Screen after Startup

The ECT starts after it is powered up. Windows XP is automaticallyloaded, the OPC server is started and establishes the connection to thechannel. The procedure of startup takes a few minutes.

The following screen will be shown after startup.

Figure 4-1 Typical Screen after Startup

Note: The ECT has a screen saver function that will turn off the screenafter 2 hours (Default).Simply touch the screen and it will turn on again.The measure extends the lifetime of the screen and the backlight.



Chapter 4 - Settings ABB


4.2. Selection of the Operation Level

Different types of users can operate the ECT. The system can beprotected to prevent access by unauthorized people.

• Relation between password and Operation Level.The table below shows a brief description. For detailed informationsee Table 5-8 List of Settings relating to the Operation Level, page 84.

Table 4-1 Operation Levels, Default Factory Settings

PasswordDefault Value

Operation Level # = Task

Permitted ActivitiesDefault Settings

administrator Administrator Full access and inclusive password andrule definition rights

mytest (e.g.) orblank

Sample = Personal(e.g.)

User with a Personal Operation Level canbe defined by the Administrator

test5 5 = Commissioning The settings menu is available

test4 4 = Maintenance Permission to change parameters,event list can be cleared

test3 3 = Diagnostic Access to the standby channel, Logger

test2 2 = Operator All control buttons are available, Trending

-- 1 = Viewer Only status and actual values can beviewed

The higher levels include all functions of the lower levels.

The default value of the passwords may already have been changed oncustomer request.





4.3. Options, Brief Description

The end user settings have already been made. For details, see Chapter5.10 - Options, page 67 .

The overview of Operation Levels is described in Table 5-8 List of Settings relating to the Operation Level, page 84.

Touch Options

Figure 4-2 Application Settings

• Options toolbar bottom line

Operation Level N 5

Import settings from an external file.

(Use a stick to transfer the ECT configuration data toanother ECT)

Export settings to an external file.(Use a stick to transfer the ECT configuration data toanother ECT)

Discard current changes and reset to active settings.

Reset display settings to factory defaults.





4.4. ECT Network Configuration

• IP Address from local TCP/IP Network

Set the IP Address from the ECT on the Local Area Connection of the

ECT.[Start \ Settings \ Network Connections...]

See the following example:

Description ECT 1or

ECT-PC1(Local)

ECT 2(Remote)

Default IP Address 172.16.0.61 172.16.0.62



Chapter 5 - Functional Description ABB


5.1.1. System Status Bar

The status of the excitation system is displayed at the top of the screen.This important information is presented on all user screens, as it indicatesthe actual condition of the system.

If a condition is active, the color of the corresponding feedback indicationis changed.

Table 5-2 Display of the Status Bar

System Status Bar Description

AUX: Off, On Auxiliary ready, not ready (e.g. FCBON, OFF)

EXC: Off, On Excitation is switched OFF or ON

NET: Off Line, On Line Net not synchronized or synchronized

Mode: Auto, Manual System in automatic or manual mode

CTRL: None, Discharge, Q-Reg,PF-Reg

Status of the superimposed regulator

Limiter (Man): None, P/Q-Lim, V/Hz- Lim,Softstart,

Limiter (Auto): None, IGind, Ifmax, IGcap,Ifmin, P/Q-Lim, V/Hz-Lim,Softstart, UrefMax

None or active limiter

Fault: - , Active The active Channel indicates a fault

Alarm: - , Active The active Channel indicates an alarm

StbyAlarm: - , Active The inactive Channel indicates an alarm

Start: Not OK, OK Readiness of the system for start

ChXfer: - , Ready Channel balanced

Active: None, CH1, CH2, BU Active Channel

Connect: None, CH1, CH2, BU Indication to which Channel(s) the ECTis connected

Display channel blinks:See Chapter 5.10.1, CT ChannelMapping

Unit: Default -

Operator: Operation Level - to 5, Administrator and

Personal Operation Level

Access level of the password



ABB Chapter 5 - Functional Description

3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 23

5.1.2. Panel Control Button

The color of the hand shows:

Panel control is available but system control is not (viewerlevel).

System control is available (writing to target)Command buttons, setpoint, parameters etc. are adjustable,but dependent on the Operation Level 2 to 5, Administrator orPersonal Operation Level. After a specified time period of inactivity (Default=10 min.) alogged in user is logged out automatically (grey hand).

System is not logged in, a panel with higher priority is inoperation or there is no connection to the UNITROL system.

Check the IP address according to Chapter 5.10.1 - General .

How to change the panel control button: See Chapter 4.2 - Selection of the Operation Level , page 16 .

5.1.3. Functions, Screen Selection

Table 5-3 Available Screens of the ECT, Selection Buttons

Selection ScreenButtons

Description

Operations Start-up window, instruments andcommand buttons.Shows the data of the active channel.

Powerchart Visualization of operation point, actualvalues of the system.Shows the data of the active channel.

Diagrams (optional) Simplified single line diagram, actualvalues of the system.Shows the data of the active channel.

Slow Trending

Fast Trending

Transient Recorder

Graphs, cycle time >100 ms

Graphs, cycle time N1 ms

Oscilloscope for a short time datarecording, automatically/manually triggered

Events Event logger, event listDisplay of the last 2000 event messages(alarms and faults)

Parameters Parameter and signal selection andadjustments.

Export and Import (up- and download)




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 25

5.2. Operation

Operation Level 2

Analog instruments and various command buttons are displayed on the

main screen. The features are:• Command buttons to control the system

• Six selectable signals are displayed as analog instruments providingfull synchronous machine instrumentation.

Touch Operations

5.2.1. Command Buttons

The main functions of the excitation system can be controlled by meansof the command buttons and their corresponding status feedback. Thefollowing typical commands are available:

Before any of the command buttons can be used, the following conditionsmust be fulfilled:

• Touch the panel control button

green hand Control Mode is active.

The user has access to control the excitationsystem according to the selected access level

A red hand only permits viewer access.

• Select the release button R which becomes

active for 5 seconds

The red lock changes to green for 5 secondsto





5.2.2. Analog Instruments

Configuration of a signal to an analog instrument

Note: These settings have to be made in each Control Channel (CH1, CH2 and BU)

- Touch Operations

- Touch the analog instrument fieldThe following menu appears

• [Select Data Point]Parameter /Signal group

Parameter / Signal

- Touch the table with theparameter/signal groups andscroll to the group (grey high-lighted line)

- Touch the table with theparameter/signal names,scroll to the signal and mark it(grey highlighted line)

[Measurem…]

- For detailed informationabout the parameter/signal:

- Close the window ofparameter/signal information

- Finally confirm or reject theparameter/signal

[Data Point...]

[Measurem…]




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 27

• [Configure]

- Open the numeric keyboardof Minimum

- Enter the value and confirm

- Repeat this for all settings

Delete the settings (blankfield)

[Editor]

[Configure...]

Decimal places of theindicated value

ThresholdSee the red bars 0.7 to 0.9and 1.1 to 1.3

If no threshold, field must beblank.-Touch this button

CosPHi TypeDifferent scale

- Finally confirm the settings

Cancel: The scale of theprevious settings are saved

[Configure...]

• [Cancel]

- Close the pull-down menu




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 29

5.4. Diagrams (optional)

Operation Level = 1 (no password necessary)

Touch Diagrams

The excitation system is shown as asimplified single line diagram. This windowcontains information about:

• Easy and quick overview of the wholesystem

• Breaker position indications

• Actual measurements of various

machine and excitation system data(not included in this detail of thepicture)

The AVR Control shows the operationmode of CH1 (Single Channel System)

The display is as follows:Mode: Auto, Manual, PF-Reg or Q-RegStatus: OK, Alarm or fault message

• Change the measured data from unit to percentageto

• After touching the button Diagrams thismessage appears.

Not ordered: The button has to be canceled. See Chapter 5.10.1 - General , section CT Modules.Ordered: The Diagrams has to be activated. See Chapter 5.10.6 - Diagrams.

• If the following message appears, the activated Diagrams has to be checked. See Chapter5.10.6 - Diagrams.





5.5. Slow Trending

Operation Level 2

Slow trending function performs a 12 h recording (default) of up to twelve

free signals. The features are:• Twelve selectable signals

• Slow Trending (100 ms sample rate) with long-time recording (up to12 h)

• Save and reload of trending and auto scaling / zoom and singlechannel indication.

• Timestamp is given from the ECT hard disk

The trending adjustments are described in Chapter 5.10.7 - Trending.

Touch Slow Trending

• Trending toolbar top line

Several folders to save different trendinggroups

ECT shows the data from CH1.Is active only if a parameter from a channel isalready present.Open the menu bar to modify the view of thegraph. Is active only if a parameter from achannel is already present.

- Information about the signal

- Show the parent group of the signal

- Allocate the signal to group 1 to 6

- Hide the signal as data points (graph)

- Show the signal as data points (graph)

- Bit indices in order to show or hide

Scroll to a signal (grey highlighted line)

• Slow Trending (toolbar bottom line)




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 31

5.5.1. Selection of the Channel

Toolbar channel selection.

- Open the Select Device

- Scroll to CH1 or CH2 (greyhighlighted line)

- Confirm the Channel

5.5.2. Selection of the Signals and Start of the Recording

- Open the signal overview

- Touch the table with thesignal groups and scroll to thedesired group (grey high-lighted line)[Control IT \ Out \Meas_SystemMeasurement]

- Touch the table with thesignal names, scroll to thedesired signal (grey

highlighted line)

[Browse Items]

[Meas_Sys…]





- Mark the signal

- or mark twelve lines in a row

- Confirm the settings. Thesignals appear in the table

This window allows the signalsto be re-arranged

Cancel a signal:- scroll to the desired signalline (grey highlighted line) andtouch this button

Insert a new signal:- Scroll to the empty line (greyhighlighted line) and touch thisbutton

- Confirm the selected signal

The recording starts afterthe confirmation.

[Meas_Sys…]

[Browse Items]

All signals with the samerange of amplitude or thesame data format should be

merged to the same group.

- Mark the line and select thegroup

, etc.Description of the data formats see Chapter 5.9.9 - Definition of the Parameters/Signals, page 66.

G = Group numberI = Signal number of the

graphData Point = Signal name

1 to 61 to 12




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 33

5.5.3. Scaling of the Signals in the Graph

Toolbar signals selection.

Group Configuration:

- Open the configuration dialog.- Choose the desired Group andscroll to the appropriate line(grey highlighted line) of theScale / Group Modes

• Scale / Group ModesAutomatic Scaling:Leave fields empty

User-defined min / max:Fill out both values

Logarithmic scaling:Fill out both values

Stacked boolean signals:For boolean signals, selectanother Group

Bitwise rendering:16-Bit resolution of the lowerpart of the double integer signal.E.g. Control or Status word.

Select another Group for eachsignal.

Show or hide a Group from theChart

- Confirm the settings

Data format

,

Data format

,

Data format

,

Data format

Signal 2Signal 1Signal 0

Data format

,

Bit 0 to 15





5.5.4. Display Settings

Toolbar display

• "Legend" buttons

Set legend size:This button optimizes the legend field. Allsignals are visible.

Show legend on top, on the left or hide legend, or

• Display mode buttons

Single Chart: All recorded signals are displayed in one graph.

Split Mode:Each signal of the recording is displayedseparately in a small graphic.

User Groups:Combines individual signals into groups, whichare displayed in one graphic.

• Markers and Time scaling

Show markers.

Time scaling, increase, decrease




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 35

5.5.5. Stop, Start, Timer

Toolbar Timer, Stop and Start

The Slow Trending has already started after the selection of the signals

• Stop, Start

- [stop] and [start] trending..

The following dialog must be confirmed in order to interrupt the recording

- [freeze] display, recording of data

[freeze] display opens the scroll bar of thetime axis

- Touch again to [unfreeze] the display

• Timer

The timer button is always available. Freezeor stop recording for a time measurement.

- Touch the graph to set the cursor(Time axis) or

- move the cursor

Red line

,

- Touch the [timer] button

- Touch the graph to set the second cursor

,

The times and the duration are shown in thebox next to the timer buttons. The measuredrange is colored dark-grey in the graphic.





• Log Group Info

- Display Log Group Info General: Data of the trending record.Description: Additional information in the description field.See text input in next chapter.

5.5.6. Save, Export Trending Files and Load the Graph

Toolbar load, save orexport

First a recording has to bestarted or loaded

• Save the recording to the ECT hard disk

- Save data to hard diskECT

- Use the default file orcreate a new one byopening the folder and filename, select the desiredfolder or device andconfirm the message

- Use the default file nameor create a new one byopening the Text Editor,enter the file name with thekeyboard and confirm

- Confirm the Log file

- Write a markThe marks are stored inthe file called remarks.txtin the above-mentioneddefined folder

- Finally confirm the exportdata

[Browse For …] OK

[Text Editor]

,

[Select File]

,

[Export Data]

,

Default folder location:C:\Documents and Settings\UserName\My Documents\ControlTerminal\ECT\Data\Slow Trending

Take notice of the file format in the folder "Data":

l




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 37

• Export the recording

- Export recorded data toan internal folder or anexternal storage device

- Use the default folder orcreate a new one byopening the folder, selectthe desired folder or deviceand confirm the message

- Use the default file nameor create a new one byopening the Text Editor,enter the file name with the

keyboard and confirm

- Finally confirm the exportdata

[Browse For …] OK

[Text Editor]

,

[Select File]

,

Default folder location:C:\Documents and Settings\UserName\My Documents\ControlTerminal\ECT\Export\Slow Trending

Take notice of the file format in the folder "Export":

• Load the saved log file from hard disk ECT or from another device (graph visible on thescreen)

- Load saved logs fromECT on the screen

- Selection of log file(grey highlighted line)

or delete the log file(grey highlighted line)

- Confirm the message

Or open the file fromanother device (USB stick)

[Log Browser]

[Delete]

Yes

[Log Browser]




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 39

5.6. Fast Trending

Operation Level N 2

Fast trending records a maximum of 2000 samples (default) in the buffer

of each channel (AC 800PEC). The features are:• Eight selectable signals

• Fast Trending (1 ms sample rate)

• Timestamp is provided by the excitation control system

The trending adjustments are described in Chapter 5.10.7 - Trending.

Touch Fast Trending

5.6.1. Selection of the Channel

Toolbar signals selection.

- Open the Fast TrendingRecorder

- Touch the left table andscroll to the CH1 or CH2(grey highlighted line)

Touch this button

- Min Sampling Interval a,- Max Buffered Sampleshave both a fixed value

- Sampling interval bThe ratio of b to a mustbe integer as n = 1, 2 etc.

Otherwise a warningappears.- Refresh Interval cRate of refreshing the dataof the graph on the screen atc = n x b,at n = 10…100

See settings table next page

[Fast Trending...]

1500 Ts2000 Samples

6000 Ts

960 ms





Table 5-4 Settings for Fast Trending

Parameter Fast Trending UNITROL 6080 UNITROL 6800

Min Sampling Interval, not adjustable 1500 Ts 2400 Ts

Max Buffered Samples, not adjustable 2000 2000Sampling interval (1500…) 6000 Ts 4800 Ts

Refresh Interval (200 to 3000) 960 ms 960 ms

- Open the [Browse Items]Eight signals can be fastrecorded (see next chapter)

[Configure Record..]


- Open the signal overview [Browse Items]

See Chapter 5.5.2 - Selection of the Signals and Start of the Recording . The trending does not startautomatically. See later.

Note: The Fast Trending can only sample Simulink signals.This signal name starts with SFS_…or STS_... (Example: SFS_Meas_UgRel)Otherwise the following fault message appears after the confirmation of the [Fast Trending

Recorders]

- Confirm the signals

[Browse Items]

- Confirm the configuration [Configure Rec…]

- Confirm the fast trendingand the visible graph

or- Confirm the fast trendingand close the dialog

[Fast Trending...]




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 41

5.6.3. Stop, Start, Timer

• Start, Stop

- Open the Fast TrendingRecorders dialog

- [Start] the fast trending

- [Stop] the fast trending. The mark in the check boxindicates that the trending is

in operation.

,

The same looking buttonwith the same functionality isin the tool bar of the bottomline.

Note: Stop the Fast Trending Recorders before closing the menu bar [Fast Trending Recorders] ,otherwise the following message will appear.

• Timer

- For these buttons seeChapter 5.5.5

• Log Group Info

- Display Log Group Info General: Data of the trending recordDescription: Additional information in the description field.


- See Chapter 5.5.3






- See Chapter 5.5.4

5.6.6. Save, Export Trending Files and Load the Graph

• Save the recording to the hard disk ECT

• Or Export the recording

- See Chapter 5.5.6,

First of all a recordinghas to be started orloaded

• Or save the data file from the Fast Trending Recorders screen

Save the file from thedialog [Fast TrendingRecorders]

The recorder must beactive (Start button =green) otherwise thesave button is greyedout.

,

• Load the log file from hard disk ECT or from another device (graph visible on the screen)

- Load saved logs fromECT




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 43

5.7. Transient Recorder

Operation Level 3

The Transient Recorder function is an imaging tool for the graphical

representation of events. It features eight independent signals (1 to 8)allowing the user to program the corresponding Transient Recorder’ssignals in the UNITROL system. The signals sampled in the UNITROLsystem’s Transient Recorder can be read and then displayed like in anoscilloscope. The Transient Recorder buffer contains 2000 entries foreach signal (1 to 8).

The Transient Recorder supports an auto save and restart function. Alarms, faults or other signals could be set as a trigger event to startrecording.

The features are:

• Configurable transient recorder with eight selectable signals(Configurable Transient Recorder).

• Transient recorder with sixty-four signals, not configurable for thecustomer (Transient Recorder AC 800PEC).

• Auto / manual trigger and Auto Read function.

The Transient Recorder adjustments are described in Chapter 5.10.8 -Transient Recorder.

Touch Transient Recorder

• Logging toolbar top line

See Chapter 5.5 - Slow Trending

• Transient recorder toolbar bottom line




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 45

- Mark and confirm the line

[StateMachine_STS]

,

- Open the dialog to selectthe signals for recording

Eight signals can be fastrecorded(see next Chapter for theselection of these signals)

[Configure Record..]


Open the parameteroverview

[Browse Items]

See Chapter 5.5.2 - Selection of the Signals and Start of the Recording . The Transient Recorder

does not start automatically. See later.

Note: The Transient Recorder can only sample Simulink signals.This signal name starts with SFS_…or STS_... (Example: SFS_Meas_UgRel)Otherwise the following fault message appears after confirming the [Fast TrendingRecorder] .

- Confirm the signals(E.g.: Group [Measurement Rel.

Values_SFS] )

[Measurement Rel. Values_SFS]

- Select the signals- Confirm the signals

[Browse Items]

- Confirm the configuration [Configure Recorder: Configurable...]





5.7.3. Auto and Manual Trigger, Reading, Timer

• Automatic readout of the recorder (Auto Read)

Auto Read saves the recorded data to the selected Channel (CH1, CH2 or BU) and to the hard diskof the ECT. Otherwise the data is only saved to the Channel. The graph is not visible on the screen.The "Auto Read" function is allowed to be active only in one ECT of an excitation system. Thisconcerns both Transient Recorders and all devices such as CH1, CH2 and BU.

- Touch this buttonfrom the tool bar of thebottom line

and select "SelectRecorder…" to openthe dialog [Transient

Recorder Browser]

- Select "ConfigurableTransient Recorder".

- Mark Auto Read

check box

Confirm the triggercondition

[Transient Rec...]

to

Note: The mark in the Auto Read check box changes after confirming ( , , etc)

• Auto Trigger

After the trigger conditions are set, the trigger trips after the conditions are fulfilled.See 5.7.1 - Channel Selection and Settings of the Trigger conditions

• Manual Trigger

The recorders can betriggered directly duringoperation.

- Touch this button andselect the"Configurable TransientRecorder"

(The last one used isvisible)




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 47

Or touch the "SelectRecorder…" to openthe dialog [Transient

Recorder Browser] andselect the line"Configurable TransientRecorder".

- Confirm the triggering

[Transient..]

• Reading the last recordings

The graph will be visible on the screen.

- Touch this button andselect "ConfigurableTransient Recorder"(The last one used isvisible)

Or select "SelectRecorder…" to openthe dialog [Transient

Recorder Browser] andselect "ConfigurableTransient Recorder".

• Timer

See Chapter 5.5.5

• Log Group Info

- Display Log GroupInfo


See Chapter 5.5.3


See Chapter 5.5.4





5.7.6. Save and Export Recorded Files or Load the Graph

Load, save and export toolbar

,

•

Save and export

See Chapter 5.5.6

• Load the graph

Touch this button and select the"Configurable Transient Recorder"(The last used Transient Recorderis visible)

Recorded data from the Channel:- Select the desired recorded file

- Confirm the selection

Or select "Select Recorder…" toopen the dialog [Transient Recorder

Browser] and select the line"Configurable TransientRecorder".

- Choose and confirm the"Configurable TransientRecorder".

- Select the Recorded file andconfirm

[Select Rec..]

[Select Rec…]

[TransientRec…]

[Select Rec…]

Note: Each recorded file from the Channel can be saved to the hard disk.See the section "Save and export" at the beginning of this Chapter.

Recorded data from the ECT harddisk:- Load the saved log from harddisk ECT or from another device(graph visible on the screen)and confirm the selection

See Chapter 5.5.6 , second part ofthe description

[Log Browser]




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 49

5.8. Events

Operation Level = 1 (no password necessary)

As soon as an Alarm or Trip occurs, an error code is generated. These error codes

are transferred to the fault logger together with the real time and date of occurrence.The event logger provides the description of each event and a troubleshootinginstruction. The event lists can be saved and/or printed. Additionally a dynamic list ofthe actual alarms and faults is visible. The features are:

• Dynamic list of the actual events and event logger table

• Information about the events and troubleshooting instructions

• Export, print or clearing of the event logger table.

Touch Events

The Event Logger contains a table with the last 2000 entries. As soon as this window is selected, anautomatic upload will start. If a new entry occurs, the panel reads this out of the UNITROL Systemand the table will automatically be updated.

Dynamic list ofactual events

Event logger table

All columns can be sorted in ascending or descending order

- Touch the headline of the corresponding column and the sort order willimmediately change

MergedCH1CH2BU

Event logger table CH1, CH2 and BU can be sorted according to "Device"Event logger table CH1Event logger table CH2Event logger table BU

Actual alarmReversed alarm

Event Toolbar





• Description of the Event Type

Table 5-5 Event Type

Event Type Description

Information Typically displays a message initiated by an actionWarning Typically displays a failure of a component

Alarm Typically displays a failure of a system or of a part of the system

Error (Trip) Displays a serious system fault, initiates a trip

• Information about the Events

-Touch the Event loggertable, scroll to the signal/parameter (backgroundgrey highlighted)

- Touch [info] to get moreinformation about thisevent

- Move to another Event inthe list without closing thedialog

- Close the Information

dialog

[Event Details]

[Event Details]

- [Freeze] and [Unfreeze] the display ,

• Export the Event Table

- Export the logged data tothe ECT hard disk or to an

external storage device

Open the dialog- Select the Folder andenter the File Name

- Confirm or reject

[Select File] ,[Browse ForFolder], [Text Editor]

[Select File]

,

- Close the window




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 51

• Filter for masking the Event Type

See Chapter 5.10.2 - Alarms & Events, page 70

• Print the Event Table

- Select the form of thetable

List CH1 and CH2 or

List only from CH1 or

List only from CH2

- Print to the default printer

Merged

CH1

CH2

Notice!The entire list will be printed out at the pre-defined standard printer.No confirmation will appear.

The file will be printed out in A4 landscape format. This will result inthe printout of approximately 30 A4 sheets.

If a standard printer has been pre-defined, it will begin printingimmediately. It is also possible to define a PDF printer as standard.In this case no paper is required. The necessary software is notincluded in our scope of supply.

• Reset: Not available when the ECT is configured as a remote panel.

- Reset the events.

Operation Level 2

• Clearing the event logger

- Clear the event logger


Operation Level 4

Yes





5.9. Parameters and Signals List/Selection

Operation Level 4: Setting and writing

Operation Level 2 or else

The features are:

• Reading parameters/signals and adjustment of all parameters.

• Exporting the parameters from the Channel (Control)-> UPLOAD

• Writing parameters to the Channel (Control) -> DOWNLOADPanel Control Button must be green

• User-defined directory and parameter list in My Groups

Parameter changes

!

Warning!

Only specially trained ABB personal are permitted to make parameterchanges.

Never make parameter changes without clear authorization from ABB.

Unauthorized changes may result in personal injury and/or severedamage to the equipment.

Touch Parameters

• Parameter toolbar top line (after touching Parameters the first time:)

The parameters/signals are live data from aChannel (Control), source CH1.Note: The table lines are white – grey

Open snapshot

Create snapshot: UPLOAD

• Parameter toolbar top line (after making a snapshot):




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 53

The parameters/signals are data from snapshot

(source: CH1).Note: The table lines are white – green colored.The content is a snapshot on the screen and after achange no data will have changed in the Channels.

Switch between the live data from thecontrol and the snapshot from a file. to

Open snapshot file

Info button: Device Information

Update Target: DOWNLOAD Write snapshot content to device

Save snapshot to hard disk or anexternal storage device.

Compare snapshots

• Parameter toolbar bottom line

Up or down in the Groups directory

or

One level up or down in the Groupsdirectory or

Up or down in the Items(Parameters/signal table)

Switch from Groups to Items orswitches from Items to Groups or

Give detailed information of aparameter/signal

Group button, see Chapter "Defining MyGroups"

Edit button





Tag Filters

No mark: All parameters/signals areshown

Table 5-6 Description of the Available Tags

Available Tags Description

Boot These parameters can only be changed in the configuration sequence

Expert These important parameters require the special UNITROL know how, otherwise one is notallowed to modify them

ML/SL-Par not used

Operation These parameters are used for operation

Optional These parameters are not enabled by default

Required These parameters are mandatorily adjusted

Required Test These parameters are mandatorily adjusted for special test purposesSignal This is an output signal





5.9.2. Defining My Groups

The user can define separate directories (group) and subdirectories for frequently used parameters.Note: These settings must be made in each Channel (CH1, CH2 and BU)

• Create a new directory (Example: TestConfiguration\ForceChannel )

Toolbar top line

Toolbar bottom line

- Move the grey highlighted lineup or down to My Groups

- Touch the group button toopen Manage Groups…

- Touch Manage Groups… toopen the dialog

-Touch the + button to open theText Editor

- Specify the name of thedirectory and confirm with e.g.TestConfiguration

- Confirm the new directory

Additional subdirectory e.g.ForceChannel - Move the grey highlighted lineto TestConfiguration - Touch the group button toopen Manage Groups…andrepeat the steps.

- Confirm the new subdirectory

Description of the rest of theicons in My Groups:Move the grey highlighted lineup or down

Move the selected group (greyhighlighted line) up or down

The name of the group can bechanged (grey highlighted line)

A group can be deleted(grey highlighted line)

[My Groups]

[Text Editor]

[My Groups]

[My Groups]

[My Groups]

,





5.9.3. Creating a Snapshot (Upload)

The parameters from the Channel are uploaded to the hard disk or an external storage device.

Toolbar top line

- Open the dialog to select theChannel.- Scroll to CH1 or CH2 (greyhighlighted line)

- Confirm the Channel

- Touch this button to open thedialog

Select the Snapshot Format

Possibility to select anotherfolder or an external device andto change the name of the file

- Confirm the upload

- Confirm the message OK





5.9.5. Compare Snapshots

Unless two snapshots are opened, the icon of the compare function remains grey.See last Chapter.

- Touch this button to start thecomparison

Interpretation of the comparison:- Touch this button to open thewindow

Note: 0 Item(s) means that thereis no difference between bothsnapshots

Different Data Point Values shows a list with the comparedsnapshots. It is possible to editthe values.(See also next section)

-Cancel the snapshot comparison

- Write data to the targetNote: This is always snapshot 1

- Confirm the message YES


Note: The written parameters are only active if the Panel Control Button is green.

Note: Write snapshot 2 data to the targetIn order to write snapshot 2 to the target, first go back to live data, then open snapshot file 2 and

write it to the target.




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 61

• There are warning signs

Note: In this case the result of the snapshot comparison must be analyzed before the button "Writedata to the target" has been touched. But this is not part of this description.

Interpretation of the comparison:- Touch this button to open thewindow [Skipped Snapshot…] (Different Data Type andUnknown Data Points in thesame screen)

Description of the toolbar:Scroll to the desired parameter(grey highlighted line)

Gives detailed information of aparameter/signal

Save or export the skippedsnapshot to the ECT hard disk orto an external storage device.[SkippedSnapshotItems.csv]

- Touch this button to open thewindow [Different Data Point…]

- Touch one of the three buttonsto see the different data pointvalues

Description of the toolbar:Scroll to the desired parameter(grey highlighted line)

Gives detailed information of aparameter/signal

Edit buttons for column 1 and 2The values of the first columnrefer to snapshot 1 etc.

Save or export to hard disk ECTor to an external storage device.[DifferentSnapshotItemValues.csv]




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 63

• The validation status is notcompatible

The release of the AVR softwareis different.Snapshot: Release 0.9.5 AVR: Release 2.1.21

- Confirm the message Yes



- Open the fileThe "Snapshot writes errors.txt " file has to bechecked. The result of this analysis shouldprovide the basis for the decision. But this isnot part of this description.

• Channel CH2 (Dual Channel System)

- Select the data source CH2

- Scroll to the CH2





3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 65

• Save the parameters

-Touch the pen button to openthe Toggle Editor.

- Mark the field and confirm with[OK]. The value of the parameterwill be "True".

Set it back to "False"- Mark the field and confirm with[OK]. The value of the parameterwill again be "False".

The parameter ParSaveToFlashOK confirms

the successful download.Path [Control IT \ Out \ Sys_ExcitationSystem…] The feedback signal remains [True] until thenext boot process.

• Select Channel CH2 (Dual Channel System)

- Select data source CH2

- Scroll to the desired Channel


- Search for the parameterSaveParToFlash and save theparameters

• Select Channel BU (Triple Channel System)

- Select data source BU and repeat the previous steps.





5.9.8. Setting and Save Boot Parameters to Flash

Note: The Panel Control Button must be green to start the boot sequence.

The update of the configuration parameters is only possible in the configuration sequence.The table below shows how to make the settings and save them permanently to the flash memory.

Table 5-7 Setting and Saving Procedure of the Boot Parameters

Action Parameter Path to the Parameter List

Set parameter to True RequestConfigChange Control IT \ In \ SM_StateMachine…

Set parameter to True and again to False SaveParToFlash Control IT \ In \ Sys_ExcitationSystem…

Check: Parameter has to be True SaveParToFlashOK Control IT \ Out \ Sys_ExcitationSystem…

Set parameter to True EnableRebootCmd Control IT \ In \ Sys_ExcitationSystem…

Set parameter to TrueSystem is in the configuration sequence

RebootDevice (UN6800)Reboot (UN6080)

Control IT \ In \ Sys_ExcitationSystem…

Note: The system loses the connection for a short time. The Panel Control Button disappears and the connection to theChannel blinks for a few moments.

Set parameter to TrueNote: The parameter immediately changesto False

RequestControl Control IT \ OperatorCommand…

Check: Parameter must be 2 (UN6800)Parameter must be 3 (UN6080)

ControlStatus Control IT \ OperatorStatus…

Set the boot parameter See parameter list Control IT \ …

Set parameter to FalseSystem has left the configuration sequence Panel Control Button appears green

RequestConfigChange Control IT \ In \ SM_StateMachine…

Set parameter to True and again to False SaveParToFlash Control IT \ In \ Sys_ExcitationSystem…

Check: Parameter must be True SaveParToFlashOK Control IT \ Out \ Sys_ExcitationSystem…

Touch the Selection Screen Button EVENTS, RESET the events

Note: Finish the complete sequence otherwise the system remains in the configuration sequence.

5.9.9. Definition of the Parameters/Signals

Description of the data format

- Float 4 and 8 Byte ,

- Signed integer 2 and 4 Byte ,- Boolean signal, False / True

- Text string- Date and Time format




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 67

5.10. Options

Operation Level 5

Touch Options

The menu bar "Application Settings" and the toolbar bottom line are described inChapter 4.3 - Options, Brief Description, page 18 .Note: The settings of decimals values are limited between the minimum and maximum valuespecified in the editor menu.

5.10.1. General

Device Configuration

- Touch this button to start

the dialog

Toolbar bottom line

- Scroll to the desired line(grey highlighted line)

Device Information:- General- Custom Properties

Not used in this application

- Disconnect the devicefrom the system (Channel 1,2 or BU)

- Connect the device to the

system

Note: Touch this button to reset the present deviceafter a connection loss (e.g. supply interrupt).




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 69

- Open the Editor toedit this line

- Confirm the TextEditor

- Finally confirm thesettings

[Text Editor]

[Device Confi]

Note 1): For detailed information see Table 5-9 Description of the Device Configuration Settings,page 85 at the end of this Chapter.

CT Modules

- Scroll to the desiredline (grey highlightedline)

Move the highlightedline up or downThe menu bar "ScreenSelection" will changethe order

The cross means thatthe button on thescreen selection

Diagrams is hidden.

CT Channel Mapping

Unit Name:- Open the Text Editorand enter the Name

In a single channelsystem:Touch the red point ofCH2 to cancel CH2,otherwise CH1 blinks

in the system statusbar.





- Open the dialogSelect Device forChannel 1 to 3

- Scroll to the desireddevice (greyhighlighted line)

- Confirm the setting

Language Settings

Select the language

- Scroll to the desiredlanguage (greyhighlighted line)


Note: After changing the language, the ECT must be restarted. Otherwise the setting will notbecome active.

5.10.2. Alarms & Events

AC 800PEC Event ServiceThis section describes how to override a user event.

Service Buffer Size:Number of entries in theEvent Logger TableKeep standard settings!

Resolve Events Command:Reset all pending eventsKeep standard settings!

Overrides:- Open the Overrides Editor(User Events)




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 71

Set a new User Event

- Open the Editor and enter theEvent ID, the Name, theCategory and the Description

- CategoryScroll to the desired greyhighlighted line



- Edit a User Event(grey highlighted line)

- Cancel an entry(grey highlighted line)


[Editor]

[Event Prop...]

[Overrides...]





New Event Mappings:- Open the Text Editor

- Define a new entry

- Open the Editor and input theEvent Type ID (e.g. 10)

- Open the Editor and input theEvent Type.It is only possible to open apop-up windowand to select one of the givenEvent Types

(grey highlighted line)



- Edit the Event Properties

- Cancel the grey highlighted

line


Event FiltersMasking of the Event Types inthe Event Logger Table (notchecked means hidden)

(Critical and Reset not used)


or

[Editor...]

[Event Pro..]

[Event Type..]

[Application...]




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 73

5.10.3. Tools

PEC Software Information

- Scroll to the desired line(grey highlighted line)The complete text of thedescription column is inthe dark grey field underthe last visible line.

Option of saving the SWinformation

- Enter the Folder andthe File Name


[Select File]

CPU Load

Chart ViewDisplay of the processorperformance for mosttasks

Freeze display

Display updatingperiodically




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 75

Keep-Alive Signaling(Setting of the SlowCommMonRamp)

- Open the Editor- Enter a new intervaltime


- Open the dialog box

Send Keep-Alive To:- Open the parametersand go to [Control IT\..]

Start value, Incrementand End value:- Keep standardsettings

- Scroll to the Signal SlowCommMonRamp(grey highlighted line)

and highlight it

- Confirm the signal

Command Editor






- Open the CommandEditor dialog

• Buttons Command Editor

Toolbar Command Editor

Scroll up/down to the desired line (grey highlighted line)

Move up/down the highlighted line to change the command button order

Define a new command buttonNote: The max. number of possible buttons is 10. If more are needed,use one of the Spare places.

Edit the (new) command button

Cancel the (new) command button

• Command Editor, adding a new command button

- Select the upper orlower command buttonplace in the pull-downmenu

Command buttonupper = Command 1

lower = Command 2





Feedback Data Point:- Open the parametersand go to [Control IT\Out\SM_StateMachine]

- Scroll to the Signal ForceChannel(grey highlighted line)and mark the signal

- Confirm the signal

ON State Message:- Open the Text Editor- Enter "FB ON"

OFF State Message:- Open the Text Editor- Enter "FB OFF"

ON State Colors andOFF State Colors:

- Select the back-ground and font.colors

Description: Field for additional information

• Command Editor, defining of a space between command button groups.The space is a ¼ of a command button.

- Touch this button

- Touch the edit buttonand rename the com-mand. (e.g. Space 1)

Move the grey high-lighted line betweenthe commands

- Confirm Command

Editor





5.10.6. Diagrams

Diagrams Configuration

- Scroll to the desireddevice (grey high-lighted line) in the "NotVisible Diagrams"Field

- Move the selectedline to the "VisibleDiagrams" Field


Option to load a newdiagram

- Move the line back tothe "Not VisibleDiagrams" Field

5.10.7. Trending

Fast Trending

- Open the Text Editor,- Enter the value(Image format of theECT)


Slow Trending

- Open the Text Editor,- Enter the value





3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 81

5.10.8. Transient Recorder

Display Settings

- Open the Text Editor,- Enter the value


5.10.9. Security

User Management

Dialog UserManagement

Each user can changeits password

• Registration of a new user

Operation Level = Administrator

Setting of the userlogged in timeDefault value = 10 min

- Add a new user





- Create a User ID(e.g. Sample)- Create the password(e.g. mytest) or leavethe line blank if thereis no passworddesired

- Scroll to the desiredrole (grey highlightedline)

- Define the userprofile for each role

Or cancel a role

- Scroll to the desiredline (grey highlightedline) and move therole to the unassigneduser roles

- Or move the userprofile from a rolegroup(e.g. OperationLevel 2)

- Scroll to the desiredconfigured level (greyhighlighted line)

- Confirm the level


[Users]

[UserSettings]




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 83

• Deletion of an existing user

- Scroll to the desiredlevel/name (greyhighlighted line)

- Cancel the user



YES

[UserSettings]

• Change a user profile

- Scroll to the desiredlevel/name (greyhighlighted line)

- Touch the edit button

Upgrading:

- Scroll in the table ofunassigned roles tothe desired role

- Move the role to theassigned user roles

Downgrading:- Scroll in the table ofassigned roles to thedesired role

- Move the role to theunassigned user roles



[UserSettings]

[Application...]





• User Account

The following table lists the default settings of the different operation levels

Table 5-8 List of Settings relating to the Operation Level

Settings OperationLevel2

OperationLevel3

OperationLevel4

OperationLevel5

Admini- strator

Options: Security / Edit user accounts - - - - X

Options: Security / Change own password X X X X X

Diagrams: Configure - - - X X

Events: Clear Event Logger - - X X X

Events: Reset / Acknowledge Events X X X X X

Events: Save / Print / Freeze X X X X X

General: Minimize / Close CT - - - X X

Operations: Access Command Buttons X X X X X

Operations: Configure Meters X X X X X

Options: Access Options Dialog X X X X X

Options: Alarms and Events - - - X X

Options: General - - X X X

Options: Import Settings - - - X X

Options: Operations - - - X X

Options: Tools X X X X X

Options: Trending - - - X X

Parameters: Create Snapshot - X X X X

Parameters: Edit Parameter Values - X X X X

Parameters: Manage "My Groups" - X X X X

Parameters: Open Snapshot - X X X X

Parameters: Save Snapshot - X X X X

Parameters: Write Snapshot - X X X X

Testing: Edit - - - X X

Testing: Run - - X X X

Transient Recorder: Configure Auto-Read - X X X XTransient Recorder: Configure Recorder - X X X X

Transient Recorder: Read Recorder Data - X X X X

Transient Recorder: Trigger - X X X X

Trending (Fast): Configure Recorders - X X X X

Trending (Slow): Configure Data Logging - X X X X

Trending General: Configure Chart Formatting - X X X X

Trending General: Open / Save Local Files - X X X X




3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 85

5.10.10. Appendix 1 to Chapter Options

• Description of the Device Settings

Path: Options, General, Device Configuration, , , Device Settings

Table 5-9 Description of the Device Configuration Settings

Function Setting Description

CT Location(See how to adjust thisfunction next page)

Local Local The ECT mounted in the front door ofthe control cubicle of the excitationsystem is predefined as local device.

Remote 1-4 Remote applications of the ECTs.

Device Address 172.16.0.11 Compare the setting with Chapter 3.2 - Channel IP Addresses for local TCP/IP Network , page 14

SOAP Port Number 8081 Do not changeHas to be set in accordance with the target

OPC DA Connection String …OpcDaServer.3 Name of the OPC server used

OPC AE Connection String Not used

OPC Server Address (IP) Default field blank

The software of the OPC server is installed on the ECThard disk

Remove OPC root from ID. Check box checked by defaultDo not change

The signal name has no path informationOPC Root Group

1) Applications.Unitrol… Common partial path from all OPC signals

Copy OPC definition filesfrom target

Copy of the definition files

OPC definition file on target …\opc_def.zip Name of the target file

OPC server workingdirectory

…\OPC Server for AC 800M\Files

Name of the server working directory

Replace cached data(See next page how toadjust this function)

Check box not checked by defaultUnmarked: The signal information is stored in the ECTMarked: The signal information is uploaded to the

hard disk of the ECT unless there is nointernal database available

Use database Database in use

Database file …_CTData.fdb Important: The database of this particular applicationmust be installed

Production Environment Check box checked by default A code change in the target asks for an adapteddatabase or snapshot file

Source for time stamps Device Device: Time information is given by the target(for local ECT)

PC: Time information is given by the ECT(for remote ECTs and IBS PC)

Note 1): This entry must have the same CT Location.

Note: After changing a attribute, the ECT must be restarted. Otherwise the setting will not becomeactive.





• Examples of adjustment

Selection of the CT Location:

- Scroll to the CT Locationline (grey highlighted)

- Open the dialog to edit theline

- Scroll to the desired line(grey highlighted line)

- Confirm the CT Location

[Editor]

Replace cached data

Scroll to replace cacheddata line (grey highlighted)

- Open the dialog to edit theline

- Mark the field as empty


[Editor]

- Confirm the settings[Device Configuration]



ABB


Chapter 7 - Commissioning

Safety Regulations

The instructions according to Chapter 1 - Safety Instructions, page 8 shallbe followed.

Commissioning

Before switching on, check whether the connection terminals are wired upaccording to the plant schematic.

See Chapter 3 - Installation, page 14

Setting Aids, Set in Operation with the Machine

The parameter settings and the startup procedure described in the UserManual is to be studied.



ABB


Chapter 8 - Maintenance and Faults

Safety Regulations

The instructions according to Chapter 1 - Safety Instructions, page 8 shallbe followed.

Maintenance

Overflow of the hard disk

Check the directory "My Documents \ …." number and size of the files toprevent an overflow of the hard disk.

Check the file Debug.log in the directory "Program Files \ ABB \ CT \CT Panel Edition for ECT ". If it is larger than 100’000 KB make an exportand delete the file.

Fault MessageThere is a communication mistake between the ECT and channel(Control) system.

- Minimize the application in the task bar

(Access Level N 5 shows these icons on the ECT Display)

- Start the Explorer of the ECT- Copy the Debug.log file and send it to ABB for further clarification.

Connection loss between ECT and Channel(s)

If Channel 2 disappears the status bar display of the Channel 1 turns red

and starts flashing.

Connection loss between ECT and Control System

The operator location defines the parameter DefaultCommandInput (Path Control IT \ In \ OpSel_OperatorSelect…).

Default value is "Remote".

In case of an abrupt connection loss to the ECT, the control systemtransfers the control to the device which is defined as remote control.



Chapter 8 - Maintenance and Faults ABB


ECT Display frozen

Disconnect the 24 V supply to restart the ECT.

Application Exception

If this message appears, follow the instructions in the screenshot below.To recover the ECT from the "unexpected error", disconnect the 24 Vsupply to restart the ECT.

Restart

ECT operates independently of the control system and it always starts upin passive mode. The hand of the panel control button is grey.See Chapter 5.1.2 - Panel Control Button, page 23.

Touch Screen Re-calibration

There is a SW program for screen re-calibration of the ECT.The windows program is accessible in the Operation Level 5.

- Choose Operation Level 5

- Minimize the application in the task bar

- Touch Start \ Hampshire TSHARC Control Panel \ Calibration andfollow the instructions



ABB Chapter 8 - Maintenance and Faults

3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 91

Repair

It is not allowed to open the case of an ECT.

A defective unit should be sent in for repair. See manufacturer’s detailson page 7.



ABB


Chapter 9 - Appendix

9.1. General Data

Ordering information

Product designation Human-Machine-InterfaceType PB D190AOrder number: concluded software and dongle 3BHE017671 R6000

Mechanical data

Touch screen, diagonal (XGA: 1024 x 768) 15.0"Weight 7.3 kgProtection class, front side / rear side IP 65 / 20Dimensions (WxHxD) 482.6x354.8x92 mm, (19"/8U)

Climatic stability

Temperature range for operation +5 to +45 °CTemperature range for storage -20 to + 60 °C

Vibration: 10 Hz to 58 Hz 0.075 mm IEC 60068-2-658 Hz to 150 Hz 10 m/s2

Shock: 10 g, 11 ms, 3 shocks IEC 60068-2-27

Electrical data

Supply voltage 24 VDC (18 to 36 VDC)Power consumption, average / max 60 / 80 WTest voltage according to EN 60950

Operating SystemMicrosoft Windows XP Professional Version 2002, Service Pack 2The ECT Software was designed and tested in this operating system.

Software Release CT 1.3.73.886

Relevant standards, CE conformity

Directive EMC 2004/108/ECEmission standard, Class A EN55011 / EN 55022Generic immunity standard IEC/EN 61000-6-2Test certificate CE and UL



ABB Chapter 9 - Appendix

3BHS233935 E80 Rev. C 93

9.2. Mechanical Dimensions

Device Dimensions

Note: All measurements in(mm)

Fitting Dimensions



Chapter 9 - Appendix ABB


REVISION

Rev.ind.

Page (P),Chapt. (C)

Description(or number of revision)

DateDept./ Init.

B Software release 1.2.69.715 20.01.2009 / Mo

C Software release 1.3.73.886 02.09.2009 / Mo



ABB

© ABB Switzerland Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

UNITROL 6000 Operating Instructions

Converter Control Panel(CCP)

Document No.: 3BHS233287 E80 Rev. A

Version 10 / 2009



ABB

2 3BHS233287 E80 Rev. A Operating Instructions





ABB

Operating Instructions 3BHS233287 E80 Rev. A 3

Table of Contents

Table of Contents ................................................................................................................3

List of Figures......................................................................................................................4

List of Tables .......................................................................................................................4

General Information ............................................................................................................5

Chapter 1 - Safety Instructions .........................................................................................6

1.1. General .......................................................................................................................... 6

1.2. Required Qualification and Responsibilities.................................................................... 6

Chapter 2 -

Device Description.........................................................................................6

2.1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 6

2.2.

Operation....................................................................................................................... 6

2.3. Area of Application......................................................................................................... 7

2.4. Hardware ....................................................................................................................... 7

2.5. Settings.......................................................................................................................... 7

Chapter 3 - Functional Description ..................................................................................9

3.1. General .......................................................................................................................... 9

3.2. Status LED..................................................................................................................... 9

3.3.

Display........................................................................................................................... 9

3.4. Keypad..........................................................................................................................10

3.5. Alarm report ..................................................................................................................10

3.6. Fault report....................................................................................................................10 3.7. Menu Structure .............................................................................................................11

Chapter 4 - Maintenance and Repair ..............................................................................13

4.1. Maintenance .................................................................................................................13

4.2. Repair of the Device......................................................................................................13

Chapter 5 - General Data.................................................................................................14



ABB


List of Figures

Figure 1– CCP ................................................................................................................................. 9

List of Tables

Table 1- DESCRIPTION Of KEY COMMANDS .............................................................................. 10

Table 2- DISPLAY.......................................................................................................................... 11

Table 3- PARAMETERS................................................................................................................. 12

Table 4- FAULT LOGGER (example) ............................................................................................. 12

Table 5- CLOCK SET..................................................................................................................... 13



ABB


General Information


If any questions arise, consult the local ABB representative or the factory:

IMPORTANT!

If calling ABB, please leave your name, department and phone number.This will allow the responsible ABB representative to call back withoutdelay.

ABB Switzerland Ltd Static Excitation Systems, Voltage Regulatorsand Synchronizing EquipmentCH-5300 Turgi / Switzerland

Telephone: +41 58 589 24 86Fax: +41 58 589 23 33Email: [email protected]: http://www.abb.com/unitrol

24 h – Hotline for urgent service inquiries: +41 844 845 845

Email contact for service inquiries: [email protected]

ABB is constantly striving for the best product and service offerings forour customers. Therefore ABB appreciates your valuable feedback orsuggestions for improvements of UNITROL products.

Please send your comments to "[email protected]". Yourinformation will be forwarded to the responsible persons in order toimprove ABB’s future offerings.

Quality Certificates and Applicable Standards

The following certificates and conformity declarations are available with ABB:

• ISO 9001:2000, ISO 14001:2004 and OHSAS 18001:2007certificates stating that ABB Switzerland Ltd has implemented andmaintains a management system which fulfills the requirements ofthe normative standards.

• EC Conformity Declaration of the excitation system.

• List of standards the excitation system complies with.



ABB



1.1. General

The safety instructions shall be followed of the excitation system. Readthe instructions in the Operating Instructions of the UNITROL 6000,excitation system carefully before operating the device and keep thisdocument for future reference.

1.2. Required Qualification and Responsibilities

Take notice of the required qualification and responsibilities in theOperating Instructions of the excitation system.

Chapter 2 - Device Description

2.1. Introduction

The Converter Control Panel (CCP) is used for monitoring a converter ofthe UNITROL 6000 excitation system. Each converter has its own panelwhich is connected to the Control Converter Interface (CCI) of thecorresponding converter.

2.2. Operation

The operator has a range of displays at his disposal, which informs aboutthe status of the converter.

All indications on the display are real feedback information. This means,that all data shown on display are retrieved directly from the selectedconverter.

The Converter Control Panel has the following features:

• Monitoring of three actual converter parameter values





• Parameter viewing

Fault Logger

• Real time clock and synchronization with PEC

Only a group of alarms and faults of the Fault Logger are visible on theCCP. The Fault Logger displays the time and date of the alarm/fault, thename, GlobalID, class and the trigger condition. It displays the last 255events, and can be cleared using the CCP.

The CCP posses a real time clock that may be configured via the menu“CLOCK SET”. A time synchronization between the controller and theCCP is done automatically. Thereby the controller is the time master andthe CCP the time slave. However it is also possible to change thecontroller’s time via the clock set menu “SET TIME”.

2.3. Area of Application

The Converter Control Panel with its software is suitable only for this areaof application in connection with the control system of the UNITROL6000.

2.4. Hardware

The unit cover is made of plastic and mechanical robust.The Ethernet socket RJ-45 is on the rear side of the case.

The panel is mounted on the cubicle door of the converter.

2.5. Settings

There are no settings to do.





3.4. Keypad

The keypad consists of four active push buttons with the followingfunctions:

Table 1- DESCRIPTION Of KEY COMMANDS

Keys Commands

Up,Down

Select mode:Moves the highlighted line up or down

Settings: Decrements or increments the highlighted value of aselected parameter

Soft key 1 Select EXIT: Returns to the last stateContinue to press EXIT until to the Main Display.

Select RESET Fault reset

Soft key 2 Select MENU: Selects main menuSelect ENTER: Selects submenu of the highlighted lineSelect SEL: Selects the highlighted Parameter or Clock Set groupSelect EDIT: Edits parameters (mostly write protected)Select DETAIL: Shows the detail of the highlighted ALARM/FAULTSelect DIAG: Help text, no diagnostic assistant availableSelect OK: Confirms the form of date or the new valueSelect EXIT: Returns to the last state

LOC/REM Not available

? Not available

STOP Not available

START Not available

3.5. Alarm report

For the CCP, an Alarm triggers the CCP’s Alarm response, whichinvolves the green LED flashing, and an alarm message being displayedon the screen every few seconds. This message can be dismissed with

keypad activity, however does return after 3 seconds of inactivity.

3.6. Fault report

With a Trip event, the Fault state of the CCP is triggered. The Fault statehas a red LED, and a Fault Message. When the Fault state is triggered,the user has two options. Select "Exit", and use the CCP as normal,however if the fault remains, the fault state will resume after 10 seconds. Alternatively, the user can press "Reset", and a bit in the "Control Word"will be set.





3.7. Menu Structure

Table 2- DISPLAY

Main Display Main Menu Submenu

OFF

0 A I c o0 A l p h a

7 4 C T c oMENU OFF MAIN MENU

N P A R A M E T E R S

N F A U L T L O G G E R C L O C K S E T

EXIT ENTER OFF PAR GROUPS-01

N 0 1 M e a s u r e m e n t s

N 0 2 C o n v . C o n t r o l

N 0 3 T e m p e r a t u r e s

N 0 4 S t a t u s

N 0 5 F a u l t s

EXIT SEL

100 System Parameters

F A U L T L O G G E R OFF FAULT LOG

N 2 : A l a r m

8 1 7 5 0 7 : 0 4 : 5 1

N 1 : F a i l

N 2 : A l a r m

N 2 : A l a r m

EXIT DETAIL

C L O C K S E T OFF TIME & DATE

N C L O C K V I S I B I L I T Y

N T I M E F O R M A T

N D A T E F O R M A T

N S E T T I M E

S E T D A T E

E X I T S E L





Table 3- PARAMETERS

PAR GROUPS No. Parameter Description

01 Measurements 0101 Ico Actual converter current

0102 Uf Actual converter output voltage0103 UT2 Secondary voltage of the excitation transformer

02 Conv. Control 0201 Alpha Firing angle of the thyristor pulses

03 Temperatures 0301 Trp Thyristor case temperature phase R, positive

0302 Trn Thyristor case temperature phase R, negative

0303 Tsp Thyristor case temperature phase S, positive

0304 Tsn Thyristor case temperature phase S, negative

0305 Ttp Thyristor case temperature phase T, positive

0306 Ttn Thyristor case temperature phase T, negative

0307 Tco Temperature inside the converter module

0308 Tsb Snubber temperature in the cooling channel

04 Status 0401 Run Converter in operation

0402 Off Converter blocked

0403 Isolated Converter disconnected (draw-out version)

05 Faults 0501 FanFail Fan failure

0502 RpFail Thyristor failure phase R, positive

0503 SpFail Thyristor failure phase S, positive

0504 TpFail Thyristor failure phase T, positive

0505 RnFail Thyristor failure phase R, negative

0506 SnFail Thyristor failure phase S, negative

0507 TnFail Thyristor failure phase T, negative

100 System 10001 Output Signal 1 This is the parameter line 1 on the Main Display

Parameters 10002 Output Signal 2 This is the parameter line 2 on the Main Display

10003 Output Signal 3 This is the parameter line 3 on the Main Display

10004 LANGUAGE

Table 4- FAULT LOGGER (example)

FAULT LOG Description Value Comment

2: Alarm FAULT TIME 07:04:51 Time

DAYS 23.01.07 Date

EDGE 1 Trigger condition

Global ID 20002

CLASS 2 Event class

FAULT 2 Fault code (Alarm=1, Fault=2)



ABB Chapter 4 - Maintenance and Repair


Table 5- CLOCK SET

TIME & DATE Selection Comment

CLOCK VISIBILITY Show clock

Hide clock

TIME FORMAT 24-hours

12-hours

DATE FORMAT dd.mm.yy 23.01.07

mm/dd/yy 01/23/07

dd.mm.yyyy 23.01.2007

mm/dd/yyyy 01/23/2007

SET TIME Enter the time

SET DATE Enter the date Date format see above

Chapter 4 - Maintenance and Repair

4.1. Maintenance

The battery keeps clock running at least 10 years without any externalpower. The type of the battery is CR2032.

4.2. Repair of the Device

It is not allowed to open the casing of a CCP.

A defective unit should be sent in for repair. See manufacturer’s detailson page 5.



ABB


Chapter 5 - General Data

Ordering information

Name PEC80-CCP Convert Ctrl PanelType AF D242 AOrder number: 3BHE023126 R0020

Electrical and mechanical characteristics

Supply voltage 11 to 30 VDC @ 60 mAConnector RJ-45Backup battery (Lithium battery, CR2032) 3 V, 220 mAh

Protection class (with door mounting kit IP 65Dimensions (WxHxD) 70 x 100 x 22

User Interface

Display, Type full graphical LCDResolution (pixels) 128 x 64

Climatic stability

Temperature range for operation 0 to +50 °CTemperature range for storage -20 to +70 °C

EMC requirements, CE conformity

EMC directive 89/336/EECEMC requirements IEC 61800-3

Lithium battery circuit fulfils UL safety requirements (Standard for LithiumBatteries, UL 1642)



ABB


REVISION

Rev.

ind.

Page (P)

Chapt (C)

DescriptionDate

Dept./Init. A P14 Type: AF D242 A 05.10.2009 / Mo



ABB

Based on 3BHS223093 E77 Rev. D


UNITROL 6800 Interlock Block Diagram

for Excitation System

Document No. 3BHS223093 E77

Revision Status Rev. D

Date 11 / 2010

Software Release v2.4.53v3.0.00



ABB

2 3BHS223093 E77 Interlock Block Diagram





ABB

Interlock Block Diagram 3BHS223093 E77 3

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS......................................................................................................................3

TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................................................................4

EXPLANATION OF THE SYMBOLS..................................................................................................6

EXPLANATION OF THE OPERATOR LOCATIONS.........................................................................7

CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION.........................................................................................................8

1.1. Purpose of the Document ..................................................................................................... 8

1.2. Structure of the Diagram.......................................................................................................8

1.3. Description of the States.......................................................................................................9

1.4. Description of the Sequence.................................................................................................9

CHAPTER 2 - INTERLOCK BLOCK DIAGRAM..............................................................................10

2.1. Sequences from Start to Operation .................................................................................... 10

2.2. Sequences from Operation to Stop.....................................................................................11

2.3. Trip Circuit...........................................................................................................................12

2.4. Operation Location..............................................................................................................13

2.5. Channel Selection...............................................................................................................14

2.6. Mode Auto / Manual............................................................................................................15

2.7. Reactive Power / Power Factor Control ON / OFF .............................................................16

2.8. Setpoint Raise / Lower........................................................................................................17

2.9. Power System Stabilizer ON / OFF (PSS)..........................................................................18

CHAPTER 3 - LIST OF REFERENCE..............................................................................................19



ABB


Terms and Abbreviations

AC 800PEC Main Controller Device, name of the Electronic Platform

Auto Automatic Voltage Regulator Mode

AutoFaultCH1 / 2 This signal reports a loss of the automatic voltage regulator inChannel 1 or 2

Automatic LogoutTime

After this delay time, a release command enables the presentoperation location which falls back to the default operationlocation. (Default value is 10 min) This signal reports that thetime has expired.

Auto-Manualbalanced

For a bumpless changeover from AUTO to MANUAL mode,the current values of the regulator have to be taken over bythe passive regulators. This signal reports that the Follow-upsignal has adapted the value of the voltage reference.

BU Backup Channel (Field Current Regulator)

BUChannelHWFault

This signal reports a hardware fault of the Backup Channel

CB Circuit Breaker

CIT Control IT

CMD Internal signal, Command

CCM Communication Control Measurement Device

CH1 Channel 1 of the Automatic Voltage Regulator

CH2 Channel 2 of the Automatic Voltage Regulator (Dual ChannelSystem)

CH1 / CH2 is on This signal reports that Channel 1 or 2 is active

CH1 / CH2Fault This signal reports that Channel 1 or 2 has a failure

Channel Consists of a AC 800PEC and a CCM

Common Alarm This signal reports a common event

Ctrl Control

CT External Control Terminal for excitation system

Def Default

ECT Excitation Control Terminal

Emergency Stop This internal stop command can only be active when thegenerator is off grid

Exc Excitation

f (..) Function of (..), see PSS Operational Conditions

Fault This signal reports a serious system fault



ABB


FCB Field Circuit Breaker

FCB open This signal reports that the Field Circuit Breaker is open

I/O Terminal Input or Output

L Internal signalManual Field Current Regulator Mode

ManualFaultCH1/2 This signal reports a loss of the field current regulator inChannel 1 or 2

Machine CBclosed

This external signal reports that both CBs of the net and thegenerator are closed

OP Operation Panel, e.g. Excitation Control Terminal (ECT)

PB Push or Touch Button

PF Power Factor

PSS Power System Stabilizer

PSS OperationalConditions Condition Effect Remark

Online (de-block)Offline (block)

t_ONDimmediately

Adjustable delay time

Release immediately

Absolute value P > Limiter Absolute value P < Limiter

t_OND0.25 sOND if IG > 1

Adjustable delay timeDistance short circuit

UG > minUG < min

UG > maxUG < max

immediately0.25 sOND if IG > 1

immediatelyimmediately

Distance short circuit

UG > UmaxPSS_level Tdown PSS_out Limitation UG max ref.

(MP PQlim*10)= negative Limit PSS_out min Limitation PQmin

R Reset, RS flip flop

Reg Regulator

Preset This signal reports that the initial value of the setpoint isavailable

S Set, RS flip flop

SEL Selection

Q Reactive Power

Q < Limit This signal reports the Feedback of the Q = 0 MVAr

RequestDef(3) This signal reports an adjusted default request after allreleases are enabled(3) Remote I/O will be active

RequestDef(2) No standard signalIf present, (2) Local will be active after all releases areenabled

Trip 1 This signal reports a software Trip



ABB


Explanation of the Symbols

400

OPERATION

State

True

StateState number and the fulfilled condition.

Input or output signal exists when condition (A) is true.

No difference is made between a pulse and acontinuous signal.

Internal signal A exists when condition (A) is true.

Push or Touch Button Switch.

RS Flip-FlopPreselect means that the output signal is stored orrestored.

Truth Table:

*) last state

Time Delay DeviceDefault inverter delay time t = 60 s

Default Operation Location with priority list

The default operation location defines the request afterall releases are enabled. Otherwise the request of the

higher priority is active.E.g. Default value 3 means Remote I/O

AND gate

OR gate

AND gateInput B is inverted



ABB


Explanation of the Operator Locations

The excitation system can be controlled by one of the following sixoperator locations (operator states):

The service operator (Status 1) is an internal ABB operator. (ControlBuilder application) The service operator has the highest priority of alloperators. No standard operator function.

The local operator (Status 2) is an ECT (Excitation Control Terminal). Thelocal operator has the second highest priority. The local ECT is mounteddirectly on the front door of the excitation system control cabinet.

The remote operator (Status 3) acts via the analog and digital

inputs/outputs of the excitation system. This operator has 3rd highestpriority. The remote operator is used by the superimposed plant control tooperate the excitation system via hardware I/Os.

The fieldbus master operator (Status 4) acts via the Anybus-S I/Ointerface and a specific fieldbus protocol. The fieldbus operator has 4th highest priority. The fieldbus master operator is used by thesuperimposed plant control to operate the excitation system via a secondor master fieldbus. No standard operator function.

The fieldbus operator (Status 5) acts via the Anybus-S I/O interface and aspecific fieldbus protocol. The fieldbus operator has 5th highest priority.The fieldbus operator is used by the superimposed plant control tooperate the excitation system via fieldbus. No standard operator function.

The remote CT operator (Status 6) can consist of up to 4 different ECTs(Excitation Control Terminals). It has the lowest priority of all operators.The remote ECTs can be located in the control room of a power plant orelsewhere. No standard operator function.

Service

Local

Remote

Fieldbus Master

Fieldbus

Remote CT



ABB



1.1. Purpose of the Document

In general, this document describes the operation process of a UNITROL6800 Excitation System.

The operator can follow the impact of an input command. For instance, itis not possible to open the field circuit breaker in all operating conditions.The diagram shows the regular conditions which have to be fulfilled aswell as which commands have to be given before the field circuit breakeropens.

1.2. Structure of the Diagram

The sequence control is implemented as a state machine. The states arerepresented as gray numbered boxes. The state represents a well-defined and stable condition. The system can only be in one specific stateat the same time. The output of the state with fulfilled conditions is always"True" and the next sequence could be started.

This sequence is initiated either by an operator command or by an

external process signal. At the end of a sequence the system comes inthe next state forward or returns backwards.

The diagrams in Chapter 2.1 and 2.2 show the conditions from start tooperation and vice versa.

All other diagrams start from a state or are independent between the stateconditions 100 and 400.

For a detailed description see document 3BHS240590 E0x(UNITROL 6800, Operation Software Description). This document isavailable upon request.



ABB


1.3. Descript ion of the States

General State Description

10OFF

Excitation system is de-energized, controller power is off.System is ready for power-up.

Not specified in the following description.

100 AUX READY

Excitation system is de-energized, controller power is on.System is ready for power-up.

200 AUX ON

The FCB is closed and the cooling system is running. The system isready for the excitation process.

300READY

The generator is excited and ready for synchronizing.

400OPERATION

The generator is on grid and the excitation system in full operationaccording to the setpoints. The generator voltage is now regulated andthe generator can produce active and reactive power depending on thesetpoints.

State OFF Circuit

370WAIT STOP

The generator is discharged and kept to Q = 0 MVAr but still connectedto the grid. By means of the Discharge Off command, the system can bebrought back to OPERATION state.

State Trip Circuit 70

TRIPPED After a Trip the excitation system remains in the TRIPPED state until thefault is cleared. After the fault clearing, the system switches to the ON INHIBIT state.

40ON INHIBIT State

After a fault has been cleared, the excitation system remains in the ONINHIBIT state until the Trip is reset manually. After the reset, the system moves to the AUX READY state.

1.4. Descript ion of the Sequence

Transitions between states are executed by means of the sequences thatare initiated from the Excitation Control Terminal or by an externalprocess signal.

Chapter 2 - Interlock Block Diagram shows the transition between thestates as a logical diagram.



ABB


2.2. Sequences from Operation to Stop

External Internal

Q-DischargeI/O

External400

OPERATION

State

True

300

READY

State

True

FCBopen

&

RemoteI/OL

L

Release

PB

&

PB

OP

Local

ExcOff

200

AUXON

State

True

CMD

ExcitationOff

I/O

ExcitationStop

100

AUXREADY

State

True

MachineCBclosedI/O

370

WAITSTOP

State

True

&

&

EmergencyStop

RemoteI/O

L

L

Release

PB

&

PB

OP

Local

FCBOff L

L

EmergencyStop

I/O

FieldBreakerOff ≥1

&≥1

FCBopen

L

CMD

≥1 &

&

I/O

I/O

TripL

≥1

≥1

TripL ExcOff

FCBOff

0 t

L

≥1

Q<LimitL

&

SeeChapter2.3)

SeeChapter2.3)

SeeChapter2.4)

SeeChapter2.4)

SeeChapter2.4)

SeeChapter2.4)



ABB


2.3. Trip Circuit

External Internal

ExternalTrip1I/O

External

70

TRIPPED

State

True

Trip1L

40

ONINHIBIT

State

True

CMD

ExternalTrip2

100

AUXREADY

State

True

Trip1toGenProtectionTrip2toGenProtection

I/OTrip

&

&

≥1

>30

STATE

State

True

&

R

S Q

FaultResetL

Release

PB

&

PB

OP

Reset

Local

FaultL

≥1

L Preselect

SeeChapter2.4)

L I/O

CommonAlarmCommonAlarm*)

*) Display Event ECT: Information, Warning, Alarm, Error (Trip)

For detailed information see the Operating Instructions of the ECT.



ABB


2.4. Operation Location

External Internal

RequestRemoteCtrlI/O

External

CtrlisLocalI/O

ReleaseRemoteCtrl

CIT

Release1

Login

PB

PB

Request2

OP

Logout

PB

PB

Release2

OP

L

OP≥1

≥1

&

L

Request1CIT

L

FieldbusMaster

RemoteCT1to4

Fieldbus

L

ServiceCMD

LocalCMD

&

& CMD

RemoteI/O

&CMD

CIT

≥1

Request1Request2

≥1

&

L

AutomaticLogoutTime

AutomaticLogoutTimeRequestDef(3)

RequestDef(3)

RequestDef(2) ≥1

L

L

Request4Release4

Request5Release5

Request6Release6

DefaultOp.Location1Service

Local

RemoteI/O

FieldbusMaster

Fieldbus

RemoteCT1to4

Priority: 1

6

2

4

5

33

≥1

I/O

I/O

I/O

ECTLinkloss

≥1

Note: gray colored text = no standard operator functions



ABB


2.5. Channel Selection

External Internal

&≥1

L

L

Release

PB

&

PB

OP

Local

CH1

ForceCH1I/O

CMD

CH1

External

L

L

&

&

L

Auto

Manual

&

ForceCH2

I/O

ForceBUI/O

CMD

CH2

CMD

BU

NOTCH2FaultNOTAutoFaultCH2NOTManualFaultCH2

CH2isonL

L

L

CH1Fault

CH2Fault

RemoteI/O

≥1

ManualFaultCH1

AutoFaultCH1

CH1isonandCH1Fault

CH1FaultandCH2Fault

&

NOTBUCHHWFault

SeeChapter2.6)

SeeChapter2.6)

SeeChapter2.4)

SeeChapter2.4)



ABB


2.6. Mode Auto / Manual

External Internal

RemoteI/O

L

L AutoOperation

I/O

Release

PB

&

PB

OP

Local

Auto

L

AutomodeisactiveI/O

External

CH1

CH2

L

&

&

&

&

≥1

AUTOCMD

RemoteI/O

L

LManualOperationI/O

Release

PB

&

PB

OP

Local

Manual

L

ManmodeisactiveI/O

CH1

CH2

L

&

&

&

&

≥1

ManualCMD

ModechangeisreadyI/O

BU

L

≥1

≥1

Auto-Manualbalanced

SeeChapter2.5)

SeeChapter2.5)

SeeChapter2.5)

AutoFaultCH2

AutoFaultCH1

ManualFaultCH1

ManualFaultCH2

L

SeeChapter2.5)

SeeChapter2.5)

SeeChapter2.4)

SeeChapter2.4)

SeeChapter2.4)



ABB


2.7. Reactive Power / Power Factor Control ON / OFF



ABB


2.8. Setpoint Raise / Lower

External Internal

&≥1

L

Local

SynchronizerRaiseI/O

External

L

300

READY

State

True

&

RemoteI/O

SetpointRaise

&OP

RaisePB

L

Setpointmax. Setpointmaxreached

≥1

&

L

Local

&

RemoteI/O

&OP

LowerPB

L

Setpointmin.

≥1SynchronizerLowerI/O

SetpointLower

SetpointminreachedI/O

I/O

Raise

Lower

Act.Ext.Ref.OnI/O

I/O

I/O

SetpointMach.Voltage

SetpointPF-Ctrl

Raise

Lower

Setpoint

Raise

Lower

Setpoint

FieldCurrent

Raise

Lower

L

Q-Ctrl

Auto

Manual

Q-Ctrl

PF-Ctrl

≥1

L

L

L

L

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

≥1

SeeChapter2.7)

SeeChapter2.7)

SeeChapter2.6)

&

&

SeeChapter2.6)

SeeChapter2.4)

SeeChapter2.4)

SeeChapter2.4)

SeeChapter2.4)



ABB


2.9. Power System Stabilizer ON / OFF (PSS)

External Internal

RemoteI/OL

PSSOnI/O

Release

PB

PB

OP

Local

PSSOff

L

PSSisonI/O

External

PSSOff

Release

PB

PB

OP

SelectPSS

Auto

PSSOperationalConditions

400

OPERATION

State

True

R

S Q

PSSSelL

&

&

&

&

LocalL

≥1

≥1

f(ActivePower)f(Ug)

&

L

Preselect

SeeChapter2.4)

SeeChapter2.4)

SeeChapter2.6)

SeeChapter2.4)

I/O



ABB


Chapter 3 - List of Reference

Documents

- Operation Software Description, 3BHS240590 E0x

- Excitation Control Terminal, Operating Instructions, 3BHS233935 E80

- Functional Description, 3BHS239062 E01

- User Manual, related to the project, 3BHS… E80

Diagram

- Hardware Diagram, related to the project, 3BHS… E20

x) Consecutive numbering of the software release document



ABB


Revision

Rev.ind.

Page (P)Chapt.(C)

Description DateDept./Init.

A P9, C2.1 I/O FCB Closed signal is not connected with the statesignal

16.01.2009 / Mo

B -- Several corrections applied 04.05.2009 / MoC P16, C2.8 Change of the diagram 16.11.2009 / Mo

D -- Software Release v2.4.53 and v3.0.00 04.11.2010 / Mo



ABB

2 3BHS240590 E04 UNITROL®

6800 Software Description

ABB reserves all rights to this document and to the information and topics

contained in it. This also applies to any possible claims to copyright orpatents. Forwarding and/or the duplicating of this document without theexpress permission of ABB is forbidden.




ABB

UNITROL®

6800 Software Description 3BHS240590 E04 3

Table of Contents


List of Figures......................................................................................................................4

Chapter 1 - Introduction ....................................................................................................5

1.1. General .......................................................................................................................... 5

1.2. Intended Use of this Guide............................................................................................. 5

Chapter 2 - Conventions and Prerequisites.....................................................................7

2.1. Prerequisites.................................................................................................................. 7

2.2. Conventions................................................................................................................... 7

Chapter 3 -

State Machines ...............................................................................................9

3.1. General .......................................................................................................................... 9

3.2. Channel State Machine and Auto – Manual State Machine............................................ 9

3.3. Main State Machine ......................................................................................................14

Chapter 4 - Start/Stop Sequences ..................................................................................19

4.1. Description of Sequences .............................................................................................19

4.2. Normal Operation Sequences: Sequential Functional Charts........................................24

4.3. Fault Sequences: Sequential Functional Charts............................................................39

Chapter 5 - Signals and Parameters...............................................................................43

5.1. Signal Flow and Signal Designations ............................................................................43

Chapter 6 - Operator Control ..........................................................................................47

6.1. General .........................................................................................................................47

6.2. OperatorSelect Module .................................................................................................47

6.3. Operator Locations........................................................................................................48

6.4. Operator Select Sequences ..........................................................................................49

Appendix A - Drawings .....................................................................................................54



ABB



List of Figures

Figure 3-1 UN6800 Channel Redundancy...................................................................................... 10

Figure 3-2 Main State Machine....................................................................................................... 16

Figure 4-1 Excitation On Sequence (290): Timing Diagram without Field Flashing......................... 21

Figure 4-2 Excitation On Sequence (290): Timing Diagram with Field Flashing.............................. 21

Figure 4-3 Configuration Sequence (30)......................................................................................... 25

Figure 4-4 AuxOn Sequence (190)................................................................................................. 26

Figure 4-5 AuxOff Sequence (150)................................................................................................. 27

Figure 4-6 Excitation On Sequence (290)....................................................................................... 28

Figure 4-7 Excitation On Sequence (290.1): Normal Excitation Part 1............................................ 29

Figure 4-8 Excitation On Sequence (290.1): Normal Excitation Part 2............................................ 30

Figure 4-9 Excitation On Sequence (290.1.4): Field Flash.............................................................. 31

Figure 4-10 Excitation On Sequence (290.3): LCI Start.................................................................. 32

Figure 4-11 Excitation On Sequence (290.4): Electrical braking..................................................... 33

Figure 4-12 Excitation On Sequence (290.5): Async Start.............................................................. 34

Figure 4-13 Excitation Off Sequence (250)..................................................................................... 35

Figure 4-14 Operation On Sequence (390)..................................................................................... 36

Figure 4-15 Discharge Sequence (380).......................................................................................... 37

Figure 4-16 Stop Sequence (360) .................................................................................................. 38

Figure 4-17 Emergency Stop Sequence (170) Part 1 ..................................................................... 39

Figure 4-18 Emergency Stop Sequence (170) Part 2 ..................................................................... 40

Figure 4-19 Trip Sequence (80) Part 1 ........................................................................................... 41

Figure 4-20 Trip Sequence (80) Part 2 ........................................................................................... 42

Figure 5-1 Signal Flow Principle ..................................................................................................... 43

Figure 5-2 Signal Flow, Example for Input from Local Control Terminal to State Machine.............. 45 Figure 5-3 Signal Flow, Example for Output from State Machine to Local Control Terminal ........... 46

Figure 6-1 Operator Select: Overview ............................................................................................ 50

Figure 6-2 Operator Select Logic: Request Local ........................................................................... 51

Figure 6-3 Operator Status: Service ............................................................................................... 52

Figure 6-4 Operator Status: Local .................................................................................................. 53

Figure A- 1 Channel Overview........................................................................................................ 54

Figure A- 2 Channel State Machine................................................................................................ 55

Figure A- 3 Auto-Manual State Machine......................................................................................... 56



ABB

UNITROL®



1.1. General

This document contains the software description of the UN6800sequence and operator control from a functional viewpoint. This includesthe

Main, Channel and Auto-Manual State Machines

Configuration sequence

On/Off sequences

Emergency Stop and Trip Sequences

Signal flow between operator control and sequence control modules

Coordination of operator control locations.

This software is implemented in an AC 800PEC controller on the ControlIT level. However, some of the functions described depend on processesrunning on the Matlab/Simulink level. They are treated only as far asnecessary to understand the function, i.e. by referring to the resultingsignal exchange.

1.2. Intended Use of this Guide

This document is intended to be used for reference purposes byUNITROL engineering personnel, such as:

Engineering Department ATPE, ABB Switzerland, Turgi

Local engineering centers (LECs)

Site operators.

The reader must be familiar and must have practical experience with

excitation systems as well as with the UNITROL control hardware andsoftware and the Control Builder programming tool, including the AC 800PEC specific features of the ControlIT environment.

1.2.1. Safety Regulations

The reader is responsible for compliance with the applicable generalregulations concerning work safety, the safety regulations for working onhigh voltage electrical installations and the specific safety regulationsimposed by the application as stated in the relevant user’s manuals.



ABB

UNITROL®


Chapter 2 - Conventions and Prerequisites

2.1. Prerequisites

In order to understand this documentation the reader must be familiarwith the following topics:

Design and operation of a static excitation system

Application programming with the AC 800PEC controller and theControl Builder.

2.2. Conventions

The sequential diagrams in this documentation are based on theStandard IEC 60848 GRAFCET specification language for sequentialfunction charts, which is the current standard for specifying anddocumenting sequential processes. The IEC 60848 complements theIEC 61131 which on its part defines the programming languages forprogrammable controllers.

For all other conventions refer to the list of related documents in the next

Section.State Machine Diagrams are drawn on the basis of the MathworksStateflow ® printouts.



ABB

UNITROL®


Chapter 3 - State Machines

3.1. General

The UN6800 operation software is based on the state machine conceptand consists mainly of the following components:

Channel State Machine

to determine the active control channel at start-up and at run timebased on the system redundancy.

Auto-Manual State Machine

to manage the changeover between the various continuous controlmodes.

Main State Machine

to coordinate the operation status of the excitation system.

The state machines are programmed on the Matlab/Simulink control level.

3.2. Channel State Machine and Auto – Manual State Machine

3.2.1. Control System Configuration

A fully redundant UN6800 control system consists of 1 or 2 independentand identical controllers (see Figure 3-1):

control channel 1

control channel 2,

each allowing full automatic operation (voltage regulation, AVR) andmanual operation (field current regulation, FCR). In addition, a

backup channel

is provided for emergency manual operation (backup field currentregulation, BFCR). At any time, only one of the three channels can be theactive channel that controls the process.



ABB



11

AVR

FCR

UG

IG

IF

AVR AVR

FCRFCR

UG

IG

IF

UG

IG

IF

22

nn

AVR

FCR

UG

IG

IF

AVR

FCR

UG

IG

IF

UG

IG

IF

IF BFCRIF BFCR

CH #2

CH #1

Auto-manual switchover Channel switchover

Figure 3-1 UN6800 Channel Redundancy

Configurations with reduced redundancy (e.g. 1 channel only, with orwithout backup) are also possible.

3.2.2. Switchover Conditions

The main channels 1 and 2 can each operate in auto (AVR) and manual(FCR) modes. The BFCR only provides manual operation. Depending onthe status of each channel, an auto/manual or a channel switchover takesplace.

A switchover between auto and manual modes or between channels caneither be initiated manually by an operator command or automatically dueto a degraded operating situation.

The switchover between the redundant control channels is coordinated bythe channel state machine.

In a redundant configuration, one of the two main channels (e.g.channel 1) is active. The second, passive, channel is continuouslyupdated via a redundant communication link and its outputs follow theactive channel. In case of a disturbance in the active channel, or in caseof a manual channel force, the passive channel immediately assumesactive control. If both channels fail, the backup channel takes over activecontrol.

The switchover between AVR and FCR control modes is coordinated bythe auto – manual state machine.

Channel Switchover

Auto – ManualSwitchover

Control channel 1

Control channel 2

Backup channel



ABB

UNITROL®


Switchover only takes place if certain functional preconditions are fulfilled,i.e. the target channel must be in a condition to run the requested controlmode. Therefore each channel has a fault status, represented by avalence according to Table 3-1: The higher the valence of the channel,the better the current availability of the channel.

Table 3-1Channel Functional Status

Valence Channel Status Meaning Used for mainchannels

Used forbackupchannel

40 No Fault AVR and manual working X

30 Manual Fault AVR working X

20 Auto Fault Manual working X X

10 Channel Fault AVR and manual not working X X

The channel and the auto – manual state machine charts that areincluded in Appendix A - Drawings show all possible states together with

the switching criteria.

3.2.3. System Initiated Switchovers

If all channels are working the changeover is done according to thechannel states listed in Table 3-1. The channel with highest valence (i.e.highest priority) will be the active channel.

"No Fault" has highest priority.

"Manual Fault" has priority over "Auto Fault", i.e. a channel withworking AVR has priority over a channel with working FCR.

"Channel Fault" has lowest priority.

If both main channels have the same channel redundancy, a backupoptical link loss can initiate a switchover.

If the active main channel encounters a serious fault, the passive mainchannel takes over. If there is no passive main channel or if it is faultedtoo, the backup channel takes over. If all channels have serious faults,the CCI runs into timeout after 10 ms and blocks pulse generation.

Return from the backup channel to a main channel must be initiatedmanually and always leads to a forced manual mode.

There are three methods of detecting serious channel faults:

Power fail detection

CPU watchdog detection

All links dead detection

"Power fail" and "CPU watchdog" are detected by the channel itself andthe fault is signaled to the other channels. "All links" dead is detected bythe properly working channels by checking all CCI links and the own linksto the channel.

Channel Status



ABB



Each supervision signal and system fault from both, the Simulink andControlIT level, is allocated to one of 12 different system and channelrelevant group faults:

Alarm

Redundancy Fault

Manual Fault

Auto Fault

Channel Fault

Other Channel Hardware Fault

Backup Channel Hardware Fault

Channel to Backup Optical Link Loss

Emergency STOP

Trip 1

Trip 2

Startup Inhibit

If a fault occurs, the corresponding group fault will be activated. Eachgroup fault can be reset individually. However, reset is only possible if thefault is not active anymore. Each group fault is logged in the fault-logger.

The group faults directly affect the state-machine behavior (except

"Alarm" and "Redundancy fault") as follows:"Auto", "Manual" and "Channel Fault" initiate a change of valence ofthe affected channel.

"Channel to Backup Link Loss" initiates a switchover to the othermain channel if the auto, manual and channel fault states indicate thesame valence.

"Emergency Stop", "Trip 1", "Trip 2" directly initiate the correspondingsequence, if possible.

"Other Channel Hardware Fault" and "Backup Channel HardwareFault" can initiate immediate switchover to a passive channel (e.g.

Power-fail, CPU watchdog or FPGA freeze).

3.2.4. Operator Initiated Switchovers

The following operator commands will initiate switchovers:

Force Manual: forces both main channels to manual mode, ifpossible

Force Auto: forces both channels to auto mode, if possible

Force Channel: forces a switchover to the corresponding channel.

Channel Protection



ABB

UNITROL®


Manual switchover (channel forcing) is allowed only if both channels havethe same valence. Switching from a channel with higher valence to achannel with lower valence is prevented, except when forcing the backupchannel (since the backup channel has no machine PTs the backupchannel valence is always in auto fault or channel fault state).

No distinction regarding the valence of a channel is made between autoand force manual mode. Force manual mode is an operator interventionand not a fault. Therefore force manual has no impact on the automaticswitchover.

Force manual is possible on the active channel only. If the active channelis forced to manual, the stand-by channel will follow, if possible. As longas there is no auto fault all the machine supervision functions are still live(even in force manual state!).

3.2.5. Channel State Machine

The conditions to be fulfilled for a switchover from one main channel tothe second main channel or to the backup channel are illustrated in thechannel state machine chart in Appendix A - Drawings.

The channel state machine includes 4 different states:

Channel 1 (active)

Channel 2(active)

Backup Channel (active)

No Active Channel

In case of a normal cold start (energizing the control system), one of thetwo main channels is selected by the operator to be the active channel.

In case of a warm start, i.e. if a channel is energized in a running system,

3.2.6. Auto – Manual State Machine

The conditions to be fulfilled for a switchover from auto to manual modeor to a fault state are illustrated in the auto - manual state machine chartin Appendix A - Drawings.

The auto - manual state machine includes the following states:No fault states:

Auto

Forced Manual

Fault states:

Auto Fault

Manual Fault

Channel Fault



ABB



3.3. Main State Machine

The main state machine provides an overview over the various

operational states of the excitation system and the transitions betweenthese states, i.e. the startup-, operation-, stop-, and trip sequences. Eachsequence is initiated either by an operator command from the activeoperator location or by an external process signal.

Each state and each sequence is tagged with an identification numberaccording to Table 3-2 . This state number is used in the control softwareto identify the active system state. Therefore, the same state numbers areused in the sequential diagrams in this documentation.

State machine and sequence control are implemented in theStateMachine control module.

Table 3-2 State-Machine: State Numbers

State Number

Off 0/10

Oninhibit 40

Tripped 70

Trip Sequence 80

Wait Trip Release 90

Aux Ready 100

Aux Ready Test 110

Aux On 200

Aux On Test 210

Ready 300

Ready Test 310

Wait Stop 370

Operation 400

Operation Test 410

Table 3-3 State-Machine: Sequence Numbers

Sequence Number

HW Check Sequence 20

Config Sequence 30

Aux Off Sequence 150

Emergency Stop Sequence 170

Aux On Sequence 190

Exc Off Sequence 250

Exc On Sequence 290

Stop Sequence 360



ABB

UNITROL®


Sequence Number

Discharge Sequence 380

Operation-On Sequence 390

Table 3-4 State-Machine: Commands

Command

Aux On

Emergency Stop

Aux Off

Excitation Start

Exc On

Exc Stop

Exc OffOperation

Discharge

Stop

Trip 1

Trip 2

Trip Release

3.3.1. Main State Machine Chart

Figure 3-2 shows the various states and sequences that are furtherexplained on the following pages:

States, sequences and transitions are represented with boxes indicatingsteps according to the GRAFCET notation.

States are represented with grey boxes including state number andname according to Table 3-2 .Example:

Sequences are represented with white boxes indicating an enclosingstep according to the GRAFCET notation. The boxes includesequence number and name according to Table 3-2 .Example:

The initial state OFF is marked with a double outline.



ABB



Zone D

Zone C

Zone B

Zone A

100 AUX READY

200 AUX ON

30 ConfigurationSequence

190 Aux On

Sequence

300 READY

290 Exc OnSequence

390 Operation On

Sequence

400 OPERATION

170 Emergency Stop

Sequence

Controller Power ON

Configuration sequence finished

Aux On Command

or Excitation Start Command

Aux ON Sequence finished

Excitation On Command

or

Excitation Start Command

Excitation ON Sequence finished

Operation Command

Operation ON Sequence finished

80 Trip Sequence70 TRIPPED

Emergency Stop

Command

Trip Release

Command

40 ON INHIBIT90 WAIT TRIP

Trip 2 Trip 1

Reset

OnInhibit Cleared

(Simulink)

10 OFF

150 Aux Off

Sequence

250 Exc Off

Sequence

360 Stop Sequence

Aux Off Command

or Exc Stop Command

Stop Command

Exc Off Command

or

Exc Stop Command

380 Discharge

Sequence

Excitation Off

Sequence finished

Stop Sequencefinished

Aux Off Sequence finished

370 WAIT STOP

Discharge Sequence

finished

Discharge Command

210 AUX ON TEST

310 READY TEST

410 OPERATION TEST

110 AUX READY TEST

Figure 3-2 Main State Machine

Some sequences can be initiated from several states or whileanother sequence is running (in this case, the running sequence isaborted). In Figure 3-2 such zones are marked with shaded boxes:



ABB

UNITROL®


Zone A: the Aux Off and the Emergency Stopsequences can be initiated if the system is in state AUX ON or the Aux On sequence is running.

Zone B: the Exc Off and the Emergency Stop

sequences can be initiated if the system is in stateREADY or the Exc On sequence is running.

Zone C: the Discharge sequence can be initiated ifthe system is in state OPERATION or theOperation On sequence is running.

Zone D: a Trip can be initiated if the system is inany regular state.

3.3.2. Description of the States

Each state is tagged with an identification number according to Table 3-2 and represents a well defined and stable system condition. The excitationsystem can be in only one state at a given instant.

According to Figure 3-2 the following states exist:

Excitation system is de-energized, controller power is off.

System is ready for power-up.

The excitation system is configured correctly, controller is running and nofault is pending.

System is ready to be started.

The FCB is closed. The system is ready for the excitation process.

The generator is excited and ready for synchronizing.

The generator is on grid and the excitation system in full operationaccording to the setpoints. The generator voltage is now regulated and

the generator can produce active and reactive power depending on thesetpoints.

The generator is discharged and kept to Q = 0 MVAr but still connected tothe grid. By means of the Discharge Off command, the system can bebrought back to OPERATION state.

The WAIT TRIP is attained if a Trip 2 is active. In case of a Trip 2, theTrip sequence must be released with an external command.

10 OFF State

100 AUX READYState

200 AUX ON State

300 READY State

400 OPERATIONState

370 WAIT STOP State

90 WAIT TRIP State



ABB



On the other hand, a Trip 1 will immediately start the Trip sequence, evenif the generator is on grid.

After a Trip the excitation system remains in the TRIPPED state until thefault is cleared.

After the fault clearing, the system switches to the ON INHIBIT state.

After a fault has been cleared, the excitation system remains in the ONINHIBIT state until the Trip is reset manually.

After the reset, the system moves to the AUX READY state.

The test states are used to switch the excitation system into test mode.They are not yet implemented. The descriptions will follow.

70 TRIPPED State

40 ON INHIBIT State

Test States



ABB

UNITROL®


Chapter 4 - Start/Stop Sequences

4.1. Description of Sequences

Transitions between states are executed by means of the sequences thatare initiated from the control panel(s). Each sequence is tagged with anidentification number according to Table 3-3.

According to Figure 3-2 the following sequences exist:

4.1.1. 30 Configuration Sequence

Initial State 10 OFF

Activation The Configuration sequence is initiated automatically when thecontroller power supply is switched on, i.e. when the AC 800PECcontroller is booted or re-booted.

The configuration parameters will be changed only if thePar.In.RequestConfigChange has been set before in theStateMachine CMD Window.

Actions The configuration sequence is used to update the configurationparameters of the system:

Excitation system name

Channel configuration

I/O configuration

Converter configuration

Resulting State 100 AUX READY



ABB



4.1.2. 190 Aux On Sequence

Initial State 100 AUX READY

Activation Aux On command from active operator

or

Excitation Start command (Aux On and Excitation On) sequences areboth initiated and executed (Transition from AUX READY to READY)

Actions The Aux On sequence starts the cooling system (if applicable) andcloses the field circuit breaker (FCB).

Resulting State 200 AUX ON

4.1.3. 290 Excitation On Sequence

Initial State 200 AUX ON

Activation Excitation On command from active operator

or

Excitation Start command (Aux On and Excitation On) sequences are

both initiated and executed (Transition from AUX READY to READY)

Actions The Excitation On sequence leads the generator to the excited statewhere it is ready for synchronization with the grid (see timing diagram,Figure 4-1). It builds up generator voltage and field current

first by firing all thyristors in pure rectifier mode to utilize thegenerator remanence and then by

ramping the generator voltage and field current in controlled 6-pulse mode (soft start) up to nominal voltage.

If the generator remanence is not sufficient, the field flashing circuit isused to build up the minimum required field.

Depending on the system configuration the following optional actionsare carried out:

Line Charging

Electrical breaking

LCI Start

Async start

Resulting State 300 READY



ABB

UNITROL®


F i r e a l l

t i m e o

u t

1 0 s a

p p r o

x .

Figure 4-1 Excitation On Sequence (290): Timing Diagram without Field Flashing

Remanence(1.5 V approx.)

10 V approx.

Reference voltage(100 %)

UG

t

Fire all

F i r e a l l

t i m e o u

t

F i e l d

f l a s h t i m

e o u t

- > E m

e r g e

n c y S t o p

v i a p r

o t e c t i

o n

( f r e e w

h e e l i n g

)

Field flashing

S u f f i c i e

n t r e m

a n e n c e

, n o f i e l d

f l a s h i n

g

n e c e s s

a r y

S o f t s t

a r t r a m

p

Unsucessful attempt

Ready for

synchroni-

zation

Figure 4-2 Excitation On Sequence (290): Timing Diagram with Field Flashing

4.1.4. 390 Operation On Sequence

Initial State 300 READY

Activation From external input (generator breaker closed)

Actions Releasing of limiters and superimposed regulators if the generator issynchronized to the grid.

(The synchronization of the generator and closing the generatorbreaker is an external action.)

Resulting State 400 OPERATION



ABB

UNITROL®


4.1.8. 150 Aux Off Sequence

Initial State 200 AUX ON

Activation Aux Off command from active operator

or

Excitation Stop command (Aux Off and Excitation Off) sequences areboth initiated and executed (Transition from READY to AUX READY)

Actions The Aux Off sequence opens the field circuit breaker (FCB) and stopsthe cooling system (if applicable).


4.1.9. 170 Emergency St op Sequence

Initial State 200 AUX ON, 300 READY, 190 Aux On sequence,290 Exc On sequence (excitation system is active, but not on grid)

Activation From external input (protection)

Actions The Emergency Stop sequence shuts down the excitation system by

Opening the Field Breaker and Field Flash Breaker

Blocking pulses

Stopping the cooling system

Blocking and pre-setting the regulators


4.1.10. 80 Trip Sequence

Initial State Excitation system is active (Channel Active)

or

90 WAIT TRIP STATE

Activation From external input (protection): Trip 1 or Trip Release

Actions The Trip sequence shuts down the excitation system by

Opening the Field Breaker and Field Flash Breaker



ABB



Blocking pulses

Disabling the cooling system

Blocking and pre-setting the regulators

(The Trip sequence as such is identical with the Emergency OffSequence, except that activation and resulting state are different)

Resulting State 70 TRIPPED

4.2. Normal Operation Sequences: Sequential Functional Charts

This section contains the detailed diagrams for the sequences defined inFigure 3-2. The sequence diagrams are based on the GRAFCET notation(see Chapter 2 - Conventions and Prerequisites).

Each step is numbered according to the following scheme:

The initial step carries the sequence number according to Table 3-2 and Table 3-3.

All following steps in the sequence are numbered consecutively afterthe decimal point, e.g. 30.1, 30.2, ….

A macro step is marked with an "M" in front of the number. The first(entry) step in the corresponding expansion is marked wit an "E". Thefollowing steps are then numbered consecutively using a seconddecimal point, e.g. M290.1M E290.1, 290.1.1, 290.1.2, ….

Transitions are numbered consecutively with small letters: a, b, c, …

Off-page connectors are used if a sequence does not fit on a singlepage. An off-page connector is tagged with the number of thefollowing/preceding step or transition.

Additional comments are located on the left and right sides of thediagrams. They also include important input and output signals.



ABB

UNITROL®


4.2.1. 30 Configuration Sequence

30 Init_ConfigReset "Configuration sequence"

finished

Configuration Command

when booting

10 OFF

30 CONFIGURATION

100 AUX READY

Aux ON Command


"Variable Start Config sequence" =1a

30.1 Initialize "Wait"

Timer Internal timer

Par.In.RequestConfigChange= 0

(No reconfiguration requested,configuration is valid)

b

30.3 Channel Start-up Activate the converter

Internal "Wait" timer has reached limit e

30.4 Config Finished Set "Configuration sequence" finished

"Start Config sequence" =0 f

Par.In.RequestConfigChange = 1c

30.2 Control Channel

Configuration

Update Configuration

Parameters:- Excitation system name

- Channel configuration

- I/O configuration

- Converter configuration

Par.In.RequestConfigChange= 0

(No reconfiguration requested,configuration is valid)

d

If configuration parameters are tobe changed, the

Par.In.RequestConfigChange

must be set first in the

StateMachine CMD Window(check box "Request

reconfiguration")

Then the Sequence updates the

configuration parameters until thePar.In.RequestConfigChange is

reset.

Notice:

If configuration parameters have

been changed, the check box"Request reconfiguration" must

be unchecked in the

StateMachine CMD Window to

continue with start-up.

Then the configuration

parameters must be saved to the

controller Flash memory and the

control system must be rebooted.

Sequence remains in this stateand configuration parameters can

be modified in the various

StateMachine CMD Window untilcheck box "Request

reconfiguration" is unchecked.

Figure 4-3 Configuration Sequence (30)



ABB



4.2.2. 190 Aux ON Sequence

190 Init_AuxON Reset "Aux ON sequence" finished

"Start Aux ON sequence" =1

No Aux System required a

190.2 Closing FieldBreaker

Set "Close Field Breaker"

Command

Field Breaker closed or

Field Breaker fault d

190.3 Aux ON

finished

From active operatorcontrol via State Machine:

AuxOn

NoAuxSystemRequired

Reset "Close Field Breaker"

Command Set "Aux ON sequence finished"

"Start Aux ON sequence" =0 e

100 AUX READY

190 Aux On

Sequence

200 AUX ON

Aux ON Command


"Start Aux ON sequence" =1

Aux System required b

190.1 Switching ON

Cooling SystemSet "Enable Cooling

System" Command

Cooling system ON c

AuxOnSeq_Finished =1

Converter_Cmd.EnableCoolSys

Converter_Status.CoolSysIsOn

Breaker_Status.FieldBreakerIsClosed

Breaker_Status.BreakerFault

Breaker_Cmd.CloseFieldBreaker

AuxOnSeq_Finished =0

Figure 4-4 AuxOn Sequence (190)



ABB

UNITROL®


4.2.3. 150 AuxOFF Sequence

200 AUX ON

150 Aux OFF

Sequence

100 AUX READY

Aux OFF Command

Aux OFF Sequence finished

150 Init_AuxOFF Reset "Aux OFF sequence" finished

150.2 Opening Field

Breaker Set "Open Field Breaker" Command

Block converter firing pulses

Field Breaker open and

No Field Breaker fault and

Firing pulses blocked and

No Aux System

d

150.3 Aux OFF

finished

Set "Aux OFF sequence finished"Reset "Open Field Breaker" Command

"Start Aux OFF sequence" =0 e

"Start Aux OFF sequence" =1a

Field Breaker open and

No Field Breaker fault and

Firing pulses blocked and

Aux System to be turned OFF

d

150.1 Switching OFF

Cooling SystemReset "Enable Cooling

System" Command

Cooling system OFF c

AuxOffSeq_Finished =1


Breaker_Cmd.OpenFieldBreaker

NoAuxSystemRequired

Breaker_Status.FieldBreakerIsClosed

Breaker_Status.BreakerFault

Converter_Status.CoolSysIsOn

Converter_Cmd.EnableCoolSys

From active operator control

via State Machine:

AuxOff


Figure 4-5 AuxOff Sequence (150)



ABB



4.2.4. 290 Excitation ON Sequences

Figure 4-6 Excitation On Sequence (290)



ABB

UNITROL®


Timer to measure the time

between ExcOn Cmd and Startof soft start rampE290.1

Start "Excitation ON" timer Start "Time before Soft start" timer Preset manual and AVR regulatorsetpoints

290.1.1 Preset

regulator

Setpoint integrators at preset valuea

Store actual If and Ug values (initial values forSoft Start ramp)Release manual and AVR regulator setpoints

Par.In.ExcSysSupplyMode =0

(No shunt supply)b Par.In.ExcSysSupplyMode =1

(Shunt supply)

and"Firing all" criteria fulfilled *)

c

290.1.2 Start firing allConverter_Cmd.EnableFireAll:=true;Converter_Cmd.ReleasePulses:=true;Start "Fire all" timer

Minimum value of Ug or Ifreached to start in 6-pulsemode

e Minimum value of Ug or Ifnot reached within "Fire All" timeout limit

g

290.1.4 No field flashHold "Fire all" timer Store actual If and Ugvalues (initial values forSoft Start ramp)

M290.1.5 Field flash

Truef Trueh

290.1.6

ExcSysSupplyMode(true for shunt supply)

Release converterfiring pulsesSet "fire all" mode

SystemMeasurement_Status.IfRel

SystemMeasurement_Status.UgRel

SystemMeasurement_Status.IfRel SystemMeasurement_Status.UgRel

*) "Firing all" criteria:

Ug < 0.8 p.u.and

If < 0.8 p.u.

and Usyn< 0.8 p.u.

Par.In.ExcSysSupplyMode =1(Shunt supply)and not "Firing all" criteria fulfilled *)

d

290.1.3 Fire all trip Set "Fire all trip fault"-> Emergency Stop

Figure 4-7 Excitation On Sequence (290.1): Normal Excitation Part 1



ABB



Figure 4-8 Excitation On Sequence (290.1): Normal Excitation Part 2



ABB

UNITROL®


E290.1.4 Field flashClose field flash breakerFieldFlashingActive:=true

Start "field flash timeout" timer

System ready for 6-pulse operation(Minimum value of Ug or If reachedto start in 6-pulse mode)

a Field flashing time out b

290.1.4.1 Field flash

timeout

Disable fire-all Enable free wheeling modeStop "ExcOn" timer Start "free wheeling" timer

Freewheeling Time elapsed c

290.1.4.2 Field flash

Fault

Disable free wheeling modeStop "free wheeling" timer Open field flash breaker Set "field flash timeout" fault

Excitation OFF sequence actived

290.1.4.3 Save valuesStore actual If and Ug values(initial values for Soft Startramp)

Breaker_Cmd.CloseFieldFlashBreaker

Figure 4-9 Excitation On Sequence (290.1.4): Field Flash

The line charging excitation on sequence is equal to the normal excitation sequence. The onlydifference is that instead of the normal startup time "Par.In.ExcOnStartupTime" a longer time"Par.In.LineChargingExcOnStartupTime" is used for the startup of the excitation (slower softstartramp). The margin between the timeout time and the startup time is the same as in the normalexcitation sequence (e.g. Timeout=20 s, StartupTime=15 s -> Margin=5 s |LineCharingStartupTime=120 s -> LineChargingTimeout=125 s).



ABB



Current regulator is released for

LCI start

E290.3

Start "Excitation ON" timer

Preset manual setpoint (field currentregulator)

290.3.1 ForceManual

External reference for manual regulator is activeor analog reference input is ready

a

Release manual regulator setpoint Set "ForceManual"

Manual Operation is activeb Timeout if manual control is not active(ExcON Timeout)

c

290.3.3 ExcOntimeout LCIRelease "ForceManual" Set ExcOnTimeoutFault

290.3.2 Release

converter Release pulses for 6-pulse operationRelease converters

Converter is released for LCI

start

Figure 4-10 Excitation On Sequence (290.3): LCI Start



ABB

UNITROL®


E290.4

290.4.1ForceManual

b c

290.4.2ExcOn

timeoutbraking1

290.4.3Release

converter

d e

290.4.4ExcOn

timeoutbraking2

290.4.5Brakingmode

active

f g

290.4.6ExcOn

timeoutbraking3

290.4.7Waitfor

ExcitationOff

a

h

290.4.8ExcOn

timeoutbraking4

Figure 4-11 Excitation On Sequence (290.4): Electrical braking



ABB



Figure 4-12 Excitation On Sequence (290.5): Async Start



ABB

UNITROL®


4.2.5. 250 Excitation OFF Sequence

Figure 4-13 Excitation Off Sequence (250)



ABB



4.2.6. Excitation Start/Stop

The Excitation Start/Stop sequences are combined sequences:

Excitation Start: Aux On and Excitation On are both initiated andexecuted (Transition from AUX READY to READY).

Excitation Stop: Excitation Off and Aux Off are both initiated andexecuted one after the other (Transition from READY to AUX READY).

4.2.7. 390 Operation ON Sequence

Figure 4-14 Operation On Sequence (390)



ABB

UNITROL®


4.2.8. 380 Discharge Sequence

Figure 4-15 Discharge Sequence (380)



ABB



4.2.9. 360 Stop Sequence

Figure 4-16 Stop Sequence (360)



ABB

UNITROL®


4.3. Fault Sequences: Sequential Functional Charts

4.3.1. 170 Emergency Stop Sequence

170Init_Emergency

Stop

a

170.1OpenFBE

170.3ACbreaker

withFFBopen

d

f

e g

170.5Coolingsystem

off

h

170.6PulseBlock

b

c

170.2ACbreaker

withFFBclosed

170.4DCbreaker

Figure 4-17 Emergency Stop Sequence (170) Part 1



ABB

UNITROL®


4.3.2. 80 Trip Sequence

80 p

Trip1/Trip Release

Sequence finished

ACTIVE CHANNEL

80 TRIP SEQUENCE

70 TRIPPED

80 Init_Trip

"Start_TripSeq" =1a

Active Status 200 AUX ON or 300 READY Initialize "Inv mode" timer (Reset & Hold)

Reset "Trip finished"

80.1 Open FBESet "Open Field Breaker Command" = 1

Disable Usyn monitoring

TripSeq_Finished = 0

80 i 80 j

From protection

80.3 AC breaker

with FFB openBlock Converter pulses

Block limiters (If limitations etc.)

80.4 DC breaker Set converter to "Inv mode"

Start "Inv mode" timer Block limiters (If limitations etc.)

AC breaker used and

field flash breaker opend

DC breaker f

Truee Trueg

80.5 Cooling system

off

Disable cooling system

Set "Open Field Flash Breaker Command" = 1Restart "Inv mode" timer

InvModeTimer.Q or

(ACBreakerUsed and not enable free wheeling)h

80.6 Pulse Block

Block pulses

Reset "Inv mode"

Stop "Inv mode" timer Disable free wheeling mode

AC breaker used and

field flash breaker closed b

Free wheeling timeelapsed

c

80.2 AC breaker

with FFB closed

Enable free wheeling modeStart "free wheeling" timer

Start "Inv mode" timer Block limiters (If limitations etc.)

Figure 4-19 Trip Sequence (80) Part 1



ABB



Figure 4-20 Trip Sequence (80) Part 2



ABB

UNITROL®


Chapter 5 - Signals and Parameters

5.1. Signal Flow and Signal Designations

As explained in the UN6800 CIT Software Documentation,3BHS232543 D01, Chapter 2 Software Architecture – Overview ,programming of the Excitation System follows the concept of objectoriented programming. Communication between the control modules isorganized strictly hierarchical and each object has well defined interfaces,a fact that makes signal tracking in the software description ratherdifficult.

In order to further illustrate the data handling as well as the signal typesand designations that are involved in operator and sequence control,typical examples for a signal flow are shown in Figure 5-2 and Figure 5-3.

A control module (e.g. Local1) receives commands from its superiormodule (in this case OperatorSelect ), while it sends status information tothe superior module.

On the other hand, the subsidiary module is a part of the superior moduleand, from the viewpoint of the superior module, data exchange with thesubsidiary module is done with local variables.

Figure 5-1 Signal Flow Principle

In order to pass the data to the next higher level, the variable data setsmust be mapped to command/status data sets. This mapping process isrepeated for each hierarchical level, as shown in Figure 5-2 for a typical



ABB



input signal (AUX ON from the local CT) and in Figure 5-3 for a typicaloutput signal (current State Number to the local CT).

Signal exchange with the external control devices (e.g. local CT) takesplace via an OPC communication interface. Therefore the process

variables are mapped to parameter sets (Par.In and Par.Out) that can beaccessed via the OPC server.



ABB

UNITROL®


Excitation system

OperatorSelect StateMachine

Local1

Local_CT Status

Command

Variable_Cmd Variable_Status

MMS

OPC

Par.Out Par.In

CT

AUX

ON

StatusCommand


StatusCommand

Status.OperatorIn.SM_StateMachine.AuxOn

CT1_Status.OperatorIn.SM_StateMachine.AuxOn

Mapping

Status.OperatorIn :=

CT1_Status.OperatorIn


Par.In.SM_StateMachine.AuxOn

Mapping


Par.In


Local_Status.OperatorIn.SM_StateMachine.AuxOn

Mapping


Local_Status.OperatorIn



OperatorSelect_Status.OperatorIn.SM_StateMachine.AuxOn

Mapping


OperatorSelect_Status.OperatorIn

StateMachine_Par.In.AuxOn

Mapping

StateMachine_Par.In:=

OperatorSelect_Status.OperatorIn.SM_StateMachine

Command

Variable_Cmd

Mapping



Par.In.AuxOn

AuxOn

Figure 5-2 Signal Flow, Example for Input from Local Control Terminal to State Machine



ABB



Excitation system

OperatorSelect StateMachine

Local1

Local_CT StatusCommand


MMS

OPC

Par.Out Par.In

CT

AUX

ON

StatusCommand


StatusCommand

Cmd.OperatorOut.SM_StateMachine.SM_StateNumber

Par.Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_StateNumber

Mapping

Par.Out :=

Cmd.OperatorOut


OperatorSelect_Cmd.OperatorOut.SM_StateMachine.SM_StateNumber StateMachine_Par.Out.SM_StateNumber

Mapping

OperatorSelect_Cmd.OperatorOut.SM_StateMachine :=

StateMachine_Par.Out

Command

Variable_Cmd

Mapping



Par.Out.SM_StateNumber

SM_StateNumber


CT1_Cmd.OperatorOut.SM_StateMachine..SM_StateNumber

Mapping

CT1_Cmd.OperatorOut :=

Cmd.OperatorOut


Local_CmdOperatorOut.SM_StateMachine.SM_StateNumber

MappingLocal_Cmd.OperatorOut :=

Cmd.OperatorOut

Figure 5-3 Signal Flow, Example for Output from State Machine to Local Control Terminal



ABB

UNITROL®


Chapter 6 - Operator Control

6.1. General

Operator control is responsible for the following tasks:

Coordination of the various control locations according to theirrequests for active control and the predefined priority pattern.

Allocation of active operator location.

6.2. OperatorSelect Module

Operator control is implemented in the OperatorSelect control module.

The purpose of the operator select control module is to enable one of sixpossible operator locations for the excitation system. Only one operatorlocation may be active at one time. In addition, each operator location hasits pre-defined priority level. An operator location with higher priority canalways take over control from an operator with lower priority.

Each operator can

request active control from OperatorSelect

release control in order to allow takeover by another operator withlower priority.

The active operator can parameterize and operate the excitation system.

A default operator selection allows the definition of the operator which isactive after power-up. In addition, the default operator will become theactive operator if any active operator releases control.

The main tasks of the OperatorSelect module are:

to manage the different operator locations and to assign activecontrol to one location, depending on the incoming requests and onvalid preconditions (see Figure 6-2 )

to handle the inputs and outputs from/to the active operator location,i.e. to process the commands and to pass them over to the othermodules in the excitation system (e.g. StateMachine Module)

to update the inactive operator locations with the current systemstatus by mapping the active status data to the correspondingoperator variables (e.g. for display)

to coordinate the parameter follow-up between the control channels.



ABB



6.3. Operator Locations

The excitation system can be controlled by one of the following six

operator locations (operator states):The service operator (Status 1) is an internal operator via Control Builder.The excitation system is parameterized and operated with the controlmodule graphic in Control Builder. The service operator has the highestpriority of all operators.

At controller power-up, the service operator is always active for 500 ms toinitialize the operators.

The local operator (Status 2) is an ECT (Excitation Control Terminal). Thelocal operator has the second highest priority. The local ECT is mounted

directly on the front door of the excitation system control cabinet.

The remote operator (Status 3) acts via the analog and digitalinputs/outputs of the excitation system. This operator has 3rd highestpriority. The remote operator is used by the superimposed plant control tooperate the excitation system via hardware I/Os.

The fieldbus master operator (Status 4) acts via the Anybus-S I/Ointerface and a specific fieldbus protocol. The fieldbus operator has 4th highest priority. The fieldbus master operator is used by the

superimposed plant control to operate the excitation system via a secondor master fieldbus.

The fieldbus operator (Status 5) acts via the Anybus-S I/O interface and aspecific fieldbus protocol. The fieldbus operator has 5th highest priority.The fieldbus operator is used by the superimposed plant control tooperate the excitation system via fieldbus.

The remote CT operator (Status 6) can consist of up to 4 different CTs(Control Terminals). It has the lowest priority of all operators. The remote

CTs can be located in the control room of a power plant or elsewhere.

Service

Local

Remote

Fieldbus Master

Fieldbus

Remote CT



ABB

UNITROL®


6.4. Operator Select Sequences

Figure 6-1 illustrates the overall operator state control logic:

In the upper area of Figure 6-1 each operator state is represented with anenclosing step according to the GRAFCET notation. The boxes includethe operator status numbers according to Section 6.3 Operator Locations (OperatorStatus.ControlStatus).

Example:

If no operator request is pending, one of these steps is active, dependingon the current value of the OperatorStatus.ControlStatus parameter whichdefines the active operator location. This active step contains 3 enclosed

steps that are responsible for operator parameter mapping, enabling theactive external reference and the operator release command logic, asillustrated in Figure 6-4 for the local operator location.

The logic for the other operator locations is equivalent and therefore notshown in detail here.

Status Service contains a 4th enclosed step: if the control system isenergized, i.e. at initial start-up (top of Figure 6-1), the service operator isset as active operator. After a short delay, the service operator isreleased and control is passed over to the default operator (see top ofFigure 6-3).

If an operator request is set, it must first be verified that a switchover ispermissible. Therefore a logic checks the validity of switchover requests(see central area of Figure 6-1 ). Depending on the current activeoperator, switchover to another operator location can roughly take place ifone of the following conditions is met:

If an operator with a higher priority than the active one sets a request,it will become active operator.

If the active operator is released and no request is pending, thedefault operator will be set as the active one.

An operator with lower priority can only take over active control, if the

currently active operator has been released.The criteria for a valid request are rather complex and therefore shown ina separate diagram. Figure 6-2 shows the example for a local request.The logic for the other operator locations is equivalent and therefore notshown in detail here.

Once a request is valid, the active operator location can be switched. Thisis achieved with the corresponding step in the lower area of Figure 6-1and the corresponding operator status will be established.

Based on the new active operator location, the operator parameterhandling shown on top of Figure 6-1 will start again.



ABB



Figure 6-1 Operator Select: Overview



ABB

UNITROL®


C

g

or

OperatorStatus.ControlStatus<>2 (local operator is not already active operator)

Local_Status.OperatorCommand.ReleaseOperator (channel not blocked by external HW input)

and

Cmd.ChannelActive (this is the active control channel)

or

not Cmd.ChannelActive (this is not the active control channel)

IO.In.OtherChannelControlStatus=2 (but local is active operator in other channel)

Local_Status.OperatorCommand.RequestControl (request for local operator)

not Local_Status.OperatorCommand.ReleaseControl (local is not released)

OperatorStatus.ControlStatus>2 (local is not active and has higher priority than active operator)

or OperatorStatus.ControlReleased (active operator has released)

Par.In.DefaultCommandInput=2 (local operator is default operator)

OperatorStatus.ControlReleased (active operator has released)

and

" " stands for "and"

Preconditions for a status change

are checked

This oprerator can only become

active if:

The operator request is set, the

release command is not set and

this operator is not yet active

No other operator with higher

priority is active

No other operator request is set

The operator has not been

released before

The current channel must be

active or the same operator has

been activated in the other

channel.

Valid Request for Local

Figure 6-2 Operator Select Logic: Request Local

(Transition g according to Figure 6-1)

The operator select logic conditions for Service, Remote, Fieldbus

Master, Fieldbus and Remote_CT selections are analogous.



ABB



Figure 6-3 Operator Status: Service

(Enclosed steps in State "1 Status Service" according to Figure 6-1)



ABB

UNITROL®


Figure 6-4 Operator Status: Local

(Enclosed steps in State "2 Status Local" according to Figure 6-1)

The operator status logic conditions for Remote, Fieldbus Master,Fieldbus and Remote_CT selections are analogous.



ABB



Appendix A - Drawings

The following drawings are included:

Channel Overview

Channel State Machine

Manual - Auto State Machine

Channel selection (shown for channel 1, channel 2 is analogous)

SYSTEM ON

SYSTEM CONFIGURED

" " stands for "and"

If not

or

Channel 2 Switching configured

Channel 2 active

Backup Channel Switching configured

Backup Channel active

If

or

Channel 2 Switching configured

Channel 2 active

Backup Channel Switching configured

Backup Channel active

COLD START WARM START

Set "ExcSysOn" = 1

(Configuration sequence completed)

Figure A- 1 Channel Overview



ABB

UNITROL®


Figure A- 2 Channel State Machine



ABB



Figure A- 3 Auto-Manual State Machine



ABB

UNITROL® 6800 Signal and Parameter List

Document No.: 3BHS258025 E07

Revision Status Rev.-

Date 11/2010

Software Release v3.0.00



ABB

2 3BHS258025 E07 UNITROL 6800 Signal and Parameter List

Display parameters / signals on the ECT (Excitation Control Terminal):

Touch Parameters

• Parameter toolbar top line after touching Parameters the first time

The parameters/signals are live data from a

Channel (Control), source CH1.Remark: The table lines are white – grey

Open snapshot

Create snapshot: UPLOAD

Display parameters / signals on the CCP (Converter Control Panel):

Main Display Main Menu Submenu

LOC 180.1

AVR

2 0 0 . 0 V S y n

1 0 . 0 0 A E x c

1 0 0 . 0 V E x c

SETPT 12:45ME

NULOC 1

MAIN MENU----------

1

P A R A M E T E R S

E V E N T L O G G E R

C L O C K S E T

EXIT 12:45 ENTER LOC 1 PAR GROUPS ------99

9 9 O p _ C m d

100 SystemParameter

01 Reg_Regulator_In

02 Reg_AVR

03 Reg_SCLim_In

EXIT SEL



ABBSignals and Parameters

Name Qualified Name Descript ion U

3 3BHS258025 E07 UNITROL

FastCommMonRamp FastCommMonRamp Fast ramp-up signal for CT communication Monitoring.This signal isincremented by the ECT every 0.1 second.

INT

BreakerConfigWord In.Brk_Breaker Breaker/Isolator coordination configuration word.defines number and types (AC/DC) of used breakers;

FCB = FieldCircuitBreaker,FI = FieldInterruptor

-0 NoBreaker:This value is set for an excitation system without any breakers.

-1 FCB1DC, FI1DC:Defines a breaker control with 1 DC field breaker and 1 optional DC

isolator.If the DC isolator is used it must be configured in the

BreakerGroup1.-2 FCB1AC, FI1DC:

Defines a breaker control with 1 AC field breaker and 1 optional DCisolator.

If the DC isolator is used it must be configured in theBreakerGroup1.

-3 FCB1AC, FCB3DC:Defines a breaker control with 1 AC field breaker with optional isolator,which must be configured in the BreakerGroup1 module, and 1DC field

breakerwith optional isolator, which must be configured in the BreakerGroup3

module.Important:Both field breaker (AC and DC) sides must be configured.The breakers shall not be configured as only isolators. No

breaker/isolatorinterlock is implemented.For only isolator on AC or DC side use configuration1 or 2.

-4. FCB1DC, FCB2DC:Defines a breaker control with 2 DC field breakers with optional isolators

whichmust be seperately configured in the BreakerGroup1 and

BreakerGroup2 modules.This configuration provides a changeover functionality between the two

DCbreakers.For more details see BreakerSwitchOver module.The breaker group configuration words of breaker group 1 and 2 shall

not be setto 4 for this breaker configuration.

-5. FCB1AC, FCB2AC, FI3DC:Defines a breaker control with two AC field breakers with an optional

isolator onthe DC side. The DC side isolator is defined by the breaker inter group

INT






configuration word (BreakerIsolatorConfig).Three modes are available:

FBonly means the DC isolator is not used, FBFIauto meansthe isolatoris used automatically with the field breakers,

FBFImanual means that the isolator is used and operated with theprovided

manual operator open/close commands.If the breaker group 3 is used then it has to be adjusted to breaker

group config4 (FIonly).Breaker group 1 and 2 must be configured as 1 (FBonly).This configuration provides a changeover functionality between the two

DCbreakers.

-6. FI1AC, FI2AC, FB3DC:Defines a breaker control with two AC isolators and a field breaker on

the DCside.Isolator 1 or 2 is preselected by breaker command. The DC field breaker

can

operate in manual or automatic mode together with the preselcted ACisolator:

FBFIauto means the isolator is used automatically with the fieldbreakers,

FBFImanual means that the isolator is used and operated with theprovided

manual operator open/close commands.No changeover functionality for this configuration.Breaker inter group configuration 2 or 3 can be selected for this

configuration!

-100 has to be used if software is operating the SMTS-RT breaker

BreakerIsolatorConfig In.Brk_Breaker Breaker/Isolator coordination configuration word.FCB = FieldCircuitBreaker,FI = FieldInterruptor

Only relevant if breaker configuration word is set eitherto 5

1 = FCB only,

2 = FCB, FI operated automatically,3 = FCB, FI operated manually,5 = FCB, FI closed automatically, opened manually

or 62=FCB, FI operated automatically,3=FCB, FI operated manually,

5 = FCB, FI closed automatically, opened manually

INT






ManualOpenIsolator In.Brk_BreakerGroup2 "Manual "open isolator" command.active Only if Breaker configuration word (BreakerGroupConfig) is set to 3 or

4"

boo

ReclosingDelayTime In.Brk_BreakerGroup2 "Breaker reclosing delay time.Defines the minimum time between FCB closing operations."

s

BreakerGroupConfig In.Brk_BreakerGroup3 "configuration word for Breaker group 3.FCB = FieldCircuitBreaker,FI = FieldInterruptor

1 = Fieldbreaker (FCB) only,2 = FCB, FI operated automatically,3 = FCB, FI operated manually,4 = Only the isolator is installed,5 = FCB, FI closed automatically, opened manually.

INT

ManualCloseIsolator In.Brk_BreakerGroup3 "Manual "open isolator" command.active Only if Breaker configuration word (BreakerGroupConfig) is set to 3 or

4"

boo

ManualOpenIsolator In.Brk_BreakerGroup3 "Manual "open isolator" command.

active Only if Breaker configuration word (BreakerGroupConfig) is set to 3 or4"

boo

ReclosingDelayTime In.Brk_BreakerGroup3 "Breaker reclosing delay time.Defines the minimum time between FCB closing operations."

s

InterlockTime In.Brk_BreakerSwitchOver "Breaker switchover interlock time.Both breakers on AC side

During the switchover transient (changeover from closed breaker 1 toclosed breaker 2

and vice versa) both breakers must be open for a minimum time (soft-interlock).Both breakers on DC side

During the changeover transient both breakers must be closed during aminimum time"

s

SwitchOverBr1ToBr2 In.Brk_BreakerSwitchOver Switchover command breaker 1 to 2 p.u

SwitchOverBr2ToBr1 In.Brk_BreakerSwitchOver Switchover command breaker 2 to 1 p.u

CurrentFaultDetectionLevel In.Brk_Crowbar "Current level to detect a crowbar fault.When the field current (SFS_Meas_IfRel) is above this level and the breakeris turned off,the crowbar has to conduct.If not, the crowbar event "CrowbarFlt ( 21111 )" is set."

p.u.

EnableCrowbarSupervision In.Brk_Crowbar Enable the Crowbar fault supervision boo






Fan1ForceHourCounterDays In.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Fan 1 forces the hour counter to the specified day day


Fan2Preselected In.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Preselect Fan 2 boo

FanChangeOver In.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Fan change over command boo

FanCheck In.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Fan check command boo

FanRunOffTime In.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Fan OffDelay. Time between the FAN OFF command and the actual drop ofthe supply voltage.

s

FanRunUpTime In.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Fan OnDelay. Time between the FAN ON command and the actual activationof the supply voltage.

s

ForceFan1HourCounter In.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Force fan1 hour counter to requested value boo


Manual In.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Enables manual fan operation boo

Supply2Preselected In.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Preselect Supply 2 boo

SupplyChangeOver In.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Supply change over command boo

TurnOnFan1 In.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Turns On command for Fan in manual mode boo




Fan2Preselected In.Conv_ConverterFanControl2 Preselect fan 2 boo

FanChangeOver In.Conv_ConverterFanControl2 Fan changeover command boo






15 3BHS258025 E07 U


s


s

ForceFan1HourCounter In.Conv_ConverterFanControl2 Fan 1 forces the hour counter to the specified day boo




SupplyChangeOver In.Conv_ConverterFanControl2 Supply changeover command boo

TurnOnFan1 In.Conv_ConverterFanControl2 Turn On command for Fan in manual mode boo








s


s













Fan1ForceHourCounterDays In.Conv_ConverterFanControl4 Force fan1 hour counter to requested value day

Fan2ForceHourCounterDays In.Conv_ConverterFanControl4 Force fan2 hour counter to requested value day





s


s













17 3BHS258025 E07 U






s


s














s







s














s


s









19 3BHS258025 E07 U









FanRunOffTime In.Conv_ConverterFanControl8 Fan OffDelay. Time between the FAN OFF command and the actual drop of

the supply voltage.

s


s

ForceFan1HourCounter In.Conv_ConverterFanControl8 Force fan1 hour counter to force value boo

ForceFan2HourCounter In.Conv_ConverterFanControl8 Force fan2 hour counter to force value boo

Manual In.Conv_ConverterFanControl8 Enable manual fan operation boo





IsAlarmWord In.Conv_ConverterFaultConfig1 Converter Protection. Assign Converter Faults 1 to Alarm bitw

IsRedundancyFaultWord In.Conv_ConverterFaultConfig1 Converter Protection. Assign Converter Faults 1 to Redundancy Fault bitw






IsTripWord In.Conv_ConverterNegCurFaultConfig3 Negative Converter Protection. Assign Converter Faults 3 to Converter Trip(Block Converter)

bitw

AirTemp1AlarmLevel In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Air temp1 Alarm detection level; Alarm detection level of the Converter air inlet temperature supervision.The Fault level is reached 10K above this setting.

MVA

AirTemp2AlarmLevel In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Air temp2 Alarm detection level; Alarm detection level of the Converter air inlet temperature supervision.The Fault level is reached 10K above this setting.

MVA

CECAlphaLim In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 "Current equalization angle limitationMax allowed correction in degree for the Current Equalizing Control (CEC)"

° el

CECModeSel In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 "Current equalization.True : The mean current over all thyristors (the same reference for eachthyristor)False: The mean current over all branch thyristors is used as setpoint. (eachbranch has ist own setpoint for Current Equalizing Control (CEC))"

boo

CECTi In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Current equalization regulator time constant s

ConverterNegCurrConfigWord In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 "Negative converter module configuration word.

0 = not configured,4 = Converter 8 is configured as negative-current converter UNL113005 = Converter 8 is configured as negative-current converter UNL123006 = Converter 8 is configured as negative-current converter UNL133007 = Converter 8 is configured as negative-current converter UNL143008 = Converter 8 is configured as negative-current converter D59 = Converter 8 is configured as negative-current converter Generic110 = Converter 8 is configured as negative-current converter Generic211 = Converter 8 is configured as negative-current converter Generic312 = Converter 8 is configured as negative-current converter Generic4

Value 4-12 is cross checked. DI 12 has to be logic 1"

INT

ConverterSystemConfigWord In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 "Converter system configuration word.0 = not configured,1 = Single converter2 = Twin converters

≥3 = n-1 configuration Value = number of converters"

INT





27 3BHS258025 E07 U

ConverterTempMeasConfigWord In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Configuration word for converter temperature measurement

Bit 0 Thyristor Case R+Bit 1 Thyristor Case T-Bit 2 Thyristor Case S+Bit 3 Thyristor Case R-Bit 4 Thyristor Case T+Bit 5 Thyristor Case S-

Bit 6 Inlet temperatureBit 7 Outlet temperature

bitw

ConverterTypeConfigWord In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 "Converter type configuration word.0 = not configured,4 = Converter UNL11300,5 = Converter UNL12300,6 = Converter UNL13300,7 = Converter UNL14300,8 = Converter D5,

9 = Converter Generic1,10 = Converter Generic2,11 = Converter Generic3,12 = Converter Generic4"

INT

ConvSnubSwiFaultOnDelayTime In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Converter snubber switch fault detection OnDelay s

CoolingSupplyTypeConfigWord In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 "Cooling supply type configuration word.0 = not configured,1 = single fan supply,2 = redundant fan supply"

INT

CoolingTypeConfigWord In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 "Cooling type configuration word.0 = not configured,1 = natural cooling,2 = forced cooling,3 = forced redundant cooling,

7 = water cooling,8 = redundant water cooling"

INT

EnableAdvancedFuseBlow In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 System Configuration. Release Advanced Fuse blow in case of Twinconfiguration (ITIND cold standby solution see doc. 3ATA029832K001)

boo

EnableCEC In.Conv_ConverterSystem1 "This signal releases the "Current Equalization"before enabling this function, check if the two parameters Ek and SN Trafo isset correctly"

boo






2067 Hz"

AnaInTemp2_Type In.Meas_CIO1 "CIO 1 Temperature sensor type analog input 2.TRUE: PT100FALSE: PTC"

boo

AnaInTemp3_Filter_Freq In.Meas_CIO1 "CIO 1 Temperature input 3 first order lowpass cutoff frequency valueThe 3 db point of the cutoff frequency is between the two limits 0.063 and2067 Hz"

Hz


boo

EnableFreeze In.Meas_CIO1 "CIO 1 Freeze outputsTRUE = FreezeFALSE = Reset

Enable freeze is used to enable the freeze functionality of the CIO software .If the function is enabled, the CIO keeps its outputs (analog/digital outputs) incase of CIO any link fault in the "old" position as they were before. If thefunction is not enabled, the output goes to zero."

boo

EnableRebootCmd In.Meas_CIO1 Enables CIO 1 Reboot Command booEnableTestMode In.Meas_CIO1 Enable the CIO Analog and Digital Output Test Mode

The CIO Test Mode applies a sawtooth at all three analogue outputs of theCIO from -10V to 10V with a frequency of 0.162Hz. Each digital output of theCIO will be forcedto true and back to false for 5s in the Test Mode. This Test Mode can only beactivated in the AuxReady State of the StateMachine.

boo

EnaTempSens1FaultDetection In.Meas_CIO1 "CIO 1 Enables temperature input 1 fault detectionPT100

- Sensor circuit open >216°C- Sensor circuit shorted < -44°C

PTC- < 20 Ohm -> Sensor Fault"

boo




boo






2067 Hz"


boo


Enable freeze is used to enable the freeze functionality of the CIO software .If the function is enabled, the CIO keeps its outputs (analog/digital outputs) incase of CIO any link fault in the "old" position as they were before."

boo

EnableRebootCmd In.Meas_CIO2 Enables CIO 2 Reboot Command boo

EnableTestMode In.Meas_CIO2 Enable the CIO Analog and Digital Output Test ModeThe CIO Test Mode applies a sawtooth at all three analogue outputs of theCIO from -10V to 10V with a frequency of 0.162Hz. Each digital output of theCIO will be forcedto true and back to false for 5s in the Test Mode. This Test Mode can only beactivated in the AuxReady State of the StateMachine.

boo




boo




boo


- Sensor circuit open >216°C

- Sensor circuit shorted < -44°CPTC- < 20 Ohm -> Sensor Fault"

boo

ForceTrip In.Meas_CIO2 "Force CIO 2 TripForces CIO Trip can be used to check the system behavior, if the IO fails"

boo

RebootDevice In.Meas_CIO2 "Reboot CIO 2This command is released only if the respective parameter"EnableRebootCmd" is True"

boo






EnableRebootCmd In.Meas_CIO3 Enables CIO 3 Reboot Command boo


boo




boo




boo




boo

ForceTrip In.Meas_CIO3 "Force CIO 3 TripForces CIO Trip can be used to check the system behavior, if theinput/output (IO) fails"

boo

RebootDevice In.Meas_CIO3 "Reboots CIO 3This command is released only if the respective parameter"EnableRebootCmd" is True"

boo

ResetFaults In.Meas_CIO3 "Resets CIO 3 faultsResets all Alarms & Faults stored in CIO 3.Note: There is no Event written into fault logger"

boo

IsAlarmWord In.Meas_CIO3Faults "Assigns CIO 3 Events to AlarmThis parameter should not be changed"

bitw

IsRedundancyFaultWord In.Meas_CIO3Faults "Assigns CIO 3 Events to RedundancyFaultThis parameter should not be changed"

bitw

IsTripWord In.Meas_CIO3Faults "Assigns CIO 3 Events to CIO TripThis parameter should not be changed"

bitw

AnaIn1_Filter_Freq In.Meas_CIO4 "CIO 4 Analog input 1 first order lowpass cutoff frequency valueThe 3 db point of the cutoff frequency is between the two limits 0.063 and

Hz







- Sensor circuit open >216°C- Sensor circuit shorted < -44°CPTC- < 20 Ohm -> Sensor Fault"

boo




boo


boo

RebootDevice In.Meas_CIO4 "Reboot CIO 4This command is released only if the respective parameter"EnableRebootCmd" is True"

boo

ResetFaults In.Meas_CIO4 "Reset CIO 4 faultsResets all Alarms & Faults stored in CIO 4.Note: There is no Event written into fault logger"

boo

IsAlarmWord In.Meas_CIO4Faults "Assigns CIO 4 Events to AlarmThis parameter should not be changed"

bitw

IsRedundancyFaultWord In.Meas_CIO4Faults "Assigns CIO 4 Events to RedundancyFaultThis parameter should not be changed"

bitw

IsTripWord In.Meas_CIO4Faults "Assigns CIO 4 Events to CIO TripThis parameter should not be changed"

bitw

AnaIn1_Filter_Freq In.Meas_CIO5 "CIO 5 Analog input 1 first order lowpass cutoff frequency valueThe 3 db point of the cutoff frequency is between the two limits 0.063 and2067 Hz"

Hz


Hz


Hz


Hz


boo





37 3BHS258025 E07 U

AnaInTemp2_Filter_Freq In.Meas_CIO5 "CIO 5 Temperature input 2 first order lowpass cutoff frequency valueThe 3 db point of the cutoff frequency is between the two limits 0.063 and

2067 Hz"

Hz


boo


Hz


boo


Enable freeze is used to enable the freeze functionality of the CIO software .If the function is enabled, the CIO keep its outputs (analog/digital outputs) incase of CIO any link fault in the "old" position as they were before. If thefunction is not enabled, the outputs go to zero."

boo

EnableRebootCmd In.Meas_CIO5 Enable CIO 5 Reboot Command boo


boo

EnaTempSens1FaultDetection In.Meas_CIO5 "CIO 5 Enable temperature input 1 fault detectionPT100



boo


- Sensor circuit open >216°C

- Sensor circuit shorted < -44°CPTC- < 20 Ohm -> Sensor Fault"

boo








boo


boo

RebootDevice In.Meas_CIO5 Enable CIO 5 Reboot Command boo

ResetFaults In.Meas_CIO5 "Reset CIO 5 faultsReset all Alarms & Faults, stored in CIO 5.Note:There is no Event written into fault logger"

boo

IsAlarmWord In.Meas_CIO5Faults "Assign CIO 5 Events to AlarmThis parameter should not be changed"

bitw

IsRedundancyFaultWord In.Meas_CIO5Faults "Assign CIO 5 Events to RedundancyFaultThis parameter should not be changed"

bitw

IsTripWord In.Meas_CIO5Faults "Assign CIO 5 Events to CIO Trip bitw


Hz


Hz

AnaIn3_Filter_Freq In.Meas_CIO6 v Hz


Hz


boo


Hz


boo


Hz





39 3BHS258025 E07 U

AnaInTemp3_Type In.Meas_CIO6 "CIO 6 Temperature sensor type analog input 3.TRUE: PT100

FALSE: PTC"

boo


Enable freeze is used to enable the freeze functionality of the CIO software .If the function is enabled, the CIO keeps its outputs (analog/digital outputs) incase of CIO any link fault in the "old" position as they were before. If thefunction is not enabled, the outputs go to zero."

boo



boo




boo




boo




boo


boo

RebootDevice In.Meas_CIO6 "Reboot CIO 6This command is released only, if the respective parameter"EnableRebootCmd" is True"

boo





41 3BHS258025 E07 U



boo




boo




boo




boo


boo


boo

ResetFaults In.Meas_CIO7 "Reset CIO 7 faultsReset all Alarms & Faults, stored in CIO 7.Note: There is no Event written into fault logger"

boo


bitw


bitw

IsTripWord In.Meas_CIO7Faults "Assign CIO 7 Events to CIO TripThis parameter should not be changed"

bitw


Hz





43 3BHS258025 E07 U



boo




boo


boo


boo

ResetFaults In.Meas_CIO8 "Reset CIO 8 faultsReset all Alarms & Faults, stored in CIO 8.Note: There is no Event written into fault logger"

boo


bitw


bitw

IsTripWord In.Meas_CIO8Faults "Assign CIO 8 Events to CIO TripThis parameter should not be changed"

bitw

CIOConfigWord In.Meas_CIOConfig Input/ Output configuration word. If a Bit is True, the respective Input/outputdevice CIO is configured

Bit 0 = CIO 11 = CIO 2. . . .

7 = CIO 88 = CIO 1 is redundant9 = CIO 2 is redundant

. . . .14 = CIO 7 is redundant15 = CIO 8 is redundant

Boot parameter, value can only be changed in the Configuration sequence

bitw

EnableRebootCmd In.Meas_CIOConfig Releases Reboot all CIO Command boo





47 3BHS258025 E07 U

SelCIO3AnaOut1Signal In.Meas_TransientRecorder TestSignalSelector. Select signal for CIO 3 Analog Output 1:

0 = Value from CIT (standard);else= SOAP Id of desired signal

INT



INT



INT


0=Value from CIT (standard);

else any Simulink GlobalId of the desired signal

INT

SelCIO4AnaOut2Signal In.Meas_TransientRecorder "TestSignalSelector. Select signal for CIO 4 Analog Output 2:

0 = Value from CIT (standard);else= SOAP Id of desired signal"

INT

SelCIO4AnaOut3Signal In.Meas_TransientRecorder "TestSignalSelector. Select signal for CIO 4 Analog Output 3:

0 = Value from CIT (standard);else= SOAP Id of desired signal"

INT

SelectCIDataDevice In.Meas_TransientRecorder "Commissioning interface data select.

0: CCM, 1-3: NC,4: CIO1&2, 5: CIO3&4, 6: CIO5&6, 7: CIO7&8,8: CCI1, 9: CCI2, 10: CCI3, 11: CCI4,

12: CCI5, 13: CCI6, 14: CCI7, 15: CCI8"

INT

SelectUpperData In.Meas_TransientRecorder Commissioning interface data select. If selected, link signals AO09 …AO16are transferred to the CI-Board, else AO01 …AO08

boo






SelTestSigIn1 In.Meas_TransientRecorder TestSignalSelector. Select signal for input Test Signal 1 CIO3 Analogue Input1:

0=CIT [Recommended scaling factor];1=AVR Summingpoint additive input [5V/p.u.];2=MAN Summingpoint additive input [5V/p.u.];3=Uc additive input [1V/p.u.];4=PSS2B Pe exclusive input [10V/p.u.];5=White Noise additive to AVR Summing point;6=CIT

INT

SelTestSigIn2 In.Meas_TransientRecorder TestSignalSelector. Select signal for input Test Signal 2 CIO3 Analogue Input2:

0:CIT;1=fEp[10V/p.u.];2=If exclusive input [2V/p.u];3=CIT

INT

SupervisionPMax In.Meas_TransientRecorder Signal Selector. Supervision Parameter to cancel signal injection p.u.

SupervisionPMin In.Meas_TransientRecorder Signal Selector. Supervision Parameter to cancel signal injection p.u.

SupervisionQMax In.Meas_TransientRecorder Signal Selector. Supervision Parameter to cancel signal injection p.u.

SupervisionQMin In.Meas_TransientRecorder Signal Selector. Supervision Parameter to cancel signal injection p.u.

SupervisionUgMax In.Meas_TransientRecorder Signal Selector. Supervision Parameter to cancel signal injection p.u.

SupervisionUgMin In.Meas_TransientRecorder Signal Selector. Supervision Parameter to cancel signal injection p.u.

TestSigIn1ScaleFactor In.Meas_TransientRecorder Signal Selector. Scaling factor for CIO3 AI1 signal p.u.

TestSigIn2ScaleFactor In.Meas_TransientRecorder Signal Selector. Scaling factor for CIO3 AI2 signal p.u.

TestSigInLimit In.Meas_TransientRecorder Signal Selector. Limitation for both Test signal inputs p.u.

TrigAll In.Meas_TransientRecorder Transient Recorder Trigger for all Transient Recorders (AC800PEC, CCM,CCI)

boo

WhiteNoiseLowFreqGain In.Meas_TransientRecorder Low frequency gain for white noise injection p.u.

CommFaultTime In.OpSel_Fieldbus Fieldbus Communication monitoring timeout time [s] s





51 3BHS258025 E07 U

ExtSCReleaseFaultClearing In.Prot_ConvFaultDetect External Short-Circuit Monitor. Release 200ms Pulse Block Function for Faultclearing

boo

ExtSCUfClearingFaultLevel In.Prot_ConvFaultDetect External Short-Circuit Monitor. DC Short Circuit FieldVoltage Clearing Level p.u

ExtSCUfFaultLevel In.Prot_ConvFaultDetect External Short-Circuit Monitor. DC Short Circuit Fieldvoltage Level p.u

FWDthreshold In.Prot_ConvFaultDetect Free Wheeling Detection threshold [pu Ifn] p.u.

IntSCReleaseFaultClearing In.Prot_ConvFaultDetect Internal Short-Circuit Monitor. Release 200 ms AlphaMin in case of internalFault for clearing

boo

TFCDthreshold In.Prot_ConvFaultDetect Thyristor Fault Current Detection threshold [pu Ifn] p.u.

TFFDnumOfPeriods In.Prot_ConvFaultDetect Thyristor Fuse Fault Detection number of periods INT

TFFDthreshold In.Prot_ConvFaultDetect Thyristor Fuse Fault Detection threshold [pu Ifn] p.u.

TOCDthreshold In.Prot_ConvFaultDetect Thyristor Over Current Detection threshold [pu Ifn] p.u.

Level1ResponseValue In.Prot_EarthFaultMon Response level 1 for earth fault detection [kOhm] kΩ

Level2ResponseValue In.Prot_EarthFaultMon Response level 2 for earth fault detection [kOhm] kΩ

SelectCIO In.Prot_EarthFaultMon "Select CIO Device to connect the earth fault monitoring device.FALSE = CIO1, (standard application)TRUE = CIO3 "

boo

SelectIRDH275 In.Prot_EarthFaultMon "Select earth fault monitoring device type.FALSE = UNS3020,TRUE = IRDH275"

boo

EnaTemp1 In.Prot_ExcTrafoMon Enables PT100 input 1 boo



EnaTripWithoutAlarmDet In.Prot_ExcTrafoMon "Enables Trip without Alarm detection.

TRUE: Trip will not be released if no alarm appeared before (sensormonitoring)"

boo

ResetFaults In.Prot_ExcTrafoMon Reset the module faults boo

SensorType In.Prot_ExcTrafoMon "Measurement sensor type1 = PT100,2 = PTC,3 = binary inputs"

INT

TempFaultLevel1 In.Prot_ExcTrafoMon Excitation transformer temperature fault level 1. Refer to isolation class °C






TempFaultLevel2 In.Prot_ExcTrafoMon Excitation transformer temperature fault level 2. Refer to isolation class °C

Ifinst In.Prot_OverCurrentMon "Excitation overcurrent monitor. Instantaneous threshold,Ensure selectivity to corresponding limiter value MaxFieldCurrent"

p.u.

Ifskal In.Prot_OverCurrentMon Excitation overcurrent monitor. If scale factor --

Ifstart In.Prot_OverCurrentMon Excitation overcurrent monitor. Inverse-time start threshold p.u.

InstDelay In.Prot_OverCurrentMon "Excitation overcurrent monitor. Instantaneous delayInstDelay shall be set to TWIN converter = 6 Tsyn (default)SINGLE converter = 4 TsynTsyn = 1/6 * 1/fsyn"

s

ResetPeak In.Prot_OverCurrentMon Excitation overcurrent monitor. Resets stored field current peak value boo

SelCurve In.Prot_OverCurrentMon "Excitation overcurrent monitor - select curve0: fix delay,1: normal inverse, t[s]=k*0,14/(I/Itherm)exp0,02-12: very inverse, t[s]=k*13,5/(I/Itherm) -1

3: extremely inverse, t[s]=k*80/(I/Itherm)exp2 -1"

INT

ThermalDownTime In.Prot_OverCurrentMon Excitation overcurrent monitor. Inverse-time back-integration time s

TimeMaxFieldCurrent In.Prot_OverCurrentMon Excitation overcurrent monitor. Time max field current

For this time the maximum field current from the max field current limitersettings is allowed. With this time the k-factor of the according inverse timecurve will be calculated.

Extermly inverse (3):k=((((MaxFieldCurrent/Ifstart)^2)-1)*TimeMaxFieldCurrent)/80;Very inverse (2):k=(((MaxFieldCurrent/Ifstart)-1)*TimeMaxFieldCurrent)/13.5;Normal inverse (1):k=((((MaxFieldCurrent/Ifstart)^0.02)-1)*TimeMaxFieldCurrent)/0.14;

Make sure that this time is higher than in the limiter and the same inverse

time curve is selected.When inverse time curve 0 (fix time) is selected, this time will be used as thefix time.

s

FaultOnDelayTime In.Prot_OverVoltageMon On-delay time for overvoltage fault detection s

OVDetectionLevel In.Prot_OverVoltageMon Overvoltage detection level p.u.






CTEnaParaPhaseMon In.Prot_Protection "Setting required if "EnableMaschineMeasCTMon" =TRUEIf TRUE, Machine CT Paraphase Monitor is enabled

Must be set TRUE in case of open delta connection (2 machine PT's servingall 3 CCM inputs) "

boo

CTEnaSumMon In.Prot_Protection "Setting required if "EnableMaschineMeasCTMon" =TRUEIf TRUE, Machine CT Sum Monitor is enabled:Responds if the Vector-Sum of all 3 CTphases is >0.1p.u. >5 msNot applicable in case 2 machine CT's feed all 3 CT inputs on CCM (opendelta connection)"

boo

EnableAutoResetOnExtTrip In.Prot_Protection "Enables Automatic Reset after ext. TripIf TRUE General Function released.Set related parameters in group "Prot_AutoResetOnExtTrip""

boo

EnableAuxSupervision In.Prot_Protection "Enables Auxiliary MonitoringIf TRUE the AuxReady and AuxNotReady DI's are enabledRef. to EVENT Matrix settings for related actions"

boo

EnableConvFaultDetection In.Prot_Protection "Enables Converter Monitoring (Includes Conduction Monitoring)Set related parameters in group "Prot_ConvFaultDetect":TFCDthresholdTOCDthreshold

TFFDthresholdFWDthresholdTFFDnumOfPeriods"

boo

EnableEarthFaultMon In.Prot_Protection "Enables Earth Fault MonitoringIf TRUE General Function released.Set related parameters in group "Prot_EarthFaultMon""

boo

EnableExcTrafoMon In.Prot_Protection "Enables transformer monitoringIf TRUE General Function released.Set related parameters in group "Prot_ExcTrafoMon""

boo

EnableExtSCMon In.Prot_Protection "Enables External Short-Circuit MonitoringIf TRUE and "EnableConvFaultDetection" in this group is TRUE also, thenGeneral Function released.Set related parameters in group "Prot_ConvFaultDetect":TFCDthresholdExtSCIfFaultLevelExtSCUfFaultLevelExtSCIfCl"

boo

EnableFireAllTripDet In.Prot_Protection Enable signal for the FireAllTrip detectionIf TRUE Function released.

boo

EnableGenSCdetection In.Prot_Protection Enable signal for the Generator short-circuit detectionIf TRUE Function released.

boo






EnableRotTempMon In.Prot_Protection "Enables Rotor Temperature MonitoringIf TRUE General Function released.

Set related parameters in group "Prot_RotTempMon""

boo

EnableS800Mon In.Prot_Protection "Enables S800 Link MonitoringTRUE in case of S800 I/O Extensions usedRef. to EVENT Matrix settings for related actions"

boo

EnableStallMon In.Prot_Protection "Enables Stall MonitoringIf TRUE General Function released.Set related parameters in group ""Prot_StallMon"""

EnableTripIndSupOnExtTrip In.Prot_Protection "Enables Trip Indication Suppression for ext. TripIf TRUE General Function released.Set related parameters in group "Prot_TripIndSupOnExtTrip""

boo

EnableUfMon In.Prot_Protection "Enables Field Voltage Sensing MonitoringIf TRUE General Function releasedSet related parameters below:UfEnaOpAmpCeilMonUfEnaADCFreezeMon"

boo

EnableUsynMon In.Prot_Protection "Enables Synchronous Voltage Monitoring (Converter Input Voltage)If TRUE General Function released.Set related parameters below:PTEnaInPhaseMonPTEnaOpAmpCeilMonPTEnaADCFreezeMonPTEnaAllLostMon"

boo

EnableVHzMon In.Prot_Protection "Enables V/Hz MonitoringIf TRUE General Function released.Set related parameters in group "Prot_VHzMon""

boo

EnaIfExcOnMon In.Prot_Protection "Enables signal for field current monitoring while ExcOn sequenceIf TRUE General Function released.Set related parameters in group "Prot_IfExcOnMon""

boo

EnaUgExcOnMon In.Prot_Protection "Enables signal for generator votage monitoring while ExcOn sequenceIf TRUE General Function released.

Set related parameters in group "Prot_UgExcOnMon""

boo

IconvEnaADCFreezeMon In.Prot_Protection "Setting required if "EnableIConvMon" =TRUEIf TRUE, Converter Current CT ADC Freeze Monitor is enabled:Responds if any of the 3 ADC output signals is stationary (freezed) for >2 s "

boo

IconvEnaOpAmpCeilMon In.Prot_Protection "Setting required if "EnableIConvMon" =TRUEIf TRUE, Converter Current CT Opamp Ceiling Monitor is enabled:Responds if any of the 3 ADC output signals is >95% of its limit for >20 ms"

boo






Enable In.Prot_PSU1APDGrp1 Enables the Advanced Power distributor 1 (APD ) fault detection boo

Enable In.Prot_PSU1APDGrp2 Enables the Advanced Power distributor 2 (APD ) fault detection boo

Enable In.Prot_PSU1ICU1 Enables the Input Coupling Unit (ICU1) source fault detection boo

SourcesConfigWord In.Prot_PSU1ICU1 "Input Coupling Unit (ICU1) sources config word. [bitwise]Bit1=Source1,Bit2=Source2,Bit3=Source3 , (Port for shunt-supply, in shunt-supply mode only supervisedif Synchronous voltage is above 0.9pu)"

bitw

Enable In.Prot_PSU1ICU2 "Enables the Input Coupling Unit (ICU2) source fault detection.(engineered solution, requires second CIO device)"

boo

SourcesConfigWord In.Prot_PSU1ICU2 "Input Coupling Unit (ICU2) sources config word. [bitwise]Bit1=Source1,Bit2=Source2,Bit3=Source3 , (Port for shunt-supply, in shunt-supply mode only supervisedif Synchronous voltage is above 0.9pu)"

bitw

Enable In.Prot_PSU2APDGrp1 Enable the APD fault detection boo

Enable In.Prot_PSU2APDGrp2 Enable the APD fault detection boo

Enable In.Prot_PSU2ICU1 Enable the "Input coupling Unit" ICU fault detection boo

SourcesConfigWord In.Prot_PSU2ICU1 "ICU1 sources config word. [bitwise]Bit1=Source1, Bit2=Source2,Bit3=Source3 (Port for shunt-supply, in shunt-supply mode only supervised ifSynchronous voltage is above 0.9pu)"

bitw

Enable In.Prot_PSU2ICU2 Enable the "Input coupling Unit" ICU fault detection boo

SourcesConfigWord In.Prot_PSU2ICU2 "ICU2 sources config word. [bitwise]Bit1=Source1, Bit2=Source2,Bit3=Source3 (Port for shunt-supply, in shunt-supply mode only supervised ifSynchronous voltage is above 0.9pu)"

bitw

BrushVDrop In.Prot_RotTempMon Voltage drop over the brushes V

CurDepVDrop In.Prot_RotTempMon Current dependent voltage drop V

IfTest In.Prot_RotTempMon Parameter for test field current If for simulation purposes. Used in testmodes 3 or 4.

A

R1 In.Prot_RotTempMon Rotor resistance at given temperature (T1) Ω

RotTempFaultLevel1 In.Prot_RotTempMon Rotor temperature fault level 1. Refer to isolation class °C





59 3BHS258025 E07 U

RotTempFaultLevel2 In.Prot_RotTempMon Rotor temperature fault level 2. Refer to isolation class °C

SelectMode In.Prot_RotTempMon "Select rotor temperature monitoring operation mode0 = disabled,1 = only RotTempFaultLevel1 is supervised and generates correspondingevent which is defined in the protection matrix (generates alarm only indefault configuration)2=RotTempFaultLevel1 and RotTempFaultLevel2 are supervised andgenerate corresponding events which are defined in the protection matrix(generates trip1 for reaching RotTempFaultLevel2 in default configuration)3=Testmode without events, the simulated test values (parameters) for Ufand If are used for calculations4=Testmode with events, the simulated test values (parameters) for Uf and Ifare used for calculations5=Testmode without events, measured system values are used forcalculations6=Testmode without events, the simulated test values (parameters) for Ufand If are used for calculations, can be activaed always"

INT

T0 In.Prot_RotTempMon Temperature for zero resistance of used rotor copper °C

T1 In.Prot_RotTempMon Rotor temperature at given resistance (R1) °C UfTest In.Prot_RotTempMon Parameter for test field voltage Uf for simulation purposes. Used in test

modes 3 or 4.V

MaxStartTime In.Prot_StallMon "Motor application.Protection stall monitoring.Time factor for max. allowed starting time.Time=MaxStartTime*ZeroSpeedStallTime"

Time00 In.Prot_StallMon "Motor application.Protection stall monitoring.Time factor until 0% speed. Time=Time00*ZeroSpeedStallTime"





ZeroSpeedStallTime In.Prot_StallMon "Motor application.Protection stall monitoring. Zero speed stall time"






IsAlarm In.Prot_SystemFaults1 System Protection. Assign System Faults 1 to Alarm bitw

IsAutoFault In.Prot_SystemFaults1 System Protection. Assign System Faults 1 to AutoFault bitw

IsBUChannelHWFault In.Prot_SystemFaults1 System Protection. Assign System Faults 1 to BUChannelHardwareFault bitw

IsChannelFault In.Prot_SystemFaults1 System Protection. Assign System Faults 1 to ChannelFault bitw

IsChanneltoBULinkLoss In.Prot_SystemFaults1 System Protection. Assign System Faults 1 to BUChannelLinkLoss bitw

IsEmergencyStop In.Prot_SystemFaults1 System Protection. Assign System Faults 1 to EmergencyStop bitw

IsManualFault In.Prot_SystemFaults1 System Protection. Assign System Faults 1 to ManualFault bitw

IsOtherChannelHWFault In.Prot_SystemFaults1 System Protection. Assign System Faults 1 to OtherChannelHardwareFault bitw

IsRedundancyFault In.Prot_SystemFaults1 System Protection. Assign System Faults 1 to RedundancyFault bitw

IsStartupInhibit In.Prot_SystemFaults1 System Protection. Assign System Faults 1 to Startupinhibit bitw

IsTrip1 In.Prot_SystemFaults1 System Protection. Assign System Faults 1 to Trip1 bitw













61 3BHS258025 E07 U
























63 3BHS258025 E07 U
























65 3BHS258025 E07 U


AutoResetAlarmGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Auto Reset Group Fault Alarm boo

AutoResetRedundancyFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Auto Reset Group Fault Redundancy Fault boo

AutoResetStartupInhibitGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Auto Reset Group Fault Startup Inhibit boo

ForceAlarmGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Alarm boo

ForceAutoFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Auto Fault boo

ForceBUChHWFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Backup Channel Hardware Fault boo

ForceChannelFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Channel Fault boo

ForceChtoBULinkLossGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Channel to Backup Link Loss boo

ForceEmergencyStopGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Emergency Stop boo

ForceManualFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Manual Fault boo

ForceOtherChHWFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Other Channel Hardware Fault boo

ForceRedundancyFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Redundancy Fault boo

ForceStartupInhibitGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Startup Inhibit boo

ForceTrip1GrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Trip1 boo

ForceTrip2GrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Force Group Fault Trip2 boo

ResetAll In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Reset all GroupFaults boo

ResetAutoFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Reset Group Fault Auto Fault boo

ResetBUChHWFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Reset Group Fault Backup Channel Hardware Fault boo






ResetChannelFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Reset Group Fault Channel Fault boo

ResetChtoBULinkLossGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Reset Group Fault Channel to Backup Link Loss boo

ResetEmergencyStopGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Reset Group Fault Emergency Stop boo

ResetManualFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Reset Group Fault Manual Fault boo

ResetOtherChHWFaultGrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Reset Group Fault Other Channel Hardware Fault boo

ResetTrip1GrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Reset Group Fault Trip1 boo

ResetTrip2GrpFault In.Prot_SystemGroupFaults Reset Group Fault Trip2 boo

DelayFuncSelect In.Prot_VHzMon "V/Hz Protection inverse-time s - select curve0: fix delay,1: normal inverse, t[s]=k*0,14/(I/Itherm)exp0,02-1

2: very inverse, t[s]=k*13,5/(I/Itherm) -13: extremely inverse, t[s]=k*80/(I/Itherm)exp2 -1"

INT

Gradient In.Prot_VHzMon V/Hz Protection Gradient (Ug/f) --

Tequivalent In.Prot_VHzMon V/Hz Protection. Equivalent time for k-factor calculation

For this time the voltage Uequivalent is allowed. With this time the k-factor ofthe according inverse time curve will be calculated.

Extremely inverse (3):k=((((Uequivalent/Vfn)^2)-1)*Tequivalent)/80;Very inverse (2):k=(((Uequivalent/Vfn)-1)*Tequivalent)/13.5;Normal inverse (1):k=((((Uequivalent/Vfn)^0.02)-1)*Tequivalent)/0.14;

Make sure that this time is higher than in the limiter and the same inversetime curve is selected.

When inverse time curve 0 (fix time) is selected, this time will be used as thefix time.

s

ThermalDownTime In.Prot_VHzMon V/Hz Protection inverse-time back-integration time s





67 3BHS258025 E07 U

Uequivalent In.Prot_VHzMon V/Hz Protection. Equivalent voltage for k-factor calculation

For the time Tequivalent this voltage is allowed. With this voltage the k-factorof the according inverse time curve will be calculated.

Extremely inverse (3):k=((((Uequivalent/Vfn)^2)-1)*Tequivalent)/80;Very inverse (2):k=(((Uequivalent/Vfn)-1)*Tequivalent)/13.5;Normal inverse (1):k=((((Uequivalent/Vfn)^0.02)-1)*Tequivalent)/0.14;

Make sure that this voltage is not lower than in the limiter and the sameinverse time curve is selected.When inverse time curve 0 (fix time) is selected, this voltage will be not used.

p.u.

Vfn In.Prot_VHzMon V/Hz Protection Voltage at nominal frequency p.u.

AdditionalInput In.Reg_AVR Regulator AVR. Summing-point spare input p.u.

GainReduction In.Reg_AVR Regulator AVR. Summing-point gain reduction factor p.u.

GainReductionPSSinactive In.Reg_AVR Regulator AVR. Summing-point gain reduction factor --

TestInput In.Reg_AVR Regulator AVR. Summing-point additional test input p.u.

EnableSetPtCorr In.Reg_AVR_PID Enables AVR Setpoint correction for less regulator deviation boo

GainReduction In.Reg_AVR_PID PID AVR Gain reduction --

ta In.Reg_AVR_PID PID AVR Lag time constant s

tb In.Reg_AVR_PID PID AVR Lead time constant s

vo In.Reg_AVR_PID PID AVR low frequency gain --

voo In.Reg_AVR_PID PID AVR high frequency gain --

vp In.Reg_AVR_PID PID AVR proportional gain --

AdditionalRefValue In.Reg_AVR_SetPt "Regulator, AVR setpoint.

Additional value, added to the reference summing-point"

p.u.

ExtRefTolerance In.Reg_AVR_SetPt AVR Setpoint. Tolerance external reference to internal value for releasingswitchover to external reference

p.u.

ExtRefValue In.Reg_AVR_SetPt Regulator, AVR setpoint. External reference value. p.u

MaxRefValue In.Reg_AVR_SetPt Regulator, AVR setpoint. Maximal value p.u

MinRefValue1 In.Reg_AVR_SetPt Regulator, AVR setpoint. Minimal value 1 p.u

MinRefValue2 In.Reg_AVR_SetPt Regulator, AVR setpoint. Minimal value 2 p.u






RefIntPresetValue1 In.Reg_AVR_SetPt Regulator, AVR setpoint. Preset value 1 p.u

RefIntPresetValue2 In.Reg_AVR_SetPt Regulator, AVR setpoint. Preset value 2 p.u

RefIntRuntime1 In.Reg_AVR_SetPt Regulator, AVR setpoint. Runtime 1 s

RefIntRuntime2 In.Reg_AVR_SetPt Regulator, AVR setpoint. Runtime 2 s

Select_ExtRefValue In.Reg_AVR_SetPt "Regulator, AVR setpoint. Select external reference valueTRUE = Select_ExtRefValueFALSE = external reference value not available"

boo

Select_MinRefValue2 In.Reg_AVR_SetPt "Regulator, AVR setpoint. Select minimal value 2TRUE = MinRefValue2FALSE = MinRefValue1"

boo

Select_RefIntPresetValue2 In.Reg_AVR_SetPt "Regulator, AVR setpoint. Select preset value 2TRUE = RefIntPresetValue2FALSE = RefIntPresetValue1"

boo

SelectRefIntRuntime2 In.Reg_AVR_SetPt AVR Setpoint. Select runtime 2 boo

URefMax In.Reg_AVR_SetPt "Regulator, AVR setpoint.

Absolute reference limitation value (independent of overspeed)"

p.u.

Limiter_Release In.Reg_AVR_SetPt_VHz_Lim Enable V/Hz Limiter boo

LimiterDelayFuncSelect In.Reg_AVR_SetPt_VHz_Lim "AVR V/Hz Limiter - select curve0: fix delay,1: normal inverse, t[s]=k*0,14/(I/Itherm)exp0,02-12: very inverse, t[s]=k*13,5/(I/Itherm) -13: extremely inverse, t[s]=k*80/(I/Itherm)exp2 -1"

INT

LimiterGradient In.Reg_AVR_SetPt_VHz_Lim AVR V/Hz Limiter. Gradient (Ug/freq) --

LimiterVfn In.Reg_AVR_SetPt_VHz_Lim AVR V/Hz Limiter. Voltage at nominal frequency p.u





69 3BHS258025 E07 U

Tequivalent In.Reg_AVR_SetPt_VHz_Lim AVR V/Hz Limiter. Equivalent time for k-factor calculation

For this time the voltage Uequivalent is allowed. With this time the k-factor ofthe according inverse time curve will be calculated.

Extremely inverse (3):k=((((Uequivalent/LimiterVfn)^2)-1)*Tequivalent)/80;Very inverse (2):k=(((Uequivalent/LimiterVfn)-1)*Tequivalent)/13.5;Normal inverse (1):k=((((Uequivalent/LimiterVfn)^0.02)-1)*Tequivalent)/0.14;

Make sure that this time is lower than in the monitoring and the same inversetime curve is selected.When inverse time curve 0 (fix time) is selected, this time will be used as thefix time.

s

ThermalDownTime In.Reg_AVR_SetPt_VHz_Lim AVR V/Hz Limiter. inverse-time back-integration time s

Uequivalent In.Reg_AVR_SetPt_VHz_Lim AVR V/Hz Limiter. Equivalent voltage for k-factor calculation

For the time Tequivalent this voltage is allowed. With this voltage the k-factorof the according inverse time curve will be calculated.

Extermly inverse (3):k=((((Uequivalent/LimiterVfn)^2)-1)*Tequivalent)/80;Very inverse (2):k=(((Uequivalent/LimiterVfn)-1)*Tequivalent)/13.5;Normal inverse (1):k=((((Uequivalent/LimiterVfn)^0.02)-1)*Tequivalent)/0.14;

Make sure that this voltage is not higher than in the monitoring and the sameinverse time curve is selected.When inverse time curve 0 (fix time) is selected, this voltage will be not used.

p.u.

Enable In.Reg_ColdGas "Enables the coldgas function Adaptation of Control IT project might be necessary, allocation of tocorresponding hardware inputs"

boo

EnableAnaInFaultDetection In.Reg_ColdGas "Enables the analog input fault detection for 2..10 V or4..20 mA input"

boo

MaxTempAnaInValue In.Reg_ColdGas Maximum input signal temperature [°C] for scaling of the analog input value °C






SelectAnaInputType In.Reg_ColdGas "Select analog input typeFALSE = 0...20 mA,

TRUE = 4...20 mA"

boo

SelectDataInput In.Reg_ColdGas "Select data inputTRUE = Fieldbus input selectedFALSE = Analog input selected, which needs to be allocated in Control IT"

boo

RefVal0 In.Reg_ColdGas.IfInRefValues Temperature 6 for field current limiter °C






RefVal0 In.Reg_ColdGas.IfOutRefValues Correction factor @ Temperature 6 for stator current limiter --






RefVal0 In.Reg_ColdGas.IgInRefValues Temperature 6 for stator current limiter °C








71 3BHS258025 E07 U



RefVal0 In.Reg_ColdGas.IgOutRefValues Correction factor @ Temperature 6 for field current limiter --






AnaInFaultOffDelayTime In.Reg_CrossCurrComp "Regulator, Cross Current Compensation (CCC).

Analog input fault off-delay time "

s

AnaInFaultOnDelayTime In.Reg_CrossCurrComp "Regulator, Cross Current Compensation (CCC). s

CrossCurrCompOff In.Reg_CrossCurrComp Regulator, Cross Current Compensation (CCC). Disable CCC boo

CrossCurrCompOn In.Reg_CrossCurrComp "Regulator, Cross Current Compensation (CCC).CCC needs to be enabled during operationControl IT application has to be adapted to allocate the IOs and enable CCCat desired time."

boo

kCCC In.Reg_CrossCurrComp "Regulator, Cross Current Compensation (CCC).k-factor of cross current compensation "

--

MaxMeasAnaIn In.Reg_CrossCurrComp "Regulator, Cross Current Compensation (CCC).Fix value = 11.5 V absoluteIt is indicated as fault if equalizing line measurement exceeds 11.5 V"

V

puScaleFactor In.Reg_CrossCurrComp "Regulator, Cross Current Compensation (CCC).Fix value, 1pu = 10 V of equalizing line "

V






Rp In.Reg_CrossCurrComp Burden resistance at Equalizing Line output caused by bidirectional SignalTransducer (type KNICK 15 is used normally) connected between analog

outputand "Equalizing Line inter unit connection" (Transducer serves for isolated(floating)Equalizing Line connection to avoid any ground potential difference error).The burden resistance Rp generates a measurement error at the 2kOhmseriesresistor at the analog output, which must be compensated by correct Rpsetting.

Typical KNICK 15 Rp value is 200 kOhm.To check or tune the correct setting, the Equalizing Line must bedisconnected atthe output of the transducer (between transducer and outgoing EqualizingLine) andthe Equalizing Function must be forced (AO relay energized).Tune Rp until the difference signal"ControlIT\Out\Reg_CrossCurrCom\CCC_SumPointOut" becomes zero.

kΩ

EnableSetPtCorr In.Reg_Direct_Ctrl_PID PID Direct Control. Enable setpoint correction for less regulator deviation

GainReduction In.Reg_Direct_Ctrl_PID PID Direct Control. Gain reduction

ta In.Reg_Direct_Ctrl_PID PID Direct Control. Lag time constant

tb In.Reg_Direct_Ctrl_PID PID Direct Control. Lead time constant

vo In.Reg_Direct_Ctrl_PID PID Direct Control. Low frequency gain

voo In.Reg_Direct_Ctrl_PID PID Direct Control. High frequency gain

vp In.Reg_Direct_Ctrl_PID PID Direct Control. Proportional gain

DelayFuncSelect In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim "Maximum field current limiter - select curve0: fix delay,1: normal inverse, t[s]=k*0,14/(I/Itherm)exp0,02-12: very inverse, t[s]=k*13,5/(I/Itherm) -13: extremely inverse, t[s]=k*80/(I/Itherm)exp2 -1"

INT

dUdtPulseFunction_Enable In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim "Maximum field current limiter. Enables du/dt functionTRUE = dUdtPulseFunction_EnableFALSE = dUdtPulseFunction_Enable not available"

boo

Hysteresis In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim Maximum field current limiter. Hysteresis to prevent limiter pump p.u.





73 3BHS258025 E07 U

MaxFieldCurrent In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim Maximum field current limiter. Maximum field current limit. p.u.

MaxThermalFieldCurrent In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim "Maximum field current limiter.Maximum thermal field current.(inverse-time function starts if the field current exceeds this value)"

p.u.

NoLimitDelay In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim Maximum field current limiter. Time without limitation s

Release_IfMaxLim In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim Maximum field current limiter. Enable max. field current limiter boo

TdynHys In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim "Maximum field current limiter. Time after limiter engagement with doubledhysteresis.(Helps to prevent limiter pump)"

s

ThermalCoolingFactor In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim "Maximum field current limiter.Factor for thermal Limit until "Cooling" completed -> Italy Specification"

--

ThermalDownTime In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim Maximum field current limiter. Inverse-time back-integration time s

TimeMaxFieldCurrent In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim Maximum field current limiter. Time max field current

For this time the maximum field current is allowed. With this time the k-factorof the according inverse time curve will be calculated.

Extermly inverse (3):k=((((MaxFieldCurrent/Ifstart)^2)-1)*TimeMaxFieldCurrent)/80;Very inverse (2):k=(((MaxFieldCurrent/Ifstart)-1)*TimeMaxFieldCurrent)/13.5;Normal inverse (1):k=((((MaxFieldCurrent/Ifstart)^0.02)-1)*TimeMaxFieldCurrent)/0.14;


s

EnableSetPtCorr In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim_PID "Enables Maximum Field Current Limiter.Setpoint correction for less regulator deviation

TRUE = EnableSetPtCorrFALSE = EnableSetPtCorr not available"

boo

GainReduction In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim_PID Maximum Field Current Limiter gain reduction for INTEGRAL TYPE AVRLIMITER

--

ta In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim_PID PID Maximum Field Current Limiter Lag time constant s






tb In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim_PID PID Maximum Field Current Limiter Lead time constant s

vo In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim_PID PID Maximum Field Current Limiter low frequency gain --

voo In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim_PID PID Maximum Field Current Limiter high frequency gain --

vp In.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim_PID PID Maximum Field Current Limiter proportional gain --

MinFieldCurrent In.Reg_Field_Cur_Min_Lim Minimum field current limiter. Minimum field current (setpoint) p.u.

Release_IfMinLim In.Reg_Field_Cur_Min_Lim Release minimum field current limiter boo

EnableSetPtCorr In.Reg_Field_Cur_Min_Lim_PID PID Minimum Field Current Limiter. Enable setpoint correction for lessregulator deviation

boo

GainReduction In.Reg_Field_Cur_Min_Lim_PID PID Minimum Field Current Limiter. Gain reduction for INTEGRAL TYPE AVR LIMITER

--

ta In.Reg_Field_Cur_Min_Lim_PID PID Minimum Field Current Limiter Lag time constant s

tb In.Reg_Field_Cur_Min_Lim_PID PID Minimum Field Current Limiter Lead time constant s

vo In.Reg_Field_Cur_Min_Lim_PID PID Minimum Field Current Limiter low frequency gain --

voo In.Reg_Field_Cur_Min_Lim_PID PID Minimum Field Current Limiter high frequency gain --

vp In.Reg_Field_Cur_Min_Lim_PID PID Minimum Field Current Limiter proportional gain --

DisableFollowUpToActiveChannel In.Reg_Follow_Up "Disables Follow-up of inactive ChannelOnly for test purposes"

boo

DisableFollowUpToAVRMAN In.Reg_Follow_Up "Disables Follow-up between Auto and Manual ModeOnly for test purposes"

boo

EpsilonAVRMAN In.Reg_Follow_Up "Follow up. Epsilon follow-up Auto-Manual(error = UcAuto-UcManual)"

p.u.

EpsilonOtherChannel In.Reg_Follow_Up "Follow up. Epsilon follow-up to active channel(error = UcChX-UcChY)"

p.u.

FeedbackGainAVR In.Reg_Follow_Up "Follow up. Feedback Gain AVR.Direct influence to AVR summing-point without delay"

--

FeedbackGainMAN In.Reg_Follow_Up "Follow up. Feedback Gain MANUAL. --

GainAVRMAN In.Reg_Follow_Up Follow up. Gain follow-up Auto <-> Manual --






EnableIntegralTypeAVRLim In.Reg_Low_High_Gate "Low-high voltage gate for limiter selection.Use AVR Limiter as Integral type imposed to AVR Summing-point"

boo

ForceAVR In.Reg_Low_High_Gate "This signal operates to the low-high voltage gate. Force AVR input overridesthe influence of AVR limitersUsed for testing only"

boo

SetPriorityToUEL In.Reg_Low_High_Gate Low-high voltage gate. Set priority to underexcitation limiters. boo

UseAVRMANTaTbSettingsforLimiters In.Reg_Low_High_Gate Low-high voltage gate. Use the AVR and Manual PID Ta/Tb Settings for theLimiter PIDs

boo

AdditionalInput In.Reg_Manual MAN summing-point spare input p.u.

EnableSetPtCorr In.Reg_Manual Enables AVR Setpoint correction for less regulator deviation boo

ta In.Reg_Manual PI Manual Regulator Lag time constant s

TestInput In.Reg_Manual MAN summing-point additional test input p.u.

vo In.Reg_Manual PI Manual Regulator low frequency gain --

vp In.Reg_Manual PI Manual Regulator proportional gain --

Characteristic_IfP00 In.Reg_Manual_Restrict "Manual P/Q Restrict.If-Setpoint for P=0.0puTo be set in coordination with the PQ-limiter (add margin of around 0.05 pudue to less stability in MANUAL mode)"

p.u.


p.u.


p.u.

Characteristic_IfP06 In.Reg_Manual_Restrict "Manual P/Q Restrict.If-Setpoint for P=0.6puTo be set in coordination with the PQ-limiter (add margin of around 0.05 pu

due to less stability in MANUAL mode)"

p.u.


p.u.






SelectRefIntRuntime2 In.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Manual Setpoint. Select preset 2 valueTRUE = RefIntPresetValue2

FALSE = RefIntPresetValue1"

boo

EnableAnaInFaultDetection In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_LCISetPt Enables the analog input fault detection for 2..10 or 4..20mA input boo

EnableAnaInputSignal In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_LCISetPt Enables the analog input signal boo

MaxAnaInputValue In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_LCISetPt Maximum analog input value. Corresponds to 20mA or 10V. V

MaxIfAnaInValue In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_LCISetPt Maximum analog input value. Corresponds to 20mA or 10V. A

SelectAnaInputType In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_LCISetPt "Select the analog input typeTRUE = 2..10V/4..20mA,FALSE = 0..10V/0..20mA"

boo

Iequivalent In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_VHz_Lim Manual V/Hz Restrict. Equivalent current for k-factor calculation

For the time Tequivalent this current is allowed. With this current the k-factor

of the according inverse time curve will be calculated.

Extermly inverse (3):k=((((Iequivalent/LimiterIfn_agl) 2)-1)*Tequivalent)/80;Very inverse (2):k=(((Iequivalent/LimiterIfn_agl)-1)*Tequivalent)/13.5;Normal inverse (1):k=((((Iequivalent/LimiterIfn_agl) 0.02)-1)*Tequivalent)/0.14;

Make sure that this current is not higher than in the monitoring and the sameinverse time curve is selected.When inverse time curve 0 (fix time) is selected, this current will be not used.

p.u.

Limiter_Release In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_VHz_Lim "Manual V/Hz Restrict. ReleaseOnly active during offline-operation if activated"

boo

LimiterDelayFuncSelect In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_VHz_Lim "Manual V/Hz Restrict - select curve

0: fix delay,1: normal inverse, t[s]=k*0,14/(I/Itherm)exp0,02-12: very inverse, t[s]=k*13,5/(I/Itherm) -13: extremely inverse, t[s]=k*80/(I/Itherm)exp2 -1"

INT

LimiterGradient_agl In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_VHz_Lim Manual V/Hz Restrict. Gradient (Ifagl / f) --

LimiterIfn_agl In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_VHz_Lim Manual V/Hz Restrict. Field Current at nominal frequency [p.u. Ifagl] boo





79 3BHS258025 E07 U

Tequivalent In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_VHz_Lim Manual V/Hz Restrict. Equivalent time for k-factor calculation

For this time the current Iequivalent is allowed. With this time the k-factor ofthe according inverse time curve will be calculated.

Extermly inverse (3):k=((((Iequivalent/LimiterIfn_agl) 2)-1)*Tequivalent)/80;Very inverse (2):k=(((Iequivalent/LimiterIfn_agl)-1)*Tequivalent)/13.5;Normal inverse (1):k=((((Iequivalent/LimiterIfn_agl) 0.02)-1)*Tequivalent)/0.14;


s

ThermalDownTime In.Reg_Manual_SetPt_VHz_Lim Manual V/Hz Restrict. Inverse-time back-integration time s

PStatic In.Reg_P_Static "P-Static regulator.Normally used to compensate (positive value) line drop or get overexcitedwith increasing active power after synchronizing."

--

Release_PStaticpar In.Reg_P_Static P-Static regulator. TRUE = P-Static Release boo

EnaFollowUp In.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt Power factor regulator setpoint. Enable follow-up (Setpoint=actual value) boo

ExtRefTolerance In.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt "Power factor regulator setpoint.Tolerance external reference to internal value for switchover."

p.u.

ExtRefValue In.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt "Power factor regulator setpoint. External reference value Adaptation of Control IT project necessary, allocation of ExtRefValue tocorresponding hardware input"

p.u.

MaxRefValue In.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt Power factor regulator setpoint. Maximal value p.u.

MinRefValue In.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt Power factor regulator setpoint. Minimal value p.u.

RefIntPresetValue In.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt Power factor regulator setpoint. Preset value p.u

Select_BusbarControl In.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt Pf Regulator Setpoint. Select Busbar Pf control p.u

Select_BusbarSignal In.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt Power factor regulator setpoint. Select busbar Power Factor for follow-up boo

Select_ExtRefValue In.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt Power factor regulator setpoint. Select external reference value boo






Characteristic_QP00 In.Reg_PQ_Lim "P/Q limiter. Q-Setpoint for P=0.0pu

Characteristic –Q = f(P) at P = 0%.Consider that the characteristic in the power chart will be moved by square ofSFS_Meas_UgRel [p.u.].E.g. If SFS_Meas_UgRel = 0.9, then –Qlim = 0.81*-Qlim set"

p.u.



p.u.



p.u.



p.u.

Characteristic_QP08 In.Reg_PQ_Lim "P/Q limiter. Q-Setpoint for P=0.8puCharacteristic –Q = f(P) at P = 80%.Consider that the characteristic in the power chart will be moved by square ofSFS_Meas_UgRel [p.u.].E.g. If SFS_Meas_UgRel = 0.9, then –Qlim = 0.81*-Qlim set"

p.u.

Characteristic_QP10 In.Reg_PQ_Lim "P/Q limiter. Q-Setpoint for P=1.0puCharacteristic –Q = f(P) at P = 100%.Consider that the characteristic in the power chart will be moved by square ofSFS_Meas_UgRel [p.u.].E.g. If SFS_Meas_UgRel = 0.9, then –Qlim = 0.81*-Qlim set"

p.u.

Release_PQLim In.Reg_PQ_Lim Regulator P/Q limiter. Release P/Q limiter boo

EnableSetPtCorr In.Reg_PQ_Lim_PID "Enable P/Q Limiter.Setpoint correction for less regulator deviation


boo





81 3BHS258025 E07 U

GainReduction In.Reg_PQ_Lim_PID P/Q Limiter gain reduction for INTEGRAL TYPE AVR LIMITER --

ta In.Reg_PQ_Lim_PID PID P/Q Limiter Lag time constant s

tb In.Reg_PQ_Lim_PID PID P/Q Limiter Lead time constant s

vo In.Reg_PQ_Lim_PID PID P/Q Limiter low frequency gain --

voo In.Reg_PQ_Lim_PID PID P/Q Limiter high frequency gain --

vp In.Reg_PQ_Lim_PID PID P/Q Limiter proportional gain --

AddTestsignal In.Reg_PSS Power System Stabilizer (PSS). Add additional value to PSS output boo

BlockPSS In.Reg_PSS Power System Stabilizer (PSS). Block PSS boo

EnableOnDelayTime In.Reg_PSS "OnDelay time for release PSS function after all conditions( P >.. , …<U <…, ) for release are fulfilled"

s

LimitLowerTime In.Reg_PSS "Power System Stabilizer (PSS).Lower time constant for maximum output voltage. (when UgMax2 notexceeded)"

s

LimitRiseTime In.Reg_PSS "Power System Stabilizer (PSS).Rise time constant for maximal output voltage. (when UgMax2 exceeded)"

s

LowerPSSLimit In.Reg_PSS Power System Stabilizer (PSS). Stabilizer minimum output value p.u

PIDLoLim In.Reg_PSS "Power System Stabilizer (PSS). Lower Limit of PSS output [p.u] ->Uc" p.u

PIDUpLim In.Reg_PSS "Power System Stabilizer (PSS). Upper Limit of PSS output [p.u] ->Uc" p.u

PMinEna In.Reg_PSS Power System Stabilizer (PSS). Minimum active power for stabilizeractivation

p.u.

PSSMode In.Reg_PSS Power System Stabilizer (PSS). PSS Mode

0=disabled;1=PSS2B with PQ-Lower Limitation;2=PSS2B without PQ-Lower Limitation;3=PSS4B with PQ-Lower Limitation;4=PSS4B without PQ-Lower Limitation;5=PSS2B with APSS gain, with PQ-Lower Limitation;6=PSS2B with APSS gain, without PQ-Lower Limitation;7=PSS4B with APSS gain, with PQ-Lower Limitation;8=PSS4B with APSS gain, without PQ-Lower Limitation;

INT

PSSOff In.Reg_PSS Disables the selected Power System Stabilizer (PSS). boo

PSSOn In.Reg_PSS Enables the selected Power System Stabilizer (PSS). boo

TestSignalScalingFactor In.Reg_PSS Power System Stabilizer (PSS). Additional value to PSS output (beforelimitation)

p.u.

UgMaxEna In.Reg_PSS Power System Stabilizer (PSS). Maximum generator voltage for stabilizeractivation

p.u.






UgMaxLim In.Reg_PSS Power System Stabilizer (PSS). Maximum generator voltage 2 (Decreasesmaximum output value if exceeded)

p.u.

UgMinEna In.Reg_PSS Power System Stabilizer (PSS). Minimum generator voltage for stabilizeractivation

p.u.

UpperPSSLimit In.Reg_PSS Power System Stabilizer (PSS). Stabilizer maximum output value p.u

Xe1 In.Reg_PSS Infinite grid Reactance 1 for Xe Identification (APSS) p.u



XeIdentEnableLevel In.Reg_PSS Xe Identification Enable Level mH

XxMach In.Reg_PSS "Quadrature-axis-reactance of the machine for the corresponding rotorfrequency oscillation"

p.u.

dwtestScalingFactor In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Test input f channel p.u

Enable_Test In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Enable Test inputs boo

Ks1 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Weighting factor --

Ks2 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Gain Pe channel --

Ks3 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Gain sum branch --

m In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Ramp tracking filter "low-pass"-degree INT

n In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Ramp tracking filter "overall"-degree INT

PetestScalingFactor In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Test input Pe channel p.u

T1 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. First lead time constant s

T10 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Third lead time constant s

T11 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Third lag time constant s

T2 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. First lag time constant s

T3 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Second lead time constant s

T4 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Second lag time constant s

T7 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Integration time constant s

T8 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Ramp tracking filter numerator s

T9 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Ramp tracking filter denominator s

Tw1 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Washout time constant 1 (f channel) s

Tw2 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Washout time constant 2 (f channel) s

Tw3 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Washout time constant 3 (Pe channel) s

Tw4 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B PSS2B. Washout time constant 4 (Pe channel) s





83 3BHS258025 E07 U

KB In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Low frequency overall gain KB s

KB1 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Low frequency gain KB1 --

KB11 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Low frequency nominator constant KB11 --

KB17 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Low frequency nominator constant KB17 --

KB2 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Low frequency gain KB2 --

KH In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. High frequency overall gain KH s

KH1 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. High frequency gain KH1 --

KH11 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. High frequency nominator constant KH11 --

KH17 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. High frequency nominator constant KH17 --

KH2 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. High frequency gain KH2 --

KI In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Intermediate frequency overall gain KI s

KI1 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Intermediate frequency gain KI1 --

KI11 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Intermediate frequency nominator constant KI11 --

KI17 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Intermediate frequency nominator constant KI17 --

KI2 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Intermediate frequency gain KI2 ms

TB1 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Low frequency time constant TB1 s












TH1 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. High frequency time constant TH1 s

















TI1 In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Intermediate frequency time constant TI1 s












VBmax In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Low frequency maximum output VBmax p.u

VBmin In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Low frequency minimum output VBmin p.u

VHmax In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. High frequency maximum output VHmax p.u

VHmin In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. High frequency minimum output VHmin p.u

VImax In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Intermediate frequency maximum output VImax p.u

VImin In.Reg_PSS_IEEE_4B PSS4B. Intermediate frequency minimum output VImin p.u





85 3BHS258025 E07 U

QStatic In.Reg_Q_Static "Q-Static regulator.DROOP=negative values (-0.03..-0.08) are required for parallel operation

with rigid gridor to get reactive load-sharing with other machines which areconnected to the

same busbars without separate unit transformers

COMPENSATION=positive values (eg +0.05) to compensate the unittransformers

reactance (e.g 0.12) partly to get the same resulting droop of -0.03.. -0.08 p.u

instead of transformer reactance

--

Release_QStaticpar In.Reg_Q_Static Q-Static regulator. TRUE = Q-Static Release boo

BusVoltageFaultTolerance In.Reg_Regulator Regulator. Bus voltage tracking fault tolerance p.u.

BusVoltageTrackingOff In.Reg_Regulator Regulator. Switch bus voltage tracking off boo

BusVoltageTrackingOn In.Reg_Regulator "Regulator.Switch bus voltage tracking on. Is automatically switched off if unit is online"

boo

ForceBusVoltageTrackingOn In.Reg_Regulator "Regulator.

Force the bus voltage tracking to be enabled whenever the unit is OFF-LineIf set to true the AVR reference will be balanced until the machine issynchronized (generator breaker closed)"

boo

IC_Regulators In.Reg_Regulator Regulator. Initial condition PI/PID p.u.

PresetAutoSetpoint In.Reg_Regulator Regulator. AVR Setpoint. Preset command boo

PresetManSetpoint In.Reg_Regulator Regulator. MAN Setpoint. Preset command boo

PresetPFRegSetpoint In.Reg_Regulator Regulator. Power Factor Setpoint. Preset command boo

PresetVarRegSetpoint In.Reg_Regulator Regulator. Q Setpoint. Preset command boo

UcNegRateLimit In.Reg_Regulator "Regulator.Gate Control Unit (GCU) signal conditioning rate limiter negative Rate [puUc/s]. 0=Infinite(disabled=no limitation)"

p.u.

UcPosRateLimit In.Reg_Regulator "Regulator.Gate Control Unit (GCU) signal conditioning rate limiter positive Rate [puUc/s]. 0=Infinite(disabled=no limitation)"

p.u.

DelayFuncSelect In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim "Stator current limiter - select curve0: fix delay,1: normal inverse, t[s]=k*0,14/(I/Itherm)exp0,02-12: very inverse, t[s]=k*13,5/(I/Itherm) -13: extremely inverse, t[s]=k*80/(I/Itherm)exp2 -1"

INT






dUdtPulseFunction_Enable In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim "Stator current limiter. Enable du/dt pulse functionTRUE = dUdtPulseFunction_Enable

FALSE = dUdtPulseFunction_Enable not available"

boo

Hysteresis In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim Stator current limiter. Hysteresis to prevent limiter pump p.u.

Iequivalent In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim Stator current limiter. Equivalent current for k-factor calculation

For the time Tequivalent this current is allowed. With this current the k-factorof the according inverse time curve will be calculated.

Extermly inverse (3):k=((((Iequivalent/MaxThermalStatorCurrent)^2)-1)*Tequivalent)/80;Very inverse (2):k=(((Iequivalent/MaxThermalStatorCurrent)-1)*Tequivalent)/13.5;Normal inverse (1):k=((((Iequivalent/MaxThermalStatorCurrent)^0.02)-1)*Tequivalent)/0.14;

When inverse time curve 0 (fix time) is selected, this current will be not used.

p.u.

MaxThermalStatorCurrent In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim Stator current limiter. Maximum thermal stator current. (inverse-time functionstarts if the stator current exceeds this value)

p.u.

Release_IgCapLim In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim Stator current limiter. Enable capacitive stator current limiter boo

Release_IgIndLim In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim Stator current limiter. Enable inductive stator current limiter boo

TdynHys In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim "Stator current limiter.Time after limiter engagement with higher hysteresis. (Helps to preventlimiter pump)"

s

Tequivalent In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim Stator current limiter. Equivalent time for k-factor calculation

For this time the current Iequivalent is allowed. With this time the k-factor ofthe according inverse time curve will be calculated.

Extermly inverse (3):k=((((Iequivalent/MaxThermalStatorCurrent)^2)-1)*Tequivalent)/80;Very inverse (2):k=(((Iequivalent/MaxThermalStatorCurrent)-1)*Tequivalent)/13.5;

Normal inverse (1):k=((((Iequivalent/MaxThermalStatorCurrent)^0.02)-1)*Tequivalent)/0.14;

When inverse time curve 0 (fix time) is selected, this time will be used as thefix time.

s

ThermalCoolingFactor In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim Stator current limiter. Factor for thermal limit until "Cooling" completed -> ItalySpecification

--

ThermalDownTime In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim Stator current limiter. Inverse-time back-integration time s





87 3BHS258025 E07 U

EnableSetPtCorr In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Cap_PID "PID Inductive Stator Current Limiter.Enables setpoint correction for less regulator deviation


boo

GainReduction In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Cap_PID PID Capacitive Stator Current Limiter. Gain reduction for INTEGRAL TYPE AVR LIMITER

--

ta In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Cap_PID PID Capacitive Stator Current Limiter Lag time constant s

tb In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Cap_PID PID Capacitive Stator Current Limiter Lead time constant s

vo In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Cap_PID PID Capacitive Stator Current Limiter low frequency gain --

voo In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Cap_PID PID Capacitive Stator Current Limiter high frequency gain --

vp In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Cap_PID PID Capacitive Stator Current Limiter proportional gain --

EnableSetPtCorr In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Ind_PID "PID Inductive Stator Current Limiter.

Enables setpoint correction for less regulator deviationTRUE = EnableSetPtCorrFALSE = EnableSetPtCorr not available"

boo

GainReduction In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Ind_PID PID Inductive Stator Current Limiter. Gain reduction for INTEGRAL TYPE AVR LIMITER

--

ta In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Ind_PID PID Inductive Stator Current Limiter Lag time constant s

tb In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Ind_PID PID Inductive Stator Current Limiter Lead time constant s

vo In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Ind_PID PID Inductive Stator Current Limiter low frequency gain --

voo In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Ind_PID PID Inductive Stator Current Limiter high frequency gain --

vp In.Reg_Stat_Cur_Lim_Ind_PID PID Inductive Stator Current Limiter proportional gain --

EnaFollowUp In.Reg_Var_Reg_SetPt Q Regulator Setpoint. Enable follow-up (Setpoint=actual value) boo

ExtRefTolerance In.Reg_Var_Reg_SetPt "Q Regulator Setpoint.Tolerance external reference to internal value for switchover."

p.u.

ExtRefValue In.Reg_Var_Reg_SetPt "Q Regulator Setpoint. External reference value Adaptation of CIT project necessary, allocation of ExtRefValue tocorresponding hardware input"

p.u.





93 3BHS258025 E07 U

ForceUELimCounterValue In.Sys_Diagnosis Diagnosis. Forces the UE Limiter counter to the specified value --

LicenceKey1 In.Sys_Diagnosis SW Activation Licence Key Part 1 --



SaveDiagnosisData In.Sys_Diagnosis Diagnosis. Save the diagnosis data boo

bForceParameterSet In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Enable to force a parameter set boo

bSetTime In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Set System time boo

ChannelConfigWord In.Sys_ExcitationSystem "Channel config word:0 = not configured,1 = Ch1,2 = Ch1 & BFCR,3 = Ch1 & Ch2,4 = Ch1 & Ch2 and BFCR"

INT

CosPhiNom In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Nominal Power Factor (cos Phi) of the machine --

EnableDaylightSavingAutoClockChg In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Enable the Daylight Saving automatic clock change (Default: CentralEuropean Daylight Saving Time CEDT. Else change DSTimeZoneInfoVariable)

boo

EnableRebootCmd In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Release AC 800PEC Reboot Command boo

ExcSysName In.Sys_ExcitationSystem "Excitation system nameThis string is used by the OPC server when creating an event subscription.Boot parameter. Value can only be changed in the Configuration sequence."

--

ForcedParameterSet In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Forced parameter set INT

LocalTimeZoneDiff In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Difference in hours of the local time zone compared to GMT min

LowerCeilingFactorLimit In.Sys_ExcitationSystem "Lower Ceiling Factor LimitationThis parameter is used to limit the ceiling factor.

The default value of -100 is normally far outside the limiting area"

--

NominalMachineFreq In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Nominal machine frequency.Value gets freezed after system startup, a change of the value does not takeeffect until the next system

Hz

OrderNumber In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Order number of Excitation System --





95 3BHS258025 E07 U

WriteToIpFile In.Sys_ExcitationSystem "Write to IP files commandThis command sets the IP of the associated CCM's, CIO's and CCI's

To do this correctly, it is mandatory, that the IP of the AC 800PEC and the16 Bit Code Switch at the peripherals is set correct.

The default values are CCM's CIO's CCI's1 Unit 172.16.0. 21 31 412 Unit 22 32 423 Unit . 33 43

---

Note: The remote device has to be rebooted afterwards."

boo

Xd In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Direct axis synchronous reactance XdIs used for the calculation of the limits of the PQ-Limiter and the PQ-Monitor

p.u.

Xe In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Infinite grid reactance Xe

Is used for the calculation of the load angle Delta(see "ControlIT\Out\Meas_SystemMeasurement\LoadAngle")

p.u.

Xq In.Sys_ExcitationSystem Quadrature axis synchronous reactance XqIs used for the calculation of the load angle Delta(see "ControlIT\Out\Meas_SystemMeasurement\LoadAngle")and the Gain Reduction cos(Delta) of the Ig- and the PQ-Limiter

p.u.

ActivateExtRef OperatorCommand "Operator command. Activate external reference signal"

boo

LowerActRef OperatorCommand "Operator command.Lower actual reference signal"

boo

RaiseActRef OperatorCommand "Operator command.Raise actual reference signal"

boo

ReleaseControl OperatorCommand "Operator command.Operator control released signal"

boo

RequestControl OperatorCommand "Operator command.

Operator control request signal"

boo

ChannelActive OperatorStatus "Operator status.Information that this channel is the active channel"

boo

ChannelBUActive OperatorStatus "Operator status.Information that the backup channel is the active channel"

boo

ControlReleased OperatorStatus "Operator status.Operator control released signal "

boo






ControlStatus OperatorStatus "Operator status.Operator select control status signal [1..6]

1 = Service (Control IT level)2 = SCP (Service Control Panel)3 = Local Excitation Control Terminal (ECT)4 = Remote I/O (Hardwired to CIO)5 = Fieldbus6 = Remote Excitation Control Terminal (ECT)"

INT

OtherChannelActive OperatorStatus Operator status.Information, that the indicating channel is NOT the active channel

boo

SubControlStatus OperatorStatus "Operator status.Operator select sub control status of the Excitation Control Terminal (ECT)

0 = Not selected,1 = ECT"

INT

SubOperatorID OperatorStatus "Operator status.Operator select sub-operator ID of the Excitation Control Terminal (ECT)"

INT

Breaker2Selected Out.Brk_Breaker Feedback signal from the "Breaker-Switch-Over" Module, that Breaker2 is

the selected one to react to the FCB ON/OFF commands

FieldBreakerIsClosed Out.Brk_Breaker Breaker. Status signal active field breaker is closed

FieldBreakerNotChargedFault Out.Brk_Breaker Fieldbreaker Not Charged FaultThe set time, which is allowed to elapse after an Off command, is over andthe required feedback signal is not aliveThere is also en entry in the alarm list (21222)

FieldFlashBreakerIsClosed Out.Brk_Breaker Breaker. Status signal fieldflash breaker is closed

FieldIsolatorIsClosed Out.Brk_Breaker Breaker. Status signal that the breaker switchover is finished

Isolator2Selected Out.Brk_Breaker Feedback signal from the "Breaker-Switch-Over" Module, that Isolator 2 isthe selected one to react to the Isolator ON/OFF commands

SwitchOverFinished Out.Brk_Breaker Breaker. Status signal that the breaker switchover is finished

BreakerIsClosed Out.Brk_BreakerGroup1 Breaker group1. Status signal breaker 1 is closed



Breaker1IsClosed Out.Brk_BreakerSwitchOver Breaker switchover. Status signal breaker 1 is closed

Breaker2IsClosed Out.Brk_BreakerSwitchOver Breaker switchover. Status signal breaker 2 is closed





97 3BHS258025 E07 U

SwitchOverFinished Out.Brk_BreakerSwitchOver Breaker switchover. Status signal that the breaker switchover is finished

CrowbarFailure Out.Brk_Crowbar Crowbar failure status signalThe monitor has at least 2 negative crowbar current pulses detected (the 1stcurrent pulse released the Alarm “LossOfSynch”), I.e. the converter suppliedcurrent to the faulty crowbar.

CrowbarFault Out.Brk_Crowbar "Crowbar.Status signal crowbar fault

Alarm the event "CrowbarFlt" is createdPossible reasons: Crowbar not conducting when opening fieldbreaker"

LossOfSynchronism Out.Brk_Crowbar Loss of machine synchronism

NegativeCrowbarCurrent Out.Brk_Crowbar "Crowbar.Crowbar current direction detected "

OverVoltageFault Out.Brk_Crowbar "Crowbar.Crowbar positive current detectedTrip1 event "CrowbarOVFlt" is createdPossible reasons:

- The field overvoltage protection (crowbar) was responding on a positive or

negativefield overvoltage

- Negative field overvoltage occurs if an interruption occurs in the powersupply or field circuit"

PositiveCrowbarCurrent Out.Brk_Crowbar "Crowbar.Crowbar current direction detected "

Charged Out.Brk_FieldBreaker1 "Breaker group1, field breaker1 charged signalBreaker is back into the position ready to be switched on"

Fault Out.Brk_FieldBreaker1 "Breaker group1, field breaker1.Combined fault of the following messages:

- Event emergency stop "FCB1TurnOnFlt" or- trip1 event "FCB1TurnOffFlt" or- trip1 event "FCB1ManOffFlt" are created"

IsClosed Out.Brk_FieldBreaker1 "Breaker group1, field breaker1Status signal field breaker 1 is closed,otherwise the Event "FCB1IsOnMissing" is created"

Location Out.Brk_FieldBreaker1 "Breaker group1, field breaker1.Status signal of the breaker 1 location AC or DC side

False = AC-side,True = DC-side"

Charged Out.Brk_FieldBreaker2 "Breaker group2. Field breaker 2 charged signalBreaker is back into the position ready to be switched on"








IsClosed Out.Brk_FieldBreaker2 "Breaker group2, field breaker2.Status signal field breaker 2 is closed,otherwise the Event "FCB2IsOnMissing" is created"

Location Out.Brk_FieldBreaker2 "Breaker group2. Field breaker 2 location signalStatus signal of the breaker 2 location AC or DC side


Charged Out.Brk_FieldBreaker3 "Breaker group3. Field breaker3 charged signalBreaker is back into the position ready to be switched on "



IsClosed Out.Brk_FieldBreaker3 "Breaker group3, field breaker3.Status signal field breaker 3 is closed,otherwise the Event "FCB3IsOnMissing" is created"

Location Out.Brk_FieldBreaker3 "Breaker group3. Field breaker 3 location signalStatus signal of the breaker 3 location AC or DC side


IsClosed Out.Brk_FieldFlash Field flashing. status signal field flash breaker is closed

Fault Out.Brk_FieldIsolator1 "Field isolator1. General field isolator 1 fault signalCombined fault of the following messages:

- Alarm "Iso1lTurnOnFlt" or- Alarm "Iso1lTurnOffFlt" or- Alarm "Iso1lAntivalFlt" are created"

IsClosed Out.Brk_FieldIsolator1 Field isolator1. Status signal field isolator 1 is closed

Location Out.Brk_FieldIsolator1 "Field isolator1. Field isolator 1 location signal.Status signal of the isolator 1 location AC or DC side






99 3BHS258025 E07 U




Location Out.Brk_FieldIsolator2 "Field isolator2. Field isolator 2 location signalStatus signal of the isolator 2 location AC or DC side





Location Out.Brk_FieldIsolator3 "Field isolator3. Field isolator 3 location signalStatus signal of the isolator 3 location AC or DC sideFalse = AC-side,True = DC-side"

IsClosed Out.Brk_StartingBreaker Starting breaker status signal

DisableCCMIfMinValueInput Out.Conv_Converter1 Disable the CCM If min. value input --

DisableCCMIfTypeSelect Out.Conv_Converter1 "CCM field current type selectionSelection of the CCM If bipolar output type [-10…10V]"

--

IfAbs Out.Conv_Converter1 "Converter. Actual excitation current in AMPS.NOTE: refresh cycle is 1s. Signal forced to zero when gate pulses blocked"

A

IfRel Out.Conv_Converter1 "Converter. Actual excitation current RELATIVE.NOTE: In the standby channel of a 2 channel system this signal is read from

the active channel."

p.u.

MaxMeasIconv Out.Conv_Converter1 Max. Measurable converter current A

MaxMeasUconv Out.Conv_Converter1 Max. Measurable converter voltage V

OverlapAngle Out.Conv_Converter1 "Converter.Calculated overlap angle "

° el

UfAbs Out.Conv_Converter1 "Converter. Actual excitation voltage in VOLTS."

V






UfRel Out.Conv_Converter1 "Converter. Actual excitation voltage RELATIVE. "

p.u.

USynAbs Out.Conv_Converter1 "Converter. Actual converter input voltage in VOLTS. "

V

USynRel Out.Conv_Converter1 "Converter. Actual converter input voltage RELATIVE. "

p.u.

ActualStep Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 actual step of the fan control sequence0: Fans Off1: Fan 1 Supply 12: Fan 1 Supply 23: Fan 2 Supply 14: Fan 2 Supply 2

INT

CoolingFailure Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 both fans and/or supplies failed status

Fan1RunningDays Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 fan control, fan 1 hour counter value in days [d] day

Fan1RunningSeconds Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 fan control, fan 1 hour counter value in seconds [s] s

Fan1Supply1Fault Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 Fan 1 Supply 1 fault status

Fan1Supply1On Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 Fan 1 Supply 1 On status

Fan1Supply2Fault Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 Fan 1 Supply 2 On status








Fan2Used Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 redundant fan configuration (2 fans configured) status





101 3BHS258025 E07 U

FanOff Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 Fan is off status signal

FanOn Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 Fan is on status signal

JumpToStep Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 fan control sequence jump to step order0: Fans Off1: Fan 1 Supply 12: Fan 1 Supply 23: Fan 2 Supply 14: Fan 2 Supply 2

INT

MCB1Fault Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 Fan Supply Miniature Circuit Breaker 1 fault status


Supply2Used Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl1 Converter 1 redundant fan supply configuration (2 fan supplies configured)status

ActualStep Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl2 Converter 2 actual step of the fan control sequence

0: Fans Off1: Fan 1 Supply 12: Fan 1 Supply 23: Fan 2 Supply 14: Fan 2 Supply 2

INT









Fan2RunningSeconds Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl2 Converter 2 fan control, fan 2 hour conuter value in seconds [s] s













JumpToStep Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl2 Converter 2 fan control sequence jump to step order0: Fans Off1: Fan 1 Supply 1

2: Fan 1 Supply 23: Fan 2 Supply 14: Fan 2 Supply 2

INT





INT

CoolingFailure Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl3 Converter 3 both fans and/or supplies failes status








103 3BHS258025 E07 U














INT









ActualStep Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl4 Converter 4 actual step of the fan control sequence0: Fans Off

1: Fan 1 Supply 12: Fan 1 Supply 23: Fan 2 Supply 14: Fan 2 Supply 2

INT





















105 3BHS258025 E07 U

JumpToStep Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl4 Converter 4 fan control sequence jump to step order0: Fans Off


INT





INT























INT





INT











107 3BHS258025 E07 U












INT





INT






















JumpToStep Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl7 Converter 7 Next step of the fan control sequence0: Fans Off


INT







109 3BHS258025 E07 U



INT






















JumpToStep Out.Conv_ConverterFanControl8 Converter 8 fan control sequence jump to step order0: Fans Off


INT




AirTemp1Level1Fault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1. Alarm event "AirTemp1Lev1Flt" is created- air temperature 1 exceeded"

AirTemp1Level2Fault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1. Alarm event "AirTemp1Lev2Flt" is created

- air temperature 1 exceeded"

AirTemp1SensFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1. Alarm event "ThyrTemp1SensFl" is created-air temperature 1 sensor fault"



AirTemp2SensFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1. Alarm event "ThyrTemp1SensFl" is created- air temperature 2 sensor fault"

ConverterAirTemp1 Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1, converter air temperature 1 °C


ConverterTrip Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1, converter is tripped

ConvModuleFaults1FaultsActive Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1, Common alarm of converter fault matrix 1






111 3BHS258025 E07 U


ConvOvrTempTrip Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1 detected an overtemperature (>140ºC) at air temp outlet (Airtemp 2)

CubicleDoorFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1. Alarm event "DoorFlt" is created- cubicle door open"

EmergencyCoolingOn Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Emergency cooling enabled status on converter 1.Emergency cooling will be enabled at 120ºC outlet (Air temp 2) temperatureand will be disabled at 50º outlet temperature.

EnableFanControl Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1, converter fan control enabled

FanManual Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1, fan is in manual operation mode

Ifdc Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1, field current measurement signal p.u.

NegCurr Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1, converter has negative current

PulsBlockContactorClosed Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1,Converter trip event "PulseBlockFault" is created- Pulse block contactor closed indication"

RNFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1.Converter trip event "ThyrFlt_Rn" is created- fault of the thyristor phase R negative"

RPFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1.Converter trip event "ThyrFlt_Rp" is created- fault of the thyristor phase R positive"

SNFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1.Converter trip event "ThyrFlt_Sn" is created- fault of the thyristor phase S negative"

SnubberFuseFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1. Alarm event "SnubberFuseFlt" is created

- snubber fuse fault"

SnubberSwiFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1.Converter trip event "SnubberSwiFlt" is created- snubber switch fault"

SPFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1.Converter trip event "ThyrFlt_Sp" is created- fault of the thyristor phase S positive"





113 3BHS258025 E07 U

ThyrCaseTemp4Level1Fault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1. Alarm event "ThyrTemp4Lev1Fl" is created

- thyristor case temperature 4 exceeded"

ThyrCaseTemp4Level2Fault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1.Converter trip event "ThyrTemp4Lev2Fl" is created- thyristor case temperature 4 exceeded (10 °C over the alarm level)"

ThyrCaseTemp5 Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1, thyristor case temperature 5 °C

ThyrCaseTemp5Level1Fault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1. Alarm event "ThyrTemp5Lev1Fl" is created- thyristor case temperature 5 exceeded"



ThyrCaseTemp6Level1Fault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1.

Alarm event "ThyrTemp6Lev1Fl" is created- thyristor case temperature 6 exceeded"

ThyrCaseTemp6Level2Fault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1.Converter trip event "ThyrTemp6Lev2Fl" is created- thyristor case temperature 6 exceeded (10 °C over the alarm level)

ThyrCur1 Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1, converter thyristor current 1 A






ThyristorFuseFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1. Alarm event "ThyristorFuseFlt" is created- thyristor fuse fault"

ThyrTemp1SensFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1. Alarm event "ThyrTemp1SensFl" is created- thyristor case temperature 1 sensor fault"






ThyrTemp2SensFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1. Alarm event "ThyrTemp1SensFl" is created

- thyristor case temperature 2 sensor fault"





TNFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1.Converter trip event "ThyrFlt_Tn" is created

- fault of the thyristor phase T negative"

TPFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 "Converter 1.Converter trip event "ThyrFlt_Tp" is created- fault of the thyristor phase T positive"

Uf Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1, field voltage measurement signal p.u.

Usyn Out.Conv_ConverterModule1 Converter 1, synchronous voltage measurement signal p.u.



AirTemp1SensFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule2 "Converter 2.

Alarm event "ThyrTemp1SensFl" is created-air temperature 1 sensor fault"







115 3BHS258025 E07 U

AirTemp2SensFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule2 "Converter 2. Alarm event "ThyrTemp1SensFl" is created

- air temperature 2 sensor fault"





















117 3BHS258025 E07 U

ThyrCaseTemp2Level2Fault Out.Conv_ConverterModule2 "Converter 2.Converter trip event "ThyrTemp2Lev2Fl" is created

- thyristor case temperature 2 exceeded (10 °C over the alarm level)"







Converter trip event "ThyrTemp4Lev2Fl" is created- thyristor case temperature 4 exceeded (10 °C over the alarm level)"

























TNFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule2 "Converter 2.Converter trip event "ThyrFlt_Tn" is created- fault of the thyristor phase T negative"








119 3BHS258025 E07 U







AirTemp2SensFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule3 "Converter 3. Alarm event "ThyrTemp1SensFl" is created

- air temperature 2 sensor fault"






















SNFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule3 "Converter 3.Converter trip event "ThyrFlt_Sn" is created

- fault of the thyristor phase S negative"

SnubberFuseFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule3 "Converter 3. Alarm event "SnubberFuseFlt" is created- snubber fuse fault"



StandbyCoolingFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule3 Standby cooling fault status of converter 3.If the temperature does not drop below "Air inlet Alarm level - 5º" within 600sor the duty cycle or the standby cooling is higher than 10% the standbycooling fault gets active.Standby cooling will be enabled 3ºC below the inlet (Air temp 1) alarm leveland will be disabled 5º below the inlet alarm level. The standby cooling will be

activated for at least 60s.StandbyCoolingOn Out.Conv_ConverterModule3 Standby cooling enabled status on converter 3.

Standby cooling will be enabled 3ºC below the inlet (Air temp 1) alarm leveland will be disabled 5º below the inlet alarm level. The standby cooling isactivated for at least 60s. When the temperature do not drop below "Alarmlevel - 5º" within 600s or the duty cycle or the standby cooling is higher than10% the standby cooling fault gets active.





121 3BHS258025 E07 U

TestPositionContactorClosed Out.Conv_ConverterModule3 "Converter 3,There is no default event group selected, the event "TestPosition" is created

- Converter is in test position indication"




















123 3BHS258025 E07 U








AirTemp1Level1Fault Out.Conv_ConverterModule4 "Converter 4.

Alarm event "AirTemp1Lev1Flt" is created- air temperature 1 exceeded"





AirTemp2SensFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule4 "Converter 4.

Alarm event "ThyrTemp1SensFl" is created- air temperature 2 sensor fault"






















SNFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule4 "Converter 4.

Converter trip event "ThyrFlt_Sn" is created- fault of the thyristor phase S negative"

















ThyrCaseTemp6 Out.Conv_ConverterModule4 Stromrichter 4, Thyristorgehäusetemperatur 6 °C













127 3BHS258025 E07 U

ThyristorFuseFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule4 "Converter 4. Alarm event "ThyristorFuseFlt" is created

- thyristor fuse fault"















AirTemp1SensFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule5 "Converter 5. Alarm event "ThyrTemp1SensFl" is created- thyristor case temperature 1 sensor fault"




















FanManual Out.Conv_ConverterModule5 Converter 5, converter fan control enabled



PulsBlockContactorClosed Out.Conv_ConverterModule5 "Converter 5Converter trip event "PulseBlockFault" is created- Pulse block contactor closed indication"





131 3BHS258025 E07 U


ThyrCur2 Out.Conv_ConverterModule5 Converter 5, converter thyristor current 2




















133 3BHS258025 E07 U

EmergencyCoolingOn Out.Conv_ConverterModule6 Emergency cooling enabled status on converter 6.Emergency cooling will be enabled at 120ºC outlet (Air temp 2) temperature

and will be disabled at 50º outlet temperature.












StandbyCoolingFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule6 Standby cooling fault status of converter 6.When the temperature do not drop below "Air inlet Alarm level - 5º" within600s or the duty cycle or the standby cooling is higher than 10% the standbycooling fault gets active.Standby cooling will be enabled 3ºC below the inlet (Air temp 1) alarm leveland will be disabled 5º below the inlet alarm level. The standby cooling will beactivated for at least 60s.





135 3BHS258025 E07 U














ThyrTemp1SensFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule6 "Converter 6.

Alarm event "ThyrTemp1SensFl" is created- thyristor case temperature 1 sensor fault"







137 3BHS258025 E07 U






ConvOvrTempTrip Out.Conv_ConverterModule7 Converter7 detected an overtemperature (>140ºC) at air temp outlet (Airtemp 2)


EmergencyCoolingOn Out.Conv_ConverterModule7 Emergency cooling enabled status on converter 7.Emergency cooling will be enabled at 120ºC outlet (Air temp 2) temperature

and will be disabled at 50º outlet temperature.













139 3BHS258025 E07 U




























ThyrTemp4SensFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule7 "Converter 7.

Alarm event "ThyrTemp1SensFl" is created- thyristor case temperature 4 sensor fault"












141 3BHS258025 E07 U





























SnubberFuseFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule8 "Converter 8.

Alarm event "SnubberFuseFlt" is created- snubber fuse fault"



StandbyCoolingFault Out.Conv_ConverterModule8 Standby cooling fault status of converter 8.If the temperature does not drop below "Air inlet Alarm level - 5º" within 600sor the duty cycle or the standby cooling is higher than 10%, the standbycooling fault gets active.Standby cooling will be enabled 3ºC below the inlet (Air temp 1) alarm leveland will be disabled 5º below the inlet alarm level. The standby cooling will beactivated for at least 60s.

StandbyCoolingOn Out.Conv_ConverterModule8 Standby cooling enabled status on converter 8.

Standby cooling will be enabled 3ºC below the inlet (Air temp 1) alarm leveland will be disabled 5º below the inlet alarm level. The standby cooling isactivated for at least 60s. If the temperature does not drop below "A larm level- 5º" within 600s or the duty cycle or the standby cooling is higher than 10%,the standby cooling fault gets active.

TestPositionContactorClosed Out.Conv_ConverterModule8 "Converter 8,There is no default event group selected, the event "TestPosition" is created- Converter is in test position indication"





143 3BHS258025 E07 U




















145 3BHS258025 E07 U







CCI1Active Out.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Converter module 1 is active

CCI1Tripped Out.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Converter module 1 is tripped




















ConvOvrTempTrip Out.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Any of the converters detected an overtemperature (>140ºC) at air tempoutlet (Air temp 2)

EnableConverterModule1 Out.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Converter module 1 is enabled








FaultStage1 Out.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Converter fault stage fault 1




SoftwareVersionCCI1 Out.Conv_ConverterSystem1 CCI 1 Software version number --







147 3BHS258025 E07 U






TwinCCI1Active Out.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Converter 1 active status signal in case of cold standby bridges

TwinCCI2Active Out.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Converter 2 active status signal in case of cold standby bridges

USynActive Out.Conv_ConverterSystem1 Synchronous voltage measurement is active for the synchronization --

CIOFaults1FaultsActive Out.Meas_CIO1 FaultGroup has active Faults

DeviceID Out.Meas_CIO1 CIO1 device ID

Redundant Out.Meas_CIO1 "Status signal CIO1 is redundantRedundancy fault "CIO1RedFault" is created"

Trip Out.Meas_CIO1 Status signal CIO1 is trippedRedundancy fault "CIO1Trip" is created"

CIOFaults1FaultsActive Out.Meas_CIO2 FaultGroup has active FaultsRedundancy fault "CIO2Trip" is created"




















Trip Out.Meas_CIO5 "Status signal CIO5 is trippedRedundancy fault "CIO5Trip" is created"













CIO1Identified Out.Meas_CIOConfig "CIO1 identification signalSignal is true, if the set ID corresponds to the used PowerLink"







149 3BHS258025 E07 U






ConfigWordFault Out.Meas_CIOConfig "CIO configuration word fault Alarm event "ConfigWordFlt" is created"

SoftwareVersionCIO1 Out.Meas_CIOConfig CIO1 software version number





SoftwareVersionCIO6 Out.Meas_CIOConfig CIO 6 software version number


SoftwareVersionCIO8 Out.Meas_CIOConfig CIO 8 software version number

Trip Out.Meas_CIOConfig "Any CIO trip signalCombined message of a tripped signal from one of the CIO'sDisjunction of the Redundancy fault "CIO1Trip" to "CIO4Trip" is created"

CosPhi Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value of the Cosinus Phi between Stator Voltage andStator Current

--

CosPhib Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement "Busbar Power Factor signal used for PANEL indication.NOTE: refresh cycle is 20ms. Signal is forced to zero if machine isOFF_LINE.+ sign means P and Q have the same signs (e.g. power and reactive powergeneration).

- sign means P and Q have different signs (e.g. power generation andreactive power consumption)."

--

fAbs Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value of the "Machine Frequency" in [Hz] Hz

fbAbs Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value of the "Busbar Frequency" in [Hz] Hz





151 3BHS258025 E07 U

MaxMeasGeneratorCurrent Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Maximum measurable value for "Generator Current" kA

MaxMeasGeneratorVoltage Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Maximum measurable value for "Generator Voltage" kV

MaxMeasGridCurrent Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Maximum measurable value for "Busbar Current" kA

MaxMeasGridVoltage Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Maximum measurable value for "Busbar Voltage" kV

PAbs Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value of the "Active Machine Power" in [MW] MW

PbAbs Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value of the "Active Busbar Power" in [MW] MW

PbRel Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement "Actual measurement value of the "Active Busbar Power"The value is displayed in [p.u.], so the value of the "Nominal Busbar Power"corresponds to the value 1.0 "

p.u.

Phi Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual value of the angle Phi between Stator Voltage and Stator Current --

Phib Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value --

PNom Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Nominal Machine Power MW

PRel Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement "Actual measurement value of the "Active Machine Power"The value is displayed in [p.u.], so the value of the "Nominal Machine

Power"corresponds to the value 1.0 "

p.u.

QAbs Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value of the "Reactive Machine Power" in [MVar] MV

QbAbs Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value of the "Reactive Busbar Power" in [MVar] MV

QbRel Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement "Actual measurement value of the "Reactive Busbar Power"The value is displayed in [p.u.], so the value of the "Nominal Busbar Power"corresponds to the value 1.0 "

p.u.

QRel Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement "Actual measurement value of the "Reactive Machine Power"The value is displayed in [p.u.], so the value of the "Nominal MachinePower"

corresponds to the value 1.0 "

p.u.

SAbs Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value of the "Machine Power" in [MVA] MV

SbAbs Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value of the "Busbar Power" in [MVA] MV






SbRel Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement "Actual measurement value of the "Busbar Power"The value is displayed in [p.u.], so the "Nominal Busbar Power"


p.u.

SRel Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement "Actual measurement value of the "Machine Power"The value is displayed in [p.u.], so the "Nominal Machine Power"corresponds to the value 1.0 "

p.u.

UbAbs Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value of the "Busbar Voltage" in [kV] kV

UbRel Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement "Actual measurement value of the "Busbar Voltage"The value is displayed in [p.u.], so the "Nominal Busbar Voltage"Busbar Voltage" corresponds to the value 1.0 "

p.u.

UgAbs Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement Actual measurement value of the "Stator Voltage" in [kV] kV

UgRel Out.Meas_SystemMeasurement "Actual measurement value of the "Stator Voltage"The value is displayed in [p.u.], so the "Nominal Stator Voltage"


p.u.

CommFault Out.OpSel_Fieldbus Fieldbus communication fault

ControlAcknowledge Out.OpSel_Fieldbus "Operator selection, fieldbus.Control acknowledge signalindicates, that the "FieldbusSlave" operator is the active control-section"

ControlStatus Out.OpSel_Fieldbus "Operator selection, fieldbus.Operator status signal:

1 = Service (Control IT level)2 = Local Excitation Control Terminal (ECT)3 = Remote I/O (Hardwired to CIO)4 = Fieldbus Master5 = Fieldbus Slave6 = Remote Excitation Control Terminal (ECT)"

FieldbusIOReleaseActive Out.OpSel_Fieldbus "Operator selection, fieldbus.FieldbusSlave IO ReleaseIf there is no longer a demand to operate the Excitation system from remotevia the FieldbusSlave, this command is used to allow control from an other

control board. If there is no request, the control is given the "Default" one"

FieldbusIORequestActive Out.OpSel_Fieldbus "Operator selection, fieldbus.FieldbusSlave IO Request ActiveThere is a request to operate the Excitation system from remote via theFieldbusSlave. If no demand with higher priority is existent, the control ischanged to this operator."

CommFault Out.OpSel_FieldbusMaster Fieldbus communication fault





153 3BHS258025 E07 U

ControlAcknowledge Out.OpSel_FieldbusMaster "Operator selection, fieldbus master.Control acknowledge signal

indicates, that the "FieldbusMaster" operator is the active control-section"

ControlStatus Out.OpSel_FieldbusMaster "Operator selection, fieldbus master.Operator status signal


FieldbusMasterIOReleaseActive Out.OpSel_FieldbusMaster "Operator selection, fieldbus master.FieldbusMasterIO ReleaseIf there is no longer a demand to operate the Excitation system from remotevia the FieldbusMaster, this command is used to allow control from an othercontrol board. If there is no request, the control is given the "Default" one "

FieldbusMasterIORequestActive Out.OpSel_FieldbusMaster "Operator selection, fieldbus master.

FieldbusMasterIO Request ActiveThere is a request to operate the Excitation system from remote via theFieldbusMaster. If no demand with higher priority is existent, the control ischanged to this operator."

ControlAcknowledge Out.OpSel_Local "Operator selection, local ECT..Control acknowledge signalindicates, that the "local ECT" operator is the active control-section"

ControlReleased Out.OpSel_Local "Operator selection, local ECT.Control released signalThe "Local ECT" has set its "operator released" signal to true"

ControlStatus Out.OpSel_Local "Operator selection, local ECT.Local ECT status signal

1 = Local Excitation Control Terminal 1 (ECT 1)2 = Local Excitation Control Terminal 2 (ECT 2) (not supported)3 = Local Excitation Control Terminal 3 (ECT 3) (not supported)4 = Local Excitation Control Terminal 4 (ECT 4) (not supported)"

LocalCTActive Out.OpSel_Local "Operator selection, local ECT..Local CT 1 active signal,

indicates, that "Local ECT 1" is the selected one out of possible 1 (notsupported in this SW-release)"

OperatorBlocked Out.OpSel_Local Not supported in this SW-release






OperatorSelectControlStatus Out.OpSel_Local "Operator selection, local ECT.Operator status signal:


ControlReleased Out.OpSel_OperatorSelect Operator selection. Control released status signal

ControlStatus Out.OpSel_OperatorSelect "Operator selection.Operator status signal.


FieldbusActive Out.OpSel_OperatorSelect "Operator selection.Operator active signal [Fieldbus]The fieldbus operator (Status 5) acts via the Anybus-S I/O interface and aspecific fieldbus protocol.The fieldbus operator has 5th highest priority.The fieldbus operator is used by the superimposed plant control to operatethe excitation system via fieldbus"

FieldbusMasterActive Out.OpSel_OperatorSelect "Operator selection.Operator active signal [Fieldbus Master]The fieldbus operator (Status 4) acts via the Anybus-S I/O interface and aspecific fieldbus protocol.The fieldbus operator has 4th highest priority.The fieldbus operator is used by the superimposed plant control to control tooperate the excitation system via fieldbus."

LocalActive Out.OpSel_OperatorSelect "Operator selection.Operator active signal [Local ECT]The local operator (Status 2) is an Excitation Control Terminal (ECT).The local operator has 2nd highest priority."





155 3BHS258025 E07 U

RemoteActive Out.OpSel_OperatorSelect "Operator selection.Operator active signal [Remote I/O]

The remote operator (Status 3) acts via the analog and digital inputs/outputsof the excitation system.This remote operator has 3rd highest priority.The remote operator is used by the superimposed plant control to operatethe excitation system via hardware I/Os."

RemoteCTActive Out.OpSel_OperatorSelect "Operator selection.Operator active signal [Remote ECT]The remote ECT operator (Status 6) can consist of up to 4 different ECTs(Excitation Control Terminals).It has the lowest priority of all operators.The remote ECT can be located in the control room of a power plant orelsewhere."

ServiceActive Out.OpSel_OperatorSelect "Operator selection.Operator active signal [Service]The service operator (Status 1) is an internal operator from the Control ITlevel.The excitation system is parameterized and operated with the control module

graphic in the Control IT.The service operator has the highest priority of all operators"

ControlAcknowledge Out.OpSel_Remote "Operator selection, remote I/O.Control acknowledge signalindicates, that the "remote I/O" operator is the active control-section"

ControlStatus Out.OpSel_Remote "Operator selection, remote I/O.Operator status signal:


RemoteIOReleaseActive Out.OpSel_Remote "Operator selection, remote.RemoteIO Release

If there is no longer a demand to operate the Excitation system from remotevia the I/O board CIO, this command is used to allow control from an othercontrol board. If there is no request, the control is given the "Default" one"

RemoteIORequestActive Out.OpSel_Remote "Operator selection, remote.RemoteIO Request ActiveThere is a request to operate the Excitation system from remote via the I/Oboard CIO. If no demand with higher priority is existent, the control ischanged to this operator."






ControlAcknowledge Out.OpSel_Remote_CT "Operator selection, remote ECT.Control acknowledge signal

indicates, that the "remote ECT" operator is the active control-section"

ControlReleased Out.OpSel_Remote_CT "Operator selection, remote ECT.Control released signalThe "remote ECT" has set it's "operator released" signal to true ."

ControlStatus Out.OpSel_Remote_CT "Operator selection, remote ECT.Remote ECT status signal:

1 = remote Excitation Control Terminal 1 (ECT 1)2 = remote Excitation Control Terminal 2 (ECT 2)3 = remote Excitation Control Terminal 3 (ECT 3)4 = remote Excitation Control Terminal 4 (ECT 4)"

CT1Active Out.OpSel_Remote_CT "Operator selection, remote ECT.Remote ECT 1 active signal,

indicates, that "Remote ECT 1" is the selected oneout of possible 4"

CT2Active Out.OpSel_Remote_CT "Operator selection, remote ECT.

Remote ECT 2 active signal,indicates, that "Remote ECT 2" is the selected oneout of possible 4"





OperatorBlocked Out.OpSel_Remote_CT Not supported in this SW-release

OperatorSelectControlStatus Out.OpSel_Remote_CT "Operator selection, remote ECT.Operator status signal:






157 3BHS258025 E07 U

RemoteCTActive Out.OpSel_Remote_CT "Operator selection, remote ECT.Remote ECT active signal,

indicates, that one out of maximum 4"Remote ECT" is the active one"

ControlAcknowledge Out.OpSel_Service "Operator selection, service.Control acknowledge signalindicates, that the "service" operator is the active control-section"

RemainingServiceTime Out.OpSel_Service Time to Service Operator Timeout

FaultEarthFaultMonComm Out.Prot_EarthFaultMon "Earth fault monitoring. Alarm event "EFRCommFlt" is createdSignal IRDH communication fault detected(IRDH = Insulation monitoring unit)"

FaultStage1 Out.Prot_EarthFaultMon "Earth fault monitoring. Alarm event "EFRStage1Flt" is createdStage 1 fault is detectedDEFAULT: 150 kOhm"

FaultStage2 Out.Prot_EarthFaultMon "Earth fault monitoring.Trip1 event "EFRStage2Flt" is createdStage 2 fault is detectedDEFAULT: 120 kOhm"

IsoResValue Out.Prot_EarthFaultMon "Earth fault monitoring.Display of the actual resistance (IRDH 275) [kOhm]NOTE: The resistance value will only be displayed if the select device type isset to True and the input device CIO1 or CIO3 is selected."

kΩ

OpenLoopFault Out.Prot_EarthFaultMon "Earth fault monitoring. Alarm event ""EFROpenLoopFlt"" is created"

BinInUsed Out.Prot_ExcTrafoMon "Protection, excitation transformer monitoring.Signal Binary inputs are usedNOTE: Sensor type [3:binary input] has to be selected "

ExcTrafoTemp1 Out.Prot_ExcTrafoMon "Protection, excitation transformer monitoring.Display of the analog input 1 value [°C] of the transformer temperaturemeasurement

NOTE: The flag Enable PT100 input 1 has to be set"ExcTrafoTemp1SensorFault Out.Prot_ExcTrafoMon "Protection, excitation transformer monitoring.

Signal sensor fault of the transformer temperature measurement input 1NOTE: The flag Enable PT100 input 1 has to be set"

ExcTrafoTemp2 Out.Prot_ExcTrafoMon "Protection, excitation transformer monitoring.Display of the analog input 2 value [°C] of the transformer temperaturemeasurementNOTE: The flag Enable PT100 input 2 has to be set"





159 3BHS258025 E07 U

DelayFactor Out.Prot_OverCurrentMon calculated inverse-time k factor

MaxFieldCurrent Out.Prot_OverCurrentMon "Regulator, Field current max. limiter.Display of the actual max. field current value"

MaxValue Out.Prot_OverCurrentMon "Protection, overcurrent monitoring.Display of the stored peak current value [pu]"

Start Out.Prot_OverCurrentMon "Protection, overcurrent monitoring.Signal inverse time integrator has started

1 = normal inv.2 = very inv.3 = extremly inv.

NOTE: The select inverse time function has to be set between 1 and 3"

ThermPos Out.Prot_OverCurrentMon "Protection, overcurrent monitoring.Display of the actual inverse time integrator value [pu]"

FunctionActive Out.Prot_OverVoltageMon "Protection, overvoltage monitoring.Information that the overvoltage monitoring of the active channel is active"

ReferenceValue Out.Prot_PQMon "Protection, PQ monitoring.

Reference value"

AutoResetOnExtTripEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal. Auto Reset on External TripRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableAutoResetOnExtTrip"

AuxSupervisionEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal. Auxiliary MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableAuxSupervision"

ConvFaultDetectionEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Converter Monitoring (Includes Conduction Monitoring)Related parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableConvFaultDetection"

EarthFaultMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Earth Fault MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableEarthFaultMon"

ExcitationTripped Out.Prot_Protection Excitation tripped status signal

ExcTrafoMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Transformer monitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableRotTempMon"

ExternalTrip Out.Prot_Protection "Protection.External system trip signalTrip the event "ExternalTrip" is created"

ExternalTripped Out.Prot_Protection The excitation was tripped by an external trip






ExtSCMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.External Short-Circuit Monitoring

Related parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableExtSCMon"

FireAllTripDetEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.FireAllTrip detectionRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableFireAllTripDet"

GenSCdetectionEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Generator short-circuit detectionRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableGenSCdetection"

IConvMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Converter Current CT MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableIConvMon"

InternalTripped Out.Prot_Protection The excitation was tripped by an internal trip

IntSCMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.External Short-Circuit Monitoring

Related parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableIntSCMon"

MaschineMeasCTMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enable signal.Machine CT MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableMaschineMeasCTMon"

MaschineMeasPTMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enable signal.Machine PT MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableMaschineMeasPTMon"

OverCurrMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Excitation Overcurrent Monitoring DCRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableOverCurrMon"

OverVoltageMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Excitation Overvoltage MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableOverVoltageMon"

PhaseSeqCheckEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Phase Sequence CheckRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnablePhaseSeqCheck"

PowerSupplyMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Power Supply MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnablePowerSupplyMon"

PQMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enable signal.PQ Monitoring (Loss of Excitation)Related parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnablePQMon"





161 3BHS258025 E07 U

RotTempMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Rotor Temperature Monitoring

Related parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableRotTempMon"

S800MonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.S800 Link MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableS800Mon"

StallMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Stall MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableStallMon"

TripIndSupOnExtTripEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Trip Indication Suppression on External TripRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableTripIndSupOnExtTrip"

TripRelaisStatus Out.Prot_Protection Trip relais output status signal

UfMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Field Voltage PT MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableUfMon"

UsynMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enabled status signal.Synchronous Voltage PT MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableUsynMon"

VHzMonEnabled Out.Prot_Protection "Protection, enable signal.V/Hz MonitoringRelated parameter: - Prot_Protection \ EnableVHzMon"

APDGrpFailed Out.Prot_PSU1APDGrp1 "Protection, PSU1/APD Group 1. Alarm event PSU1APD12APDFlt" is created APDGrp1 failedNOTE: The flag Enable APD Group has to be set"

Enable Out.Prot_PSU1APDGrp1 "Protection, PSU1/APD Group 1.Enabled status signalRelated parameter: - Prot_PSU1APDGrp1 \Enable"

APDGrpFailed Out.Prot_PSU1APDGrp2 "Protection, PSU1/APD Group 2. Alarm event PSU1APD34APDFlt" is created APDGrp2 failed

NOTE: The flag Enable APD Group has to be set"

Enable Out.Prot_PSU1APDGrp2 "Protection, PSU1/APD Group 2. APD Group 2 enabled status signalRelated parameter: - Prot_PSU1APDGrp2 \Enable"






DeviceSignalFault Out.Prot_PSU1ICU1 "Protection, PSU1/ICU1. Alarm event "PSU1ICU1SigFlt" is created

Device status signal of the ICU1NOTE: The flag Enable ICU has to be set"

Enable Out.Prot_PSU1ICU1 "Protection, PSU1/ICU1.ICU1 device enabled status signalRelated parameter: - Prot_PSU1ICU1 \Enable"

ICUFault Out.Prot_PSU1ICU1 "Protection, PSU1/ICU1.ICU1 failureNOTE: The flag Enable ICU has to be set"

Source1Failed Out.Prot_PSU1ICU1 "Protection, PSU1/ICU1. Alarm event "PSU1ICU1Src1Flt" is createdPSU1/ICU1 source 1 is below limitNOTE: The flag Enable ICU has to be set"


Source3Failed Out.Prot_PSU1ICU1 "Protection, PSU1/ICU1. Alarm the event "PSU1ICU1Src3Flt" is createdPSU1/ICU1 source 3 is below limitNOTE: The flag Enable ICU has to be set"

DeviceSignalFault Out.Prot_PSU1ICU2 "Protection, PSU1/ICU2. Alarm event "PSU1ICU2SigFlt" is createdDevice status signal of the ICU2NOTE: The flag Enable ICU has to be set"









163 3BHS258025 E07 U

Source3Failed Out.Prot_PSU1ICU2 "Protection, PSU1/ICU2. Alarm event "PSU1ICU2Src3Flt" is created

PSU1/ICU2 source 3 is below limitNOTE: The flag Enable ICU has to be set"

APDGrpFailed Out.Prot_PSU2APDGrp1 "Protection, PSU2/APD Group 1. Alarm event PSU1APD12APDFlt" is created APDGrp1 failedNOTE: The flag Enable APD Group has to be set"

Enable Out.Prot_PSU2APDGrp1 "Protection, PSU2/APD Group 1.Enabled status signalRelated parameter: - Prot_PSU1APDGrp1 \Enable"

APDGrpFailed Out.Prot_PSU2APDGrp2 "Protection, PSU2/APD Group 2. Alarm event "PSU2APD34APDFlt" is created APDGrp2 failedNOTE: The flag Enable APD Group has to be set"

Enable Out.Prot_PSU2APDGrp2 "Protection, PSU2/APD Group 2. APD Group 2 enabled status signal

Related parameter: - Prot_PSU2APDGrp2 \Enable"

DeviceSignalFault Out.Prot_PSU2ICU1 "Protection, PSU2/ICU1. Alarm event "PSU2ICU1SigFlt" is createdDevice status signal of the ICU1NOTE: The flag Enable ICU has to be set"





Source3Failed Out.Prot_PSU2ICU1 "Protection, PSU2/ICU1. Alarm event " PSU2ICU1Src3Flt" is createdPSU2/ICU1 source 3 is below limitNOTE: The flag Enable ICU has to be set"






DeviceSignalFault Out.Prot_PSU2ICU2 "Protection, PSU2/ICU2. Alarm event "PSU2ICU2SigFlt" is created

Device status signal of the ICU2NOTE: The flag Enable ICU has to be set"



Source1Failed Out.Prot_PSU2ICU2 "Protection, PSU2/ICU2. Alarm message, the event "PSU2ICU2Src1Flt" is createdPSU2/ICU2 source 1 is below limitNOTE: The flag Enable ICU has to be set"



IfMeasFailed Out.Prot_RotTempMon Protection, rotor temperature monitoring.If measurement failed

RotRes Out.Prot_RotTempMon "Protection, rotor temperature monitoring.Display of the rotor resistance measurement [mOhm]"

mΩ

RotTemp Out.Prot_RotTempMon "Protection, rotor temperature monitoring.Display of the rotor temperature measurement [°C]"

°C

RotTempFault1 Out.Prot_RotTempMon "Protection, rotor temperature monitoring. Alarm event "RotTempFlt1" is createdTemperature level to detect fault stage 1 [°C]DEFAULT: -65.0 °CNOTE: Select RTM mode [1=OnFaultLevel1] has to be setDEFAULT: 5"

RotTempFault2 Out.Prot_RotTempMon "Protection, rotor temperature monitoring.Trip1 event "RotTempFlt2" is createdTemperature level to detect fault stage 2 [°C]DEFAULT: -65.0 °CNOTE: Select RTM mode [1=OnFaultLevel1] has to be setDEFAULT: 5"





167 3BHS258025 E07 U

RuntimeValue Out.Reg_AVR_SetPt "Regulator, AVR setpoint.Display of the actual runtime value"

Selected_RefInput Out.Reg_AVR_SetPt "Regulator, AVR setpoint.Display of the selected reference input value

1 = AVR,2 = V/HzLim,3 = Softstart,4 = Max. V Lim."

LimiterDelayFactor Out.Reg_AVR_SetPt_VHz_Lim calculated inverse-time k factor

RefVal Out.Reg_AVR_SetPt_VHz_Lim "Regulator, AVR setpoint VHz limiter.Display of the actual reference value"

ActualDETemperature Out.Reg_ColdGas Actual Measured DE Temperature

ActualMaxMeasuredTemperature Out.Reg_ColdGas Actual max measured temperature

ActualNDETemperature Out.Reg_ColdGas Actual Measured NDE Temperature

AnaInputFault Out.Reg_ColdGas "Regulator, cold gas.

Analog input signal fault status for 4..20mA input type Alarm event "ColdgasAnaInFlt" is created"

DEAnaInputFault Out.Reg_ColdGas DE Analog input signal fault status for 4..20mA input type

MaxIfLimCorr Out.Reg_ColdGas "Regulator, cold gas.Maximum If limit correctionDisplay of the actual characteristic IO output"

MaxIgLimCorr Out.Reg_ColdGas "Regulator, cold gas.Maximum Ig limit correctionDisplay of the actual characteristic IO output"

NDEAnaInputFault Out.Reg_ColdGas NDE Analog input signal fault status for 4..20mA input type

CCC_SumPointOut Out.Reg_CrossCurrComp "Regulator, cross current compensation.Output of the CCC which adds to the AVR setpoint"

CCCActive Out.Reg_CrossCurrComp "Regulator, cross current compensation.Cross current compensation enabled status signal and active signal"

CCCAnaInFlt Out.Reg_CrossCurrComp "Regulator, cross current compensation.Signal analog input fault

Alarm event "AnaInFlt" is createdRelated parameters:- Reg_CrossCurrComp \ AnaInFaultOnDelayTime- Reg_CrossCurrComp \ AnaInFaultOffDelayTime"






CCCEnabled Out.Reg_CrossCurrComp Regulator, cross current compensation.Cross current compensation enabled status signal

Related parameters:- Reg_CrossCurrComp \ CrossCurrCompOn- Reg_CrossCurrComp \ CrossCurrCompOff

DelayFactor Out.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim calculated inverse-time k factor

MaxFieldCurrent Out.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim "Regulator, Field current max. limiter.Display of the actual max. field current value"

MaxThermalFieldCurrent Out.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim "Regulator, Field current max. limiter.Display of the actual max. therm. field current value"

ThermalPosition Out.Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim "Regulator, Field current max. limiter.Display of the thermal current integrator position value"

AVRMan_Deviation Out.Reg_Follow_Up "Regulator, follow-up.Status No deviation between AVR and ManualNOTE: The flag disable follow up to AVR/MAN has to be setRelated parameter: - Reg_Follow_Up \ DisableFollowUpToAVRMAN"

AVRMan_Equal Out.Reg_Follow_Up "Regulator, follow-up.Display of the deviation value between AVR and Manual "

Channels_Deviation Out.Reg_Follow_Up "Regulator, follow-up.Status of the None deviation between channelsNOTE: The flag disable follow up to active channel has to be setRelated parameter: - Reg_Follow_Up \ DisableFollowUpToActiveChannel"

Channels_Equal Out.Reg_Follow_Up "Regulator, follow-up.Display of the deviation value between channels"

DirectControlIsOn Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg Regulator, superimposed regulator. Direct Control is active

DischargeIsOn Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.Signal discharge is active"

DischargeIsPreselected Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.Imposed regulator is preselected status signal"

Equal Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.

Follow-up status signal "

FcnActual Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.Superimposed Regulator. Actual Function:

0 = None,1 = Discharge,2 = Var Reg,3 = Power Factor Reg,4 = Spare Reg"





169 3BHS258025 E07 U

ImpRegIsOff Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.Signal that all imposed regulator are off "

NoImpRerPreselected Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.Imposed regulator is preselected status signal"

PowerFactorRegIsOn Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.Power Factor regulator is active"

PowerFactorRegIsPreselected Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.Imposed regulator is preselected status signal"

SpareRegIsOn Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.Spare regulator is activeThis regulator is used for special applications "

SpareRegIsPreselected Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.Imposed regulator is preselected status signal"

VarRegIsOn Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.Var regulator is active"

VarRegIsPreselected Out.Reg_Imposed_Reg "Regulator, superimposed regulator.Imposed regulator is preselected status signal"

AVRPIDOut Out.Reg_Low_High_Gate "Regulator, low high gate.Display of the AVR PID output value"

DirectCtrlPIDOut Out.Reg_Low_High_Gate Regulator, low high gate.Display of the Direct Control PID output value

IfMaxLimPIDOut Out.Reg_Low_High_Gate "Regulator, low high gate.Display of the IfMax limiter PID output value(Overexcitation limiter / Maximum field current limiter)"

IfMinLimPIDOut Out.Reg_Low_High_Gate "Regulator, low high gate.Display of the IfMin limiter PID output value(Underexcitation limiter / Minimum field current limiter)"

IgCapLimPIDOut Out.Reg_Low_High_Gate "Regulator, low high gate.Display of the IgCap limiter PID output value(underexcitation limiter / Stator current limiter underexcited)"

IgIndLimPIDOut Out.Reg_Low_High_Gate "Regulator, low high gate.Display of the IgInd limiter PID output value

(Overexcitation limiter / Stator current limiter overexcited)"

PQLimPIDOut Out.Reg_Low_High_Gate "Regulator, low high gate.Display of the PQ limiter PID output value"






Selected_Input Out.Reg_Low_High_Gate "Regulator, low high gate.Display of the selected input [1 to 7]

1 = AVR2 = MaxStatCurrLim3 = MaxFieldCurrLim,4 = MinStatCurrLim,5 = MinFieldCurrLim,6 = PQLim,7 = DirPf"

Selected_InputValue Out.Reg_Low_High_Gate "Regulator, low high gate.Display of the selected input value [1 to 7]

1 = AVR PID output value2 = IfMax limiter PID output value3 = IfMin limiter PID output value4 = IgCap limiter PID output value5 = IgInd limiter PID output value6 = PQ limiter PID output value7 = Direct Pf PID output value"

ManRestrictRef Out.Reg_Manual_Restrict "Regulator, manual restrict.Display of the limiter reference value If(P)"

ActRefMaxPos Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint.Display of the actual reference setpoint max. position value"

ActRefMinPos Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint.Display of the actual reference setpoint min. position value"

ActRefSetpoint Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt Regulator, manual setpoint.Display of the actual reference setpoint value

ActRefSetpointPos Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint.Display of the actual reference setpoint position value"

EnableLCIRefInput Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt Regulator, manual setpoint.Enables the LCI reference input to the manual regulator

ExtRefActive Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint.Signal external reference is active"

ExtRefReady Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint.Signal external reference is ready(Ready for switchover to external reference)"

ManualRegulatorReference Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint.Display of the actual regulator reference value"

MaxSetpoint_Reached Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint.Max reference integrator value reached status signal"





171 3BHS258025 E07 U

MinSetpoint_Reached Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint.Min reference integrator value reached status signal"

PresetSetpoint_Reached Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint.Signal that the actual reference integrator value=preset value"

RuntimeValue Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint.Display of the actual runtime value"

Selected_RefInput Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint.Display of the selection from the selected reference input [1 to 4]

1 = Setpoint,2 = PQLim,3 = V/HzLim,4 = Softstart"

ActualLCIRefVal Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt_LCISetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint LCI setpoint.LCI setpoint input. Display of the actual scaled LCI reference value"

AnaInputFault Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt_LCISetPt "Regulator, manual setpoint LCI setpoint. Analog input signal fault status for 2..10V or 4..20mA input type Alarm event "LCIAnaInFlt" is created

NOTE: Select analog input type: [True=2..10V or 4..20mA, False=0..10V or0..20mA]Related parameters:- Reg_Manual_SetPt_LCISetPt \ SelectAnaInputType- Reg_Manual_SetPt_LCISetPt \ EnableAnaInputSignal- Reg_Manual_SetPt_LCISetPt \ EnableAnaInFaultDetection"

LimiterDelayFactor Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt_VHz_Lim calculated inverse-time k factor

RefVal Out.Reg_Manual_SetPt_VHz_Lim "Regulator, manual setpoint VHz limiter.V/Hz limiter. Display of the actual reference value"

ActRefMaxPos Out.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, power factor regulator setpoint.Display of the actual reference setpoint max. position value"

ActRefMinPos Out.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, power factor regulator setpoint.Display of the actual reference setpoint min. position value"

ActRefSetpoint Out.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, power factor regulator setpoint.Display of the actual reference setpoint value"

ActRefSetpointPos Out.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, power factor regulator setpoint.Display of the actual reference setpoint position value"

ExtRefActive Out.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, power factor regulator setpoint.Signal external reference is active"

ExtRefReady Out.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, power factor regulator setpoint.Signal external reference is ready(Ready for switchover to external reference)"






MaxSetpoint_Reached Out.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, power factor regulator setpoint.Min reference integrator value reached signal"

MinSetpoint_Reached Out.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, power factor regulator setpoint.Max reference integrator value reached signal"

PresetSetpoint_Reached Out.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, power factor regulator setpoint.Signal that the actual reference integrator value=preset value"

QSetpoint Out.Reg_PF_Reg_SetPt Q Setpoint value

PQLimRef Out.Reg_PQ_Lim "Regulator, PQ limiter.Display of the limiter reference value Q(P)"

ActualTestSignal Out.Reg_PSS "Regulator, PSS.Display of the actual test signal value after scalling"

PSSActive Out.Reg_PSS "Regulator, PSS.PSS is active status signal"

PSSActual Out.Reg_PSS "Regulator, PSS.Display of the PSS output value after release"

PSSOn Out.Reg_PSS "Regulator, PSS.

PSS is enabled and not blocked status signalStatus: If TRUE PSS algorithm is processed and PSS function is selected.Connect to spare digital output if status is required for remote indication.Related parameters:- Reg_PSS \ PSSOn- Reg_PSS \ PSSOffNOTE: Only if PSSOn=TRUE, then PSS loop is in operation."

Actualdwtest Out.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B "Regulator, PSS IEEE 2B.Display of the actual dw test signal value after scaling"

ActualPetest Out.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B "Regulator, PSS IEEE 2B.Display of the actual Pe test signal value after scaling"

TestPoint1 Out.Reg_PSS_IEEE_2B "Regulator, PSS IEEE 2B.Display of the test point value 1. Reference see function description"











ExtRefReady Out.Reg_Var_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, Var regulator setpoint.Signal external reference is ready

(Ready for switchover to external reference)"

MaxSetpoint_Reached Out.Reg_Var_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, Var regulator setpoint.Min reference integrator value reached status signal"

MinSetpoint_Reached Out.Reg_Var_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, Var regulator setpoint.Max reference integrator value reached status signal"

PresetSetpoint_Reached Out.Reg_Var_Reg_SetPt "Regulator, Var regulator setpoint.Signal that the actual reference integrator value=preset value"

ActiveChannelStatus Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Information that this channel is the active channel"

AsyncMachineSpeed Out.SM_StateMachine SM state machine. Asynchronous machine speed

AsyncStartExcOnSeqActive Out.SM_StateMachine Asynchronous motor start excitation-on sequence active status

AutoChannelChangeOverFlt Out.SM_StateMachine Channel changeover was not successful

BootParameterMismatch Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine. Boot parameter status.False=All boot parameters are stored to the flash, True=Some boot

parameters are not yet stored to the flash. Go to the Configuration sequencein order to store them to theflash."

BreakingExcOnSeqActive Out.SM_StateMachine SM state machine.The Breaking Excitation-On sequence is Active.

BUMCS_StateNumber Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Backup channel state machine state number"

Channel1Active Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Channel 1 is active"

Channel2Active Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Channel 2 is active"

ChannelActive Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Information that this channel is the active channel"

Discharged Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Q-discharged finished"

ExcitationIsOn Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Excitation is On status signal"

ExcOnTimeoutFault Out.SM_StateMachine The duration of the Excitation ON-Sequence was longer than expected

ExcStartupBlocked Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Excitation Startup is blocked"

FaultStage1 Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine. Alarm event "ConvRed1Flt" is createdConverter fault stage fault 1"





175 3BHS258025 E07 U

FaultStage2 Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine. Alarm event "ConvRed1Flt" is created

Converter fault stage fault 2"



FFTimeoutFault Out.SM_StateMachine SM state machine.Field flashing timed out

FieldFlashingActive Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Field Flashing is active"

ForcedChannel Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Channel is forcedRelated parameter:- SM_StateMachine \ ForceChannel1- SM_StateMachine \ ForceChannel2- SM_StateMachine \ ForceBackup"

ForcedManual Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Channel is forced manualRelated parameter: - SM_StateMachine \ ForceManual"

LCIStartExcOnSeqActive Out.SM_StateMachine SM state machine.The LCI-Start Excitation-On sequence is Active.

LineChargingExcOnSeqActive Out.SM_StateMachine SM state machine.The LineCharging Excitation-On sequence is Active.

MANCtrlEnabled Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Manual control is enabled"

MCS_StateNumber Out.SM_StateMachine SM state machine. Auto/Manual control state number

NormalExcOnSeqActive Out.SM_StateMachine SM state machine.The Normal Excitation-On sequence is active.

OCMCS_StateNumber Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Other channel state machine state number"

OnBus Out.SM_StateMachine The Machine is connected to the Plant-internal BUS

OnLine Out.SM_StateMachine The Machine is connected to the grid

ReadyForAsyncStart Out.SM_StateMachine SM state machine. Asynchronous machine start. Ready for asynchronousstart.

Reset Out.SM_StateMachine Reset feedback






Service_Enabled Out.SM_StateMachine Operator state "Service" is enabled

SlipFrequency Out.SM_StateMachine SM state machine. Asynchronous machine slip frequency

SM_StateNumber Out.SM_StateMachine "SM state machine.Channel state machine state number"

Spare01_Analog Out.SM_StateMachine Spare Analog Value for ECT

Spare01_Digital Out.SM_StateMachine Spare Digital Value for ECT









WaitTrip Out.SM_StateMachine Status of WaitTrip (Trip2) for indirect Trip by external TripRelease

AuxOffSquenceWait Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [150 Aux Off Sequence]The Aux Off sequence opens field circuit breaker (FCB) and stops thecooling system (if applicable)."

AuxOn Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [200 AUX ON State]The FCB is closed and the cooling system is running. The system is ready forthe excitation process."

AuxOnSeqWait Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [190 Aux On Sequence]The Aux On sequence starts the cooling system (if applicable) and closes thefield circuit breaker (FCB)."

AuxOnTest Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bitThe test states are used to switch the excitation system into test mode.They are not yet implemented."

AuxReady Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [100 AUX READY State]The excitation system is configured correctly, controller is running and nofault is pending.System is ready to be started."





177 3BHS258025 E07 U

AuxReadyTest Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit

The test states are used to switch the excitation system into test mode.They are not yet implemented."

ConfigSeqWait Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [30 Configuration Sequence]The configuration sequence is used to update the configuration parametersof the system:- Excitation system name- Channel configuration- I/O configuration- Converter configuration."

DischargeSeqWait Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [380 Discharge Sequence]Discharging the generator / motor system, i.e. bringing the reactive power tozero.Generator / motor remains on grid."

EmergencyStopSeqWait Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [170 Emergency Stop Sequence]

The Emergency Stop sequence shuts down the excitation system by:- Opening the Field Breaker and Field Flash Breaker- Blocking pulses- Stopping the cooling system- Blocking and pre-setting the regulators."

ExcOffSeqWait Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [250 Excitation Off Sequence]The Excitation Off sequence sets the converter to inverter mode and, afterapproximately 60 seconds, blocks the pulses."

ExcOnSeqWait Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [290 Excitation On Sequence]In generator mode, the Excitation On sequence leads the generator to theexcited state where it is ready for synchronization with the grid.It builds up generator voltage and field current.- first by firing all thyristors in pure rectifier mode to utilize the generatorremanence and then by

- ramping the generator voltage and field current in controlled 6-pulse mode(soft start) up to nominal

OffState Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [10 OFF State]Excitation system is de-energized, controller power is off.System is ready for power-up."






Oninhibit Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [40 ON INHIBIT State]

After a fault has been cleared, the excitation system remains in the ONINHIBIT state until the Trip is reset manually. After the reset, the system moves to the AUX READY state."

Operation Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [400 OPERATION State]The generator is on grid / the motor is running and the excitation system infull operation according to the setpoints. The voltage is now regulated andthe generator can produce active and reactive power depending on thesetpoints."

OperationOnSeqWait Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [390 Operation On Sequence]Releasing of limiters and superimposed regulators if the generator issynchronized to the grid."

OperationTest Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bitThe test states are used to switch the excitation system into test mode.They are not yet implemented."

Ready Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [300 READY State]The generator / motor is excited and ready for synchronizing."

ReadyTest Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bitThe test states are used to switch the excitation system into test mode.They are not yet implemented."

StopSequenceWait Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [360 Stop Sequence]Disable discharging and freeze regulators.Generator is off grid (opening the generator)."

Tripped Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [70 TRIPPED State]

After a Trip the excitation system remains in the TRIPPED state until the faultis cleared.

After the fault clearing, the system switches to the ON INHIBIT state."TripSeqWait Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [80 Trip Sequence]The Trip sequence shuts down the excitation system by:- Opening the Field Breaker and Field Flash Breaker- Blocking pulses- Disabling the cooling system- Blocking and pre-setting the regulators."





179 3BHS258025 E07 U

WaitStop Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [370 WAIT STOP State]

The generator / motor is discharged and kept to Q = 0 MVAr but stillconnected to the grid. By means of the Discharge Off command, the systemcan be brought back to OPERATION state."

WaitTrip Out.SM_StateMachine.SM_States "SM states.State machine status activity bit [90 WAIT TRIP State]The WAIT TRIP is attained if a Trip 2 is active. In case of a Trip 2, the Tripsequence must be released with an external command.On the other hand, a Trip 1 will immediately start the Trip sequence, even ifthe generator is on grid."

ActivatedSWFunctions Out.Sys_Diagnosis Activated software functions

Bit 0: PSS4BBit 1: APSSBit 2: White Noise test generation

ExcOnCounter Out.Sys_Diagnosis Diagnosis. Actual number of ExcOn

ExtTripCounter Out.Sys_Diagnosis Diagnosis. Actual number of external Trips On-Line

FCB1TripCounter Out.Sys_Diagnosis Diagnosis. Actual number of Breaker1 Trips



IntTripCounter Out.Sys_Diagnosis Diagnosis. Actual number of internal Trips On-Line

OELimCounter Out.Sys_Diagnosis Diagnosis. Actual number of OE Limiter actions

OnlineRunningTimeDays Out.Sys_Diagnosis Diagnosis. Online running time in Days

OnlineRunningTimeSeconds Out.Sys_Diagnosis Diagnosis. Online running time in Seconds

UELimCounter Out.Sys_Diagnosis Diagnosis. Actual number of UE Limiter actions

ActualParameterSet Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem Actual parameter set number

ChannelActive Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Information that this channel is the active channel"

CITEngineeringVersionNumber Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.CIT engineering version number"

CITReleaseVersionNumber Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.CIT release version number"






IsChannel1 Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.The status signal shows if channel 1 is active

TRUE = Ch1FALSE = not ch1"

IsChannelBUSys Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Channel configuration status bit defines which converter configurations isselected

TRUE = Ch1 & BFCR or Ch1 & Ch2 & BFCRFALSE = Ch1 or Ch1 & Ch2

Related parameter: - Sys_ExcitationSystem \ ChannelConfigWordNOTE: Channel configuration word [2=Ch1 & BFCR]"

IsOneChannelSys Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Channel configuration status bit defines which converter configurations isselected

TRUE = Ch1FALSE = not Ch1

Related parameter: - Sys_ExcitationSystem \ ChannelConfigWordNOTE: Channel configuration word [1=Ch1]"

IsThreeChannelSys Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.

Channel configuration status bit defines which converter configurations isselected

TRUE = Ch1 or Ch1 & Ch2 and BFCRFALSE = Ch1 or Ch1 & Ch2

Related parameter: - Sys_ExcitationSystem \ ChannelConfigWordNOTE: Channel configuration word [4=Ch1 & Ch2 and BFCR]"

IsTwoChannelSys Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Channel configuration status bit defines which converter configurations isselected

TRUE = Ch1 & Ch2 or Ch1 & BFCRFALSE = Ch1 or Ch1 & Ch2 and BFCR

Related parameter: - Sys_ExcitationSystem \ ChannelConfigWordNOTE: Channel configuration word [2=Ch1 & BFCR] or [3=Ch1 & Ch2]"

LastSaveToFlashTime Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem Time stamp of last successful Save to Flash

LowerCeilingFactor Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Feedback signal lower ceiling factor derived from parameter settings"

ParSaveToFlashOK Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Saving to flash of the particular channel Ch1, Ch2, or BFCR was successfulRelated parameter: - Sys_ExcitationSystem \ SaveParToFlash"

ReleaseRebootCommand Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Release reboot command signal"

SoftwareVersionCCM Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.CCM software version number"





181 3BHS258025 E07 U

SoftwareVersionCCMBackup Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.CCM backup software version number"

SoftwareVersionCIT Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Display of the software version number"

SoftwareVersionOCPEC800 Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.OPCPEC800 software version number"

SoftwareVersionPEC800 Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.PEC800 software version number"

SubNetId Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Display of the subnetwork ID"

SysId Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Display of the system ID"

SystemTime Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Display of the system time"

UpperCeilingFactor Out.Sys_ExcitationSystem "System excitation system.Feedback signal upper ceiling factor derived from parameter settings"

SlowCommMonRamp SlowCommMonRamp Slow ramp-up signal for CT communication Monitoring. This signal is

incremented by the ECT every 1.5 seconds by default.

INT



ABB

UNITROL® 6800 Alarm and Event List


Revision Status Rev. -

Date 11 / 2010

Software Release v3.0.00



ABB

2 3BHS258033 E07 UNITROL 6800 Alarm and Event List

Display events on the ECT (Excitation Control Terminal):

Touch Events

The Event Logger contains a table with the last 1000 entries. As soon as this windowis selected, an automatic upload will start. If a new entry occurs, the panel reads thisout of the UNITROL System and the table will automatically be updated.

Dynamic list of actualevents

Event logger table



ABBEvents

Name ID Type Descript ion

3 3BHS258033 E07 U

ThyrFlt_Rp_CCI1 20000 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Rp Fault: The monitoring of Converter 1 has detected a non conducting thyristor

Possible reasons:

- Pulse cable broken- Thyristor faulty- Gate driver interface card (UN S0881) faulty- Pulse card (PC D231) faulty- Current transformer faulty (Pos&Neg thyristor at same time)

Default reaction:N-1

- Converter redundancy faultTwin

- Converter Trip

Related parameters:Prot_ConvFaultDetect \ TFCDthresholdTFFDthresholdTFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----

ThyrFlt_Tn_CCI1 20001 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Tn Fault: The monitoring of Converter 1 has detected a non conducting thyristor

Possible reasons:- Pulse cable broken- Thyristor faulty- Gate driver interface card (UN S0881) faulty- Pulse card (PC D231) faulty- Current transformer faulty (Pos&Neg thyristor at same time)



- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


4 3BHS258033 E07

ThyrFlt_Sp_CCI1 20002 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Sp Fault: The monitoring of Converter 1 has detected a non conducting thyristor

Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----

ThyrFlt_Rn_CCI1 20003 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Rn Fault: The monitoring of Converter 1 has detected a non conducting thyristor




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


5 3BHS258033 E07

ThyrFlt_Tp_CCI1 20004 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Tp Fault: The monitoring of Converter 1 has detected a non conducting thyristor

Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----

ThyrFlt_Sn_CCI1 20005 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Sn Fault: The monitoring of Converter 1 has detected a non conducting thyristor




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


6 3BHS258033 E07

FuseFlt_Rp_CCI1 20006 Alarm CCI1. Fuse Rp Fault: Branch Fuse Rp faulty

Possible reasons:

- high current due to internal short circuit (thyristor lost blocking capability)- high current due to external short circuit (short circuit at DC-side of converter)



- Converter Trip


Further steps:----

FuseFlt_Tn_CCI1 20007 Alarm CCI1. Fuse Tn Fault: Branch Fuse Tn faulty

Possible reasons:- high current due to internal short circuit (thyristor lost blocking capability)- high current due to external short circuit (short circuit at DC-side of converter)



- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


7 3BHS258033 E07

FuseFlt_Sp_CCI1 20008 Alarm CCI1. Fuse Sp Fault: Branch Fuse Sp faulty

Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----

FuseFlt_Rn_CCI1 20009 Alarm CCI1. Fuse Rn Fault: Branch Fuse Rn faulty

Possible reasons:- high current due to internal short circuit (thyristor lost blocking capability)- high current due to external short circuit (short circuit at DC-side of converter)



- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


8 3BHS258033 E07

FuseFlt_Tp_CCI1 20010 Alarm CCI1. Fuse Tp Fault: Branch Fuse Tp faulty

Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----

FuseFlt_Sn_CCI1 20011 Alarm CCI1. Fuse Sn Fault: Branch Fuse Sn faulty

Possible reasons:- High current due to internal short circuit (thyristor lost blocking capability)- High current due to external short circuit (short circuit at DC-side of converter)



- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


9 3BHS258033 E07

TOCD_R_CCI1 20012 Alarm CCI1. Overcurrent in Phase R detected

Possible reasons:

- High current due to internal short circuit (thyristor lost blocking capability)- High current due to external short circuit (short circuit at DC-side of converter)


- Converter alarmTwin

- Converter alarm

Related parameters:Prot_ConvFaultDetect \ TOCDthreshold

Further steps:----

TOCD_S_CCI1 20013 Alarm CCI1. Overcurrent in Phase S detected

Possible reasons:- High current due to internal short circuit (thyristor lost blocking capability)

- High current due to external short circuit (short circuit at DC-side of converter)



- Converter alarm


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


10 3BHS258033 E07

TOCD_T_CCI1 20014 Alarm CCI1. Overcurrent in Phase T detected

Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----

UfOpCeil_CCI1 20015 Alarm CCI1. Field Voltage measurement failure

Possible reasons:- Operation amplifier blocked at ceiling level



- Converter alarm

Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ UfEnaOpAmpCeilMon

Further steps:----

DevTypeErr_CCI1 20016 Alarm CCI1. Device Type Error

Possible reasons:- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (OM2 Link 1)- Wrong installer archive loaded to CCI 1

Default reaction:- Converter Trip

Related parameters:----

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


11 3BHS258033 E07

AddressErr_CCI1 20017 Alarm CCI1. Address Error

Possible reasons:

- Wrong HEX Switch setting at CCI 1



Further steps:----

LinkFault_CCI1 20018 Alarm CCI1. Link Fault detected by AC 800PEC

Possible reasons:- Optical link cabling to CCI interrupted (OM2 Link 1)- PowerLink Watchdog (>3 Link cycles (100 us) no telegram received)- PowerLink Frame Error (4 consecutive telegrams corrupt)



Further steps:- Check optical link cabling to CCI

RedPwrFail1_CCI1 20019 Alarm CCI1. Redundant Power 1 fail

Possible reasons:- Power supply fault at input 1 (X1:1-2)

Default reaction:- Converter Redundancy Fault


Further steps:

- Check cabling and power supply



ABBEvents


13 3BHS258033 E07

UfFreeze_CCI1 20023 Alarm CCI1. Field Voltage measurement failure

Possible reasons:

- Operation amplifier blocked (frozen)- ADC failure

Default reaction:- Converter Alarm

Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ UfEnaADCFreezeMon

Further steps:- Replace board

USynInPhase_CCI1 20024 Alarm CCI1. Synchronous Voltage measurement failure

Possible reasons:- One Phase of the AC-connection lost


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ UsynEnaInPhaseMon

Further steps:- Check cabling

USynOpCeil_CCI1 20025 Alarm CCI1. Synchronous Voltage measurement failure



Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ UsynEnaOpAmpCeilMon




ABBEvents


14 3BHS258033 E07

USynFreeze_CCI1 20026 Alarm CCI1. Synchronous Voltage measurement failure

Possible reasons:



Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ UsynEnaADCFreezeMon


USynAllLost_CCI1 20027 Alarm CCI1. Synchronous Voltage measurement failure

Possible reasons:- Two or all three connections lost


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ UsynEnaAllLostMon


SelfTrip_CCI1 20028 Alarm CCI1. Link Fault detected by CCI

Possible reasons:- Optical link cabling to CCI interrupted (OM2 Link 1)



Further steps:- Check optical link cabling to AC 800PEC



ABBEvents


15 3BHS258033 E07

AdvFuseBlow_CCI1 20029 Alarm CCI1. Advanced fuse blow procedure detected faulty branch. Fault clearing by Fire all pulses

Possible reasons:

- Internal short circuit at a TWIN configuration (Cold Standby)


Related parameters:Conv_ConverterSystem1 \ EnableColdStandbyEnableAdvancedFuseBlown

Further steps:- Check thyristors- Check fuses

IConvOpCeil_CCI1 20030 Alarm CCI1. Converter Current measurement failure

Possible reasons:- Operation amplifier blocked (frozen)- ADC failure


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ IconvEnaADCFreezeMon


IConvFreeze_CCI1 20031 Alarm CCI1. Converter Current measurement failure


Default reaction:- Converter TRIP

Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ IconvEnaOpAmpCeilMon




ABBEvents


16 3BHS258033 E07

CoolingFailure_CCI1 20032 Alarm CCI1. Cooling failure

Possible reasons:

- The configured cooling system does not work sufficiently- Pressure sensor defective- Dirty filters


Related parameters:Conv_ConverterSystem1 \ CoolingTypeConfigWord

Further steps:- Replace fan(s)- Clean air inlet filters- Replace pressure sensor

Fan1Supply1Flt_CCI1 20033 Alarm CCI1. Fan 1 Supply 1 fault

Possible reasons:- Fan 1 defective

- Supply 1 missing- Pressure sensor defective- Dirty filters

Default reaction:- Converter Redundancy fault

Related parameters:Conv_ConverterSystem1 \ CoolingTypeConfigWordCoolingSupplyTypeConfigWord

Further steps:- Replace fan- Check supply voltage (HW-schematic page 410)- Clean air inlet filters- Replace pressure sensor



ABBEvents


17 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Fan 1 defective- Supply 2 missing- Pressure sensor defective- Dirty filters




Fan2Supply1Flt_CCI1 20035 AlarmCCI1. Fan 2 Supply 1 fault

Possible reasons:- Fan 2 defective- Supply 1 missing- Pressure sensor defective- Dirty filters






ABBEvents


18 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:





MCB1Fault_CCI1 20037 AlarmCCI1. Fan Supply Miniature Circuit Breaker 1 fault




Further steps:- Replace fan (HW-schematic page 410)- Re-check cabling



ABBEvents


19 3BHS258033 E07

MCB2Fault_CCI1 20038 Alarm CCI1. Fan Supply Miniature Circuit Breaker 2 fault

Possible reasons:

- Fan 2 defective




ThyrTemp1Lev1Fl_CCI1 20039 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Rp Case Temperature above alarm level(Alarm level = Fault level -10°K)

Possible reasons:- Insufficient cooling- High ambient temperature

Default reaction:- Converter alarm

Related parameters:Conv_ConverterSystem1 \ ThyrCaseTempAlarmLevelConverterTempMeasConfigWord

Further steps:- Reduce excitation current to prevent overtemperature fault level- Clean air inlet filters



ABBEvents


20 3BHS258033 E07

ThyrTemp2Lev1Fl_CCI1 20040 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Tn Case Temperature above alarm level(Alarm level = Fault level -10°K)





ThyrTemp3Lev1Fl_CCI1 20041 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Sp Case Temperature above alarm level(Alarm level = Fault level -10°K)

Possible reasons:

- Insufficient cooling- High ambient temperature






ABBEvents


21 3BHS258033 E07

ThyrTemp4Lev1Fl_CCI1 20042 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Rn Case Temperature above alarm level(Alarm level = Fault level -10°K)





ThyrTemp5Lev1Fl_CCI1 20043 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Tp Case Temperature above alarm level(Alarm level = Fault level -10°K)

Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


22 3BHS258033 E07

ThyrTemp6Lev1Fl_CCI1 20044 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Sn Case Temperature above alarm level(Alarm level = Fault level -10°K)





Ai rTemp1Lev1Flt_CCI1 20045 Alarm CCI1. Air Temperature 1 ( Thyristor Cooler Input ) above alarm level(Alarm level = Fault level -10°K)

Possible reasons:



Related parameters:Conv_ConverterSystem1 \ AirTemp1AlarmLevelConverterTempMeasConfigWord




ABBEvents


23 3BHS258033 E07

Ai rTemp2Lev1Flt_CCI1 20046 Alarm CCI1. Air Temperature 2 ( Air outlet chimney ) above alarm level(Alarm level = Fault level -10°K)

Possible reasons:- Insufficient cooling- High ambient temperature- Snubber control not working




ThyrTemp1SensFl_CCI1 20047 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Rp Case Temperature Sensor fault

Possible reasons:

- Sensor circuit open >156°C- Sensor circuit shorten < -13°C


Related parameters:Conv_ConverterSystem1 \ ConverterTempMeasConfigWord

Further steps:- Re-check sensor circuit

ThyrTemp2SensFl_CCI1 20048 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Tn Case Temperature Sensor fault

Possible reasons:- Sensor circuit open >156°C- Sensor short-circuit < -13°C






ABBEvents


24 3BHS258033 E07

ThyrTemp3SensFl_CCI1 20049 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Sp Case Temperature Sensor fault

Possible reasons:





ThyrTemp4SensFl_CCI1 20050 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Rn Case Temperature Sensor fault

Possible reasons:- Sensor circuit open >156°C- Sensor circuit shorten < -13°C




ThyrTemp5SensFl_CCI1 20051 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Tp Case Temperature Sensor fault







ABBEvents


25 3BHS258033 E07

ThyrTemp6SensFl_CCI1 20052 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Sn Case Temperature Sensor fault

Possible reasons:





Ai rTemp1SensFlt_CCI1 20053 Alarm CCI1. Air Temperature 1 Sensor fault












ABBEvents


26 3BHS258033 E07

SnubberSwiFlt_CCI1 20055 Alarm CCI1. Snubber Switch fault

Possible reasons:

- IGBT Switch defective- Optical snubber command/feedback mismatch


- Converter alarmTWIN

- Converter Trip

Related parameters:Conv_ConverterSystem1 \ ConverterTypeConfigWord


SnubberFuseFlt_CCI1 20056 Alarm CCI1. Snubber Fuse fault

Possible reasons:----

Default reaction:----


Further steps:----

ThyristorFuseFl_CCI1 20057 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Fuse fault

Possible reasons:- Digital input for fuse supervision activated



Further steps:- Check and replace faulty thyristors- Check and replace blown fuses



ABBEvents


27 3BHS258033 E07

DoorFlt_CCI1 20058 Alarm CCI1. Converter cabinet Door fault

Possible reasons:

- Digital input for open door activated



Further steps:- Close converter cabinet door

VersionFlt_CCI1 20059 Alarm CCI1. Software Version fault

Possible reasons:- Wrong converter interface SW version


Related parameters:

----

Further steps:- Download required software version

NegConvFault_CCI1 20060 Alarm CCI1. NegConvFault_CCI1

Possible reasons:- The DI 12 signal of Converter I/O does not match converter configuration


Related parameters:Conv_ConverterSystem1 \ ConverterNegCurrConfigWord

Further steps:- Re-check HW input



ABBEvents


28 3BHS258033 E07

PulseBlockFault_CCI1 20061 Alarm CCI1. PulseBlock_CCI1 of HW

Possible reason:

- Pulse blocking via DI 6- Pulse blocking via DI 5 not alive

Default reaction:- Converter trip


Further steps:- Re-check of HW input

TestPosition_CCI1 20062 Information CCI1. TestPosition_CCI1

Possible reasons:- The Converter is in Test Position

Default reaction:- none / information event only

Related parameters:- none

Further steps:----

Event2_31_CCI1 20063 Information CCI event Not usable for engineering

ThyrTemp1Lev2Fl_CCI1 20064 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Rp Case Temperature above trip level




Further steps:- Reduce excitation current immediately to prevent overtemperature fault of the other converters (n-1)- Clean air inlet filters



ABBEvents


29 3BHS258033 E07

ThyrTemp2Lev2Fl_CCI1 20065 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Tn Case Temperature above trip level

Possible reasons:





ThyrTemp3Lev2Fl_CCI1 20066 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Sp Case Temperature above trip level





ThyrTemp4Lev2Fl_CCI1 20067 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Rn Case Temperature above trip level







ABBEvents


30 3BHS258033 E07

ThyrTemp5Lev2Fl_CCI1 20068 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Tp Case Temperature above trip level

Possible reasons:





ThyrTemp6Lev2Fl_CCI1 20069 Alarm CCI1. Thyristor Sn Case Temperature above trip level





Ai rTemp1Lev2Flt_CCI1 20070 Alarm CCI1. Air Temperature 1 ( Thyristor Cooler Input ) above fault level







ABBEvents


31 3BHS258033 E07

Ai rTemp2Lev2Flt_CCI1 20071 Alarm CCI1. Air Temperature 2 ( Air outlet chimney ) above fault level

Possible reasons:

- Insufficient cooling- High ambient temperature- Snubber control not working




StbyCoolingFlt_CCI1 20072 Alarm CCI1. Standby cooling fault

Possible reasons:- Standby cooling duty cycle >10%

- Standby cooling on for longer than 600s



Further steps:- Clean air inlet filters

EmergCoolingOn_CCI1 20073 Alarm CCI1. Emergency Cooling On

Possible reasons:- Converter outlet temperature was >120ºC




Event3_10_CCI1 20074 Information CCI event. Not usable for engineering




ABBEvents


33 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Pulse cable broken- Thyristor faulty- Gate driver interface card (UN S0881) faulty- Pulse card (PC D231) faulty- Current transformer faulty (Pos & Neg thyristor at same time)



- Converter Trip

Related parameters:Prot_ConvFaultDetect \ TFCDthresholdTFFDthreshold

TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


34 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


35 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


36 3BHS258033 E07

FuseFlt_Rp_CCI2 20106 Alarm CCI2. Fuse Rp Fault: Branch Fuse Rp blown

Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


37 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


38 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


TFFDnumOfPeriods

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


39 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----






- Converter alarm


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


40 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


41 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----










Further steps:




ABBEvents


42 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Power supply fault at input 2 (X2:1-2)


Related parameters:Prot_PowerSupplyMon \ EnableRedundantSupply

Further steps:- Check cabling and power supply

PrciPwrFail_CCI2 20121 Alarm CCI2. Precision Power fail

Possible reasons:- Internal power fail on CCI- Both power supply inputs are missing



Further steps:- Check cabling and power supply- Replace board

CPUWatchdog_CCI2 20122 Alarm CCI2. CPU Watchdog

Possible reasons:- CPU failure- Simulink application not running



Further steps:- Reboot device- Download installer archive- Replace board



ABBEvents


43 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


44 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


45 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


46 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:













ABBEvents


47 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Fan 1 defective- Supply 2 missing- pressure sensor defective- Dirty filters











ABBEvents


48 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


49 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Fan 2 defective











ABBEvents


50 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


51 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


52 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


53 3BHS258033 E07

Ai rTemp2Lev1Flt_CCI2 20146 Alarm CCI2. Air Temperature 2 ( Air outlet chimmey ) above alarm level(Alarm level = Fault level -10°K)






Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


54 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


55 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


56 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip







Further steps:----








ABBEvents


57 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:








Related parameters:

----









ABBEvents


58 3BHS258033 E07

PulseBlockFault_CCI2 20161 Alarm CCI2. PulseBlock_CCI2 by hardware

Possible reasons:









Further steps:----









ABBEvents


59 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


60 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


61 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




















ABBEvents


62 3BHS258033 E07























ABBEvents


63 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


64 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----


Possible reasons:- Pulse cable broken- Thyristor faulty- Gate driver interface card (UN S0881) faulty- Pulse card (PC D231) faulty- Current transformer faulty (Pos & Neg thyristor at same time)



- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


65 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


66 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


67 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


68 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


69 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----






- Converter alarm


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


70 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


71 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----










Further steps:




ABBEvents


72 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


73 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


74 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


75 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


76 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:













ABBEvents


77 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


78 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


79 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Fan 2 defective











ABBEvents


80 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


81 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


82 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


83 3BHS258033 E07

Ai rTemp2Lev1Flt_CCI3 20246 Alarm CCI3. Air Temperature 2 ( Air outlet chimmey ) above alarm level(Alarm level = Fault level -10°K)






Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


84 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


85 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


86 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip







Further steps:----








ABBEvents


87 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:








Related parameters:

----



Possible reasons:- The DI12 signal of Converter I/O does not match converter configuration






ABBEvents


88 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:









Further steps:----









ABBEvents


89 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


90 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


91 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:











EmergCoolingOn_CCI3 20273 Alarm CCI3 Emergency Cooling On









ABBEvents


92 3BHS258033 E07























ABBEvents


93 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


94 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


95 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


96 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- High current due to internal short circuit (thyristor lost blocking capability)- High current due to external short circuit (short circuit at DC-side of converter) Default reaction



- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


97 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


98 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


99 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----






- Converter alarm


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


100 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


101 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----










Further steps:




ABBEvents


102 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


103 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


104 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


105 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


106 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:













ABBEvents


107 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Fan 1 defective- Supply 2 missing- Pressure sensor defective- dirty filters











ABBEvents


108 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


109 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Fan 2 defective











ABBEvents


110 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


111 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


112 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


113 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


114 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


115 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


116 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip







Further steps:----








ABBEvents


117 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:








Related parameters:

----









ABBEvents


118 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:









Further steps:----









ABBEvents


119 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


120 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


121 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




















ABBEvents


122 3BHS258033 E07























ABBEvents


123 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


124 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


125 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


126 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


127 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


128 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


129 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----






- Converter alarm


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


130 3BHS258033 E07

TOCD_T_CCI5 20414 Alarm CCI5. Overcurrent in Phase T deteced

Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


131 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----










Further steps:




ABBEvents


132 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


133 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


134 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


135 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


136 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:













ABBEvents


137 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


138 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


139 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Fan 2 defective











ABBEvents


140 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


141 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


142 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


143 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


144 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


145 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


146 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip







Further steps:----








ABBEvents


147 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:








Related parameters:

----



Possible reasons:- The DI 12 signal of Converter I/O does not match to converter configuration






ABBEvents


148 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:









Further steps:----









ABBEvents


149 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


150 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


151 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




















ABBEvents


153 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


154 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


155 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


156 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


157 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


158 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


159 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----






- Converter alarm


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


160 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


161 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----










Further steps:




ABBEvents


162 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:






Possible reasons:- Internal power fail on CCI- Both pover supply inputs are missing











ABBEvents


163 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


164 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


165 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


166 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:













ABBEvents


167 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


168 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


169 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Fan 2 defective











ABBEvents


170 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


171 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


172 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


173 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


174 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


175 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


176 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip







Further steps:----








ABBEvents


177 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:








Related parameters:

----









ABBEvents


178 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:









Further steps:----









ABBEvents


179 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


180 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


181 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




















ABBEvents


182 3BHS258033 E07























ABBEvents


183 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


184 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


185 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


186 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


187 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


188 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


189 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----






- Converter alarm


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


190 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


191 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----










Further steps:




ABBEvents


192 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


193 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


194 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


195 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


196 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:










CoolingSupplyTypeConfigWord




ABBEvents


197 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


198 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:









Further steps:- replace fan (HW-schematic page 410)- re-check cabling



ABBEvents


199 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Fan 2 defective











ABBEvents


200 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


201 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


202 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


203 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


204 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


205 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


206 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip







Further steps:----








ABBEvents


207 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:








Related parameters:

----









ABBEvents


208 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:









Further steps:----

Event2_31_CCI7 20663 Information CCI event. Keinem Ereignis zugeordnet








ABBEvents


209 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


210 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


211 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




















ABBEvents


212 3BHS258033 E07























ABBEvents


213 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


214 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


215 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


216 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


217 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


218 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip


Further steps:----





- Converter Trip


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


219 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----






- Converter alarm


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


220 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





- Converter alarm


Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


221 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----










Further steps:




ABBEvents


222 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


223 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


224 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


225 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


226 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:













ABBEvents


227 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


228 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


229 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Fan 2 defective











ABBEvents


230 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


231 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


232 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


233 3BHS258033 E07







Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


234 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:- re-check sensor circuit













ABBEvents


235 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


236 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




- Converter Trip







Further steps:----








ABBEvents


237 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:








Related parameters:

----









ABBEvents


238 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:









Further steps:----









ABBEvents


239 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


240 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


241 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




















ABBEvents


242 3BHS258033 E07





















OvrCurrInstFlt 21000 Error Field Current instantaneous overcurrent fault

Possible reasons:- Short circuit either on converter AC or DC-side

Default reaction:- Trip

Related parameters:- ProtOvercurrentMon \ Ifskal

\ Ifinst\ InstDelay

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


243 3BHS258033 E07

OvrCurrInvFlt 21001 Error Field Current inverse time overcurrent fault

Possible reasons:

- Overload either on AC or DC-side


Related parameters:- Prot_OverCurrentMon \ Ifskal

\ Ifstart\ SelCurve\ TimeMaxFieldCurrent\ FixInvDelay\ ThermalDownTime

- Reg_Field_Cur_Max_Lim \ MaxFieldCurrent

Further steps:----

PQProtFlt 21002 Alarm P/Q Protection fault

Possible reasons:- Loss of Excitation- FCB Tripped from external

Default reaction:- Auto Fault

Related parameters:Prot_PQMon \ Characteristic_QP10

\ Characteristic_QP08\ Characteristic_QP06\ Characteristic_QP04\ Characteristic_QP02\ Characteristic_QP00\ DelayTime

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


244 3BHS258033 E07

VHzProtFlt 21003 Error V\Hz Protection fault

Possible reasons:

- The machine voltage was higher than the V\Hz protection characteristic


Related parameters:- Prot_VHzMon \ Gradient

\ Vfn\ ThermalDownTime\ DelayTime\ DelayFuncSelect\ Uequivalent\ Tequivalent

Further steps:----

DCSCTrip 21004 Error External short-circuit Trip: Short-circuit on converter dc side

Possible reasons:- Short circuit on DC Side which was not possible to clear due to a 200ms pulse blocking period


Related parameters:Prot_ConvFaultDetect \ ExtSCIfFaultLevel

\ ExtSCUfFaultLevel\ ExtSCIfClearingFaultLevel\ ExtSCUfClearingFaultLevel\ ExtSCReleaseFaultClearing\ TFCDthreshold

Prot_Protection \ EnableIConvMon\ EnableConvFaultDetection

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


245 3BHS258033 E07

S800Watchdog 21005 Alarm S800 Watchdog

Possible reasons:

- Connection to optional I/O of S800 module (OM1 Link 5)

Default reaction:- Alarm

Related parameters:Prot_protection \ EnableS800Mon

Further steps:- Check optical link

OtherCHHWFlt 21006 Alarm Other Channel Hardware fault

Possible reasons:- Powerfail or FPGA freeze on other Channel detected

Default reaction:- Immediate changeover to this channel

Related parameters:

----

Further steps:- Check power supply- Replace hardware

BUHWFlt 21007 Alarm Backup Channel Hardware fault

Possible reasons:- Powerfail or FPGA freeze on other Channel detected

Default reaction:- Changeover to back-up channel blocked


Further steps:- Check power supply- Replace hardware



ABBEvents


246 3BHS258033 E07

OtherCHLinkFlt 21008 Alarm Other Channel Link fault detected by AC 800PEC

Possible reasons:

- Optical link cabling to other AC 800PEC interrupted (OM1 Link 1&2)- PowerLink Watchdog (>3 Link cycles (100 us) no telegram received)- PowerLink Frame Error (4 consecutive telegrams corrupt)



Further steps:- Check optical links cabling to other AC 800PEC

BUCHLinkFlt 21009 Alarm CCM Backup Channel Link fault detected by AC 800PEC

Possible reasons:- Optical link cabling to CCM Backup Channel interrupted (OM1 Link 3)- PowerLink Watchdog (>3 Link cycles (100 us) no telegram received)- PowerLink Frame Error (4 consecutive telegrams corrupt)

Default reaction:- Channel to back-up link loss


Further steps:- Check optical link cabling to CCM

CCMLinkFlt 21010 Alarm CCM Link fault detected by AC 800PEC

Possible reasons:- Optical link cabling to CCM interrupted (OM1 Link 4)- PowerLink Watchdog (>3 Link cycles (100 us) no telegram received)- PowerLink Frame Error (4 consecutive telegrams corrupt)

Default reaction:- Channel fault


Further steps:- Check optical link cabling to CCM



ABBEvents


247 3BHS258033 E07

OtherCHVerFlt 21011 Alarm Other Channel Software version fault

Possible reasons:

- Wrong Channel SW version in other regulator channel




BUCHVersionFlt 21012 Alarm Backup Channel Software version fault

Possible reasons:- Wrong SW version in Backup Channel


Related parameters:

----


CCMVersionFlt 21013 Alarm CCM Software version fault

Possible reasons:- Wrong SW version in CCM measuring board






ABBEvents


248 3BHS258033 E07

OtherCHAddrErr1 21014 Alarm Other Channel Redundant Link 1 Address ErrorLink fault detected by AC 800PEC

Possible reasons:- Optical link cabling to other AC 800PEC connected to wrong optical port (Link 1 to Link 1 )- CCM Hex switch setting not correct



Further steps:- Check optical link cabling to other channel

OtherCHAddrErr2 21015 Alarm Other Channel Redundant Link 2 Address ErrorLink fault detected by AC 800PEC

Possible reasons:- Optical link cabling to other AC 800PEC connected to wrong optical port (OM1 Link 2 to OM1 Link 2 )- CCM Hex switch setting not correct




BUCHAddressErr 21016 Alarm Backup Channel Address Error

Possible reasons:- Wrong HEX Switch setting at back-up CCM



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


249 3BHS258033 E07

CCMAddressErr 21017 Alarm CCM Address Error

Possible reasons:

- Wrong HEX Switch setting at CCM



Further steps:----

OtherCHDevType1 21018 Alarm Other Channel Device Type Error on Redundant Link 1Device Type Error detected by AC 800PEC

Possible reasons:- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (OM1 Link 1)- Wrong installer archive loaded to other AC 800PEC



Further steps:----

OtherCHDevType2 21019 Alarm Other Channel Device Type Error on Redundant Link 2Device Type Error detected by AC 800PEC

Possible reasons:- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (OM1 Link 2)- Wrong installer archive loaded to other AC 800PEC



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


250 3BHS258033 E07

BUDevTypeErr 21020 Alarm Backup Device Type Error

Possible reasons:

- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (OM1 Link 3)- Wrong installer archive loaded to CCM BU

Default reaction:- Channel to back-up link loss- Alarm


Further steps:----

CCMDevTypeErr 21021 Alarm CCM Device Type Error

Possible reasons:- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (OM1 Link 4)- Wrong installer archive loaded to CCM 1



Further steps:----

PowerFail 21022 Alarm Power fail

Possible reasons:- Internal power fail on AC 800PEC- Both power supply inputs are missing

Default reaction:- channel fault, if possible channel transfer





ABBEvents


251 3BHS258033 E07

BURedPwrFail1 21023 Alarm Backup CCM Redundant Power 1 fail

Possible reasons:


Default reaction:- Redundancy Fault



CCMRedPwrFail1 21024 Alarm CCM Redundant Power 1 fail



Related parameters:

----


BURedPwrFail2 21025 Alarm Backup CCM Redundant Power 2 fail







ABBEvents


253 3BHS258033 E07

CPUWatchdog 21029 Alarm CPU Watchdog

Possible reasons:

- CPU failure- Simulink application not running

Default reaction:- Channel Fault



BUCPUWatchdog 21030 Alarm Backup Channel CPU Watchdog


Default reaction:- Backup channel HW-fault



CCMCPUWatchdog 21031 Alarm CCM CPU Watchdog







ABBEvents


254 3BHS258033 E07

CCI1Trip 21032 Alarm CCI1 Trip: Pulses Blocked on CCI1

Possible reasons:

- Optical link cabling to CCI1 interrupted (OM2 Link 1)- CCI1 CPU failure- Internal power fail on CCI1- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (OM2 Link 1)- Wrong installer archive loaded to CCI1- Wrong HEX Switch setting at CCI1- Insufficient converter cooling- Overtemperature in converter module (Heat sinks and/or in/outlet air)- Defective current measuring- Fuse blown (only with cold stand-by systems)- Thyristor not conducting (only with cold stand-by systems)- Pulse blocking via DI 6- Pulse blocking via DI 5 not alive- The DI 12 signal of Converter I/O does not match converter configuration


Related parameters:- Verify the listing together with the individual events

Further steps:- See individual events



ABBEvents


255 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Optical link cabling to CCI2 interrupted (OM2 Link 1)- CCI2 CPU failure- Internal power fail on CCI2- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (OM2 Link 1)- Wrong installer archive loaded to CCI2- Wrong HEX Switch setting at CCI2- Insufficient converter cooling- Overtemperature in converter module (Heat sinks and/or in/outlet air)- Defective current measuring- Fuse blown (only with cold stand-by systems)- Thyristor not conducting (only with cold stand-by systems)- Pulse blocking via DI 6- Pulse blocking via DI 5 not alive- The DI 2 signal of Converter I/O does not match to converter configuration






ABBEvents


256 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


257 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


258 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


259 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Optical link cabling to CCI6 interrupted (OM2 Link 1)- CCI6 CPU failure- Internal power fail on CCI6- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (OM2 Link 1)- Wrong installer archive loaded to CCI6- Wrong HEX Switch setting at CCI6- Insufficient converter cooling- Overtemerature in converter module (Heat sinks and/or in/outlet air)- Defective current measuring- Fuse blown (only with cold stand-by systems)- Thyristor not conducting (only with cold stand-by systems)- Pulse blocking via DI 6- Pulse blocking via DI 5 not alive- The DI 12 signal of Converter I/O does not match to converter configuration






ABBEvents


260 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


261 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:





CCI1RedFault 21040 Alarm CCI1 Redundancy fault

Possible reasons:- Power supply fault at CCI1 input 1 (X1:1-2)- Power supply fault at CCI1 input 2 (X2:3-4)- Fuse blown (only with N-1 systems)- Thyristor not conducting (only with N-1 systems)- Fan fault



Further steps- See individual events



ABBEvents


262 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Power supply fault at CCI2 input 1 (X1:1-2)- Power supply fault at CCI2 input 2 (X2:3-4)- Fuse blown (only with N-1 systems)- Thyristor not conducting (only with N-1 systems)- Fan fault





Possible reasons:- Power supply fault at CCI3 input 1 (X1:1-2)

- Power supply fault at CCI3 input 2 (X2:3-4)- Fuse blown (only with N-1 systems)- Thyristor not conducting (only with N-1 systems)- Fan fault






ABBEvents


264 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:






Possible reasons:- Power supply fault at CCI7 input 1 (X1:1-2)

- Power supply fault at CCI7 input 2 (X2:3-4)- Fuse blown (only with N-1 systems)- Thyristor not conducting (only with N-1 systems)- Fan fault






ABBEvents


265 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:





CCI1Alarm 21048 Alarm CCI1 Alarm

Possible reasons:- Usyn measurement fail

- Uf measurement fail- Temperature sensor fault- Overtemperature (alarm level) in converter module (Heat sinks and/or in/outlet air)- Snubber switch fault (N-1)- Snubber fuse fault (N-1)- Converter cabinet door open- Wrong SW version






ABBEvents


266 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Usyn measurement fail- Uf measurement fail- Temperature sensor fault- Overtemperature (alarm level) in converter module (Heat sinks and/or in/outlet air- Snubber switch fault (N-1)- Snubber fuse fault (N-1)- Converter cabinet door open- Wrong SW version




CCI3Alarm 21050 AlarmCCI3 Alarm

Possible reasons:- Usyn measurement fail- Uf measurement fail- Temperature sensor fault- Overtemperature (alarm level) in converter module (Heat sinks and/or in/outlet air)- Snubber switch fault (N-1)- Snubber fuse fault (N-1)- Converter cabinet door open- Wrong SW version






ABBEvents


267 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Usyn measurement fail- Uf measurement fail- Temperature sensor fault- Overtemperature (alarm level) in converter module (Heat sinks and/or in/outlet air)- Snubber switch fault (N-1)- Snubber fuse fault (N-1)- Converter cabinet door open- Wrong SW version







Related parameters:Verify the listing together with the individual events




ABBEvents


268 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Usyn measurement fail- Uf measurement fail- Temperature sensor fault- Overtemperature (alarm level) in converter module (Heat sinks and/or in/outlet air)- Snubber switch fault (N-1)- Snubber fuse fault (N-1)- Converter cabinet door open- Wrong SW version











ABBEvents


269 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Usyn measurement fail- Uf measurement fail- Temperature sensor fault- Overtemperature (alarm level) in converter module (Heat sinks and/or in/outlet air- Snubber switch fault (N-1)- Snubber fuse fault (N-1)- Converter cabinet door open- Wrong SW version




PTMonInPhaseFlt 21056 AlarmGenerator Voltage measurement failure


Default reaction:- Auto fault

Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ PTEnaInPhaseMon


PTMonOpampCeil 21057 Alarm Generator Voltage measurement failure


Default reaction:

- Auto fault

Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ PTEnaOpAmpCeilMon




ABBEvents


270 3BHS258033 E07

PTMonADCFreeze 21058 Alarm Generator Voltage measurement failure

Possible reasons:



Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ PTEnaADCFreezeMon


PTMonAllLost 21059 Alarm Generator Voltage measurement failure



Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ PTEnaAllLostMon


CTMonSumFault 21060 Alarm Generator Current measurement failure

Possible reasons:- One or two connections lost


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ CTEnaSumMon




ABBEvents


271 3BHS258033 E07

CTMonOpampCeil 21061 Alarm Generator Current measurement failure

Possible reasons:

- Operation amplifier blocked at ceiling level


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ CTEnaOpAmpCeilMon


CTMonADCFreeze 21062 Alarm Generator Current measurement failure



Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ CTEnaADCFreezeMon


CTMonParaphase 21063 Alarm Generator Current measurement failure

Possible reasons:- One connection lost (if only two CT-measurement circuit is used)


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ PTEnaParaPhaseMon




ABBEvents


272 3BHS258033 E07

CIO1Trip 21064 Alarm CIO1 Trip

Possible reasons:

- Optical link cabling to CIO1 interrupted (Link 1)- CIO1 CPU failure- Internal power fail on CIO1- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (Link 1)- Wrong installer archive loaded to CIO1- Wrong HEX Switch setting at CIO1





Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


273 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:






Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


274 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:






Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


275 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:






Possible reasons:







ABBEvents


276 3BHS258033 E07

CIO1RedFault 21072 Alarm CIO1 Redundancy fault

Possible reasons:

- Power supply fault at CIO1 input 1 (X1:1-2)- Power supply fault at CIO1 input 2 (X2:3-4)

Default reaction:- Redundancy fault




Possible reasons:- Power supply fault at CIO2 input 1 (X1:1-2)- Power supply fault at CIO2 input 2 (X2:3-4)











ABBEvents


277 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


278 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:












ABBEvents


279 3BHS258033 E07

CIO1Alarm 21080 Alarm CIO1 Alarm

Possible reasons:

- Wrong SW version on CIO1- Temperature sensor fault at CIO temperature input 1,2 or 3 (X900)


Related parameters:Meas_CIO1 \ EnaTempSens1FaultDetectionEnaTempSens2FaultDetectionEnaTempSens3FaultDetection

AnaInTemp1_Type AnaInTemp2_Type AnaInTemp3_TypeEnableFilt4EnableFilt5EnableFilt6

AnaInTemp1_Filter_Freq AnaInTemp2_Filter_Freq AnaInTemp3_Filter_Freq

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


280 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:






Further steps:----



ABBEvents


281 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:






Further steps:----



ABBEvents


282 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:






Further steps:----



ABBEvents


283 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:






Further steps:----



ABBEvents


284 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:






Further steps:----



ABBEvents


285 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Wrong SW version on CIO7- Temperature sensor fault at CIO temerature input 1,2 or 3 (X900)





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


286 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Wrong SW version on CIO8- Temperature sensor fault at CIO temerature input 1,2 or 3 (X900)





Further steps:----

SmallIODev_CH 21088 Alarm Small IO deviation between Channel 1 and Channel 2

Possible reasons:- Defective I/O section on CCM Board- Wiring faults



Further steps:- Check wiring- Replace device



ABBEvents


288 3BHS258033 E07

CHXfer 21092 Information Automatic channel transfer occurred. (Channel transfer not forced by the user)

Possible reasons:

- CCM link fault- CCM Address error- CCM device type error- AC 800PEC Power fail- CCM Power fail- CCM CPU watchdog- AC 800PEC CPU watchdog- CCM link fault- CIO config word fault- Manual fault in manual mode- Auto and manual mode fault



Further steps:- According to individual event documentation

Event3_30 21094 Information < Not usable for engineering >


EFRStage1Flt 21096 Alarm Earth Fault Relay Stage 1 fault

Possible reasons:- Resistance to Ground too low


Related parameters- Prot_EarthFaultMon / Level1ResponseValue

/ SelectIRDH275/ SelectCIO

- Prot_Protection / EnaEarthFaultMon

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


289 3BHS258033 E07

EFRStage2Flt 21097 Error Ground Fault Relay Stage 2 fault

Possible reasons:

- Resistance to Ground too low


Related parameters- Prot_EarthFaultMon / Level2ResponseValue

/ SelectIRDH275/ SelectCIO


Further steps:----

EFRCommFlt 21098 Alarm Earth Fault Relay Communication fault

Possible reasons:- The serial link to the device IRDH275 is disturbed- Link to selected CIO failed


Related parameters- Prot_EarthFaultMon / SelectIRDH275

/ SelectCIO- Prot_Protection / EnaEarthFaultMon

Further steps:----

FFTimeout 21099 Error Field-flashing timeout

Possible reasons:- Field Flashing breaker was closed for a longer time than expected

Default reaction:- Emergency stop

Related parameters:SM-StateMashine \ FieldFlashTimeout

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


290 3BHS258033 E07

ExcOnTimeout 21100 Error Excitation-on timeout

Possible reasons:

- The overall excitation starting time was longer than the supervision time- Converter electronics was not able to fire thyristors


Related parameters:SM_StateMashine \ ExcOnTimeoutFireAllTimeoutFieldFlashTimeout

Further steps:----

OVFlt 21101 Error Synchronous voltage "over-voltage fault level" reached



Related parameters:Prot_Pretecion \ Enable OverVoltageMonProt_OverVoltageMon \ OVDetectionLevel

\ FaultOnDelayTime

Further steps:----

ParSaveFlt 21102 Alarm Parameter save fault

Possible reasons:- Flash defective


Related parameters:

----

Further steps:- Replace AC 800PEC



ABBEvents


291 3BHS258033 E07

AuxNotReadyFlt 21103 Alarm One or more auxiliaries are not ready

Possible reasons:

- Aux not ready input (CIO1 DI09 activated)- Aux ready input (CIO3 DI06 not activated)

Default reaction:- Alarm- Start-up inhibit


Further steps:- Check inputs

ConfigWordFlt 21104 Alarm CIO configuration word is not valid

Possible reasons:- Wrong CIO Configuration

Default reaction:- Channel fault- Start-up inhibit

Related parameters:MeasCIOConfig \ CIOConfigWord

Further steps:- Check configuration

FieldBusExtTrip 21105 Error Field Bus External Trip

Possible reasons:- Trip via fieldbus. Fieldbus control word Bit 2 (Bits 0…15)

Bit 2 is logic zero



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


292 3BHS258033 E07

ConvRed1Flt 21106 Alarm Converter Redundancy Stage fault level 1More thyristors in the same branch as defined with stage level parameter are not conducting

Possible reasons:- Defective Thyristors- Defective branch fuses- Defective CCI's- Defective pulse amplifiers- Blocked Thyristors- Blocked CCI


Related parameters:Conv_ConverterSystem1 \ FaultStage1Level

Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


293 3BHS258033 E07





Further steps:----

ConvRed4Flt 21109 Error Converter Redundance Stage fault level 4More thyristors in the same branch as defined with stage level parameter are not conducting




Further steps:----



ABBEvents


294 3BHS258033 E07

PTFailExcOn 21110 Error PT fail during excitation on sequence

Possible reasons:

- PT's not connected- CCM defective

Default reaction:- Auto Fault

Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ EnaUgExcOnMon

Further steps:- Check PT circuit- Check CCM

CrowbarFlt 21111 Alarm Crowbar fault

Possible reasons:- Crowbar not conducting when opening fieldbreaker



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


295 3BHS258033 E07

CrowbarOVFlt 21112 Error Crowbar Over-voltage detection

Possible reasons:

- The field overvoltage protection (crowbar) was responding to a positive or negativefield overvoltage

- Negative field overvoltage occurs if an interruption occurs in the powersupply or field circuit



Further steps:- Check whether there is (or has been) a problem with the generator.

If not, report the problem to ABB.- Check the function of the field breaker at the in- or output of the converter.- Check connection line and insulation resistance of the field winding.- Check Positive field overvoltage, this error is usually caused by a generator fault,

which induces negative field current, such as pole slip, short circuit at the generatorterminals etc.

RotTempFlt1 21113 Alarm Rotor Temperature level 1 fault

Possible reasons:- UNITROL® 6000 monitors the rotor temperature, which is calculated from

the excitation current, the excitation voltage and the resulting field resistance. Alarm is triggered if this value exceeds the set temperature.


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ EnableRotTempMonProt_RotTempMon \ RotTempFaultLevel1

\ R1\ T1\ T0\ SelectMode\ BrushVDrop\ CurrDepVDrop

Further steps:- Check whether the rotor has been overloaded for a long time and whether the rotor cooling system is working



ABBEvents


296 3BHS258033 E07

RotTempFlt2 21114 Error Rotor Temperature level 2 fault

Possible reasons:

- UNITROL® 6000 monitors the rotor temperature, which is calculated fromthe excitation current, the excitation voltage and the resulting field resistance.

Alarm is triggered if this value exceeds the set temperature.


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ EnableRotTempMonProt_RotTempMon \ RotTempFaultLevel2

\ R1\ T1\ T0\ SelectMode\ BrushVDrop\ CurrDepVDrop

Further steps:- Check whether the rotor has been overloaded for a long time and whether the rotor cooling system is working

CrowbarFailure 21115 Error Crowbar failure

Possible reasons:- The monitor has detected at least 2 negative crowbar current pulses (the 1st current pulse released the Alar

although the machine main breaker was tripped by the 1st. pulse. I.e. the converter supplied current to the fau


Related parameters:Brk_Crowbar \ RelRotorSlip

Further steps:- Check the crowbar thyristor for negative current.- Replace the faulty thyristor according crowbar instructions.



ABBEvents


297 3BHS258033 E07

OnlineStatusFlt 21116 Alarm Main Circuit Breaker. Online Status Fault

Possible reasons:

- Feedback signal lost while generator current is still >0




WrongPhaseSeq 21117 Error Wrong Phase Sequence

Possible reasons:- Converter supply phase sequence is different than parameterized in software

Default reaction:- Emergency Stop

Related parameters:

Conv_Converter / PhaseSeqCCW/ PhaseSeqCCW2

Prot_Protection / EnablePhaseSeqCheck

Further steps:- Change parameter value in software

EFROpenLoopFlt 21118 Alarm Earth Fault Relay Open Loop fault

Possible reasons:- Open measurement loop- Indicates a broken wire or defective fuse when the measured resistance of the Bender relay is higher than 49.


Related parameters- Prot_EarthFaultMon / SelectIRDH275

/ SelectCIO





ABBEvents


298 3BHS258033 E07

LossOfSynch 21119 Alarm Loss of synchronism

Possible reasons:

- Caused by loss of machine synchronism, there was at least one negative crowbar current cycle detected(“negative” compared to normal (positive) field current direction). If there is more than one negative currentcycle, then “CrowbarFailure” is generated.


Related parameters:Brk_Crowbar \ RelRotorSlip

Further steps:- If the cause is assumed to be from excitation system, check P/Q-limiter and P/Q-monitor.

LocalCTOPCFlt 21120 Alarm Local CT OPC Communication fault

Possible reasons:- Ethernet cable to ECT unplugged- Ethernet switch not working- OPC-Server not working


Related parameters:OpSel_Local \ EnableCommMom

\ SlowCommMonTimeoutTime

Further steps:- Check wiring- Check OPC server- Doublecheck that parameter "SlowCommMonRamp" is written correctly in ECT.



ABBEvents


299 3BHS258033 E07

RemCT1OPCFlt 21121 Alarm Remote CT1 OPC Communication fault

Possible reasons:

- Ethernet cable to ECT unplugged- Ethernet switch not working- OPC-Server not working- Optical electrical ethernet converter defective


Related parameters:OpSel_Local \ EnableCommMomSlowCommMonTimeoutTime

Further steps:- Check wiring- Check OPC server- Doublecheck if parameter "SlowCommMonRamp" is written correctly in ECT


Possible reasons:- Ethernet cable to ECT unplugged- Ethernet switch not working- OPC-Server not working- Optical electrical ethernet converter defective






ABBEvents


300 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Ethernet cable to ECT unplugged- Ethernet switch not working- OPC-Server not working- Optical electrical ethernet converter defective





Possible reasons:- Ethernet cable to ECT unplugged- Ethernet switch not working- OPC-Server not working- Optical electrical ethernet converter defective






ABBEvents


301 3BHS258033 E07

BlockStartUpFlt 21125 Alarm Block Startup

Possible reasons:

- Digital input activated (Default not used)

Default reaction:- Startup blocked


Further steps:----

ManFailExcOn 21126 Error CT fail during excitation on sequence

Possible reasons:- Converter CTs not connected- CSI defective- CCI defective

Default reaction:- Manual Fault

Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ EnaIfExcOnMon

Further steps:- Check CT circuit- Check CCI

FBCommFlt 21127 Alarm Field Bus Communication fault

Possible reasons:- Fieldbus connection disturbed

Default reaction:- Alarm- Release of the Fieldbus operation request

Related parameters:OpSel_Fieldbus \ EnableCommMon

ComFaultTime

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


302 3BHS258033 E07

ExcTrTmpFlt1 21128 Alarm Excitation Transformer Temperature Level 1 fault

Possible reasons:

- Insufficient cooling of the excitaion transformer


Related parameters:ExcTrafoMon \ TempFaultLevel1EnableExcTrafoMonSelectPT100EnaTemp1EnaTemp2EnaTemp3

Further steps:----

ExcTrTmpFlt2 21129 Error Excitation Transformer Temperature Level 2 fault

Possible reasons:

- Insufficient cooling of the excitation transformer


Related parameters:ExcTrafoMon \ TempFaultLevel2EnableExcTrafoMonSelectPT100EnaTemp1EnaTemp2EnaTemp3

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


305 3BHS258033 E07

PSU1APD12APDFlt 21141 Alarm Power Supply Unit 1 APD 1-2 Fault

Possible reasons:

- See corresponding hardware diagram- APD +ER-Q801 or +ER-Q802 defective- Monitoring line to I/O board interrupted


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ EnablePowerSupplyMon

Prot_PSU1APDGrp1 \ Enable

Further steps:----

PSU1ICU2Src1Flt 21142 Alarm Power Supply Unit 1 Input Coupling Unit +ER-V81 Source 1 Fault

Possible reasons:- See corresponding hardware diagram



Prot_PSU1ICU2 \ SourceConfigWord

Further steps:----






Further steps:----



ABBEvents


306 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- See corresponding hardware diagram




Further steps:----

PSU1ICU2SigFlt 21145 Alarm Power Supply Unit 1 Input Coupling Unit +ER-V81 Signal Fault

Possible reasons:- Hardware defective- Monitoring line to I/O board interrupted




Further steps:----


Possible reasons:- See corresponding hardware diagram- APD +ER-Q801 or +ER-Q802 defective- Monitoring line to I/O board interrupted




Further steps:----



ABBEvents


307 3BHS258033 E07

PSU2ICU1Src1Flt 21147 Alarm Power Supply Unit 2 Input Coupling Unit +EE-V80 Source 1 Fault

Possible reasons:





Further steps:----






Further steps:----






Further steps:----



ABBEvents


308 3BHS258033 E07

PSU2ICU1SigFlt 21150 Alarm Power Supply Unit 2 Input Coupling Unit +EE-V80 Signal Fault

Possible reasons:

- Hardware defective- Monitoring line to I/O board interrupted




Further steps:----


Possible reasons:- See corresponding hardware diagramm- APD +EE-Q801 or +EE-Q802 or +EE-Q803 defective

- Monitoring line to I/O board interrupted




Further steps:----



Default reaction:

- Alarm



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


309 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:





Further steps:----






Further steps:----

PSU2ICU2SigFlt 21155 Alarm Power Supply Unit 2 Input Coupling Unit +EE-V81 Signal Fault

Possible reasons:- Hardware defective- Monitoring line to I/O board interrupted


Related parameters:

Prot_Protection \ EnablePowerSupplyMon


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


310 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- See corresponding hardware diagram- APD +EE-Q811 or +EE-Q812 or +EE-Q813 defective- Monitoring line to I/O board interrupted




Further steps:----

CITVersionFlt 21157 Alarm CIT software version fault

Possible reasons:- The downloaded CIT software version is not compatible with M/S software version



Further steps:----

ColdgasAnaInFlt 21158 Alarm Coldgas-Measurement analog Input Fault

Possible reasons:- One or both analog input signals for the DE/NDE temperature signals are below the supervision level


Related parameters:Reg_ColdGas \ SelectAnaInputType

EnableAnaInFaultDetection

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


311 3BHS258033 E07

LCIAnaInFlt 21159 Alarm LCIAnaInFlt

Possible reasons:

- The analog input signal for the reference is below the supervision level.


Related parameters:-Reg_LCISetPtInput \ SelectAnaInputType- \ EnableAnaInFaultDetection-

Further steps:----

PreSelectionFlt 21160 Alarm Channel Preselection fault

Possible reasons:- Channel 1 and Channel 2 are indicated as the active one after start-up

Default reaction:- Alarm- none channel is starting as the active one

Related parameters:Sys_ExcitationSystem \ PreSelChannel1PreSelChannel2

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


312 3BHS258033 E07

DCSCDetected 21161 Alarm External Short-Circuit detected

Possible reasons:

- Short-circuit on converter dc side is detected


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ EnableConvFaultDetectionEnableExtSCMon

Prot_ConvFaultDetect \ ExtSCIfFaultLevelExtSCUfFaultLevelExtSCIfClearingFaultLevelExtSCUfClearingFaultLevelTFCDthreshold

Further steps:----

DCSCBlockPulses 21162 AlarmExternal Short-Circuit clearing: Pulse block activated

Possible reasons:- Short-circuit on converter dc side is detected


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ EnableConvFaultDetectionEnableExtSCMon

Prot_ConvFaultDetec \ ExtSCIfFaultLevelExtSCUfFaultLevelExtSCIfClearingFaultLevelExtSCUfClearingFaultLevelTFCDthresholdExtSCReleaseFaultClearing

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


313 3BHS258033 E07

IntSCAlphaMin 21163 Alarm Internal Short-Circuit clearing: Alpha min activated

Possible reasons:

----


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ EnableConvFaultDetectionEnableIntSCMon

Prot_ConvFaultDetect \ TFCDthresholdIntSCReleaseFaultClearing

Further steps:----

IntSCTrip 21164 Error Internal Short-Circuit





Further steps:----

GenSC3Phase 21165 Alarm Generator 3-Phase Short-Circuit detected

Possible reasons:- All 3 Phases measure less than 5% voltage and at the same time more

than 140% current



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


314 3BHS258033 E07

GenSC2Phase 21166 Alarm Generator 2-Phase Short-Circuit detected

Possible reasons:

- One or two Phases measure less than 5% voltage and at the same time morethan 140% current



Further steps:----

DistantSC3Phase 21167 Alarm Distant 3-Phase Short-Circuit detected

Possible reasons:- All 3 Phases measure less than 80% voltage and at the same time more

than 120% current



Further steps:----

DistantSC2Phase 21168 Alarm Distant 2-Phase Short-Circuit detected

Possible reasons:- One or two Phases measure less than 80% voltage and at the same time more

than 120% current



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


315 3BHS258033 E07

AnySC 21169 Alarm Any Short-Circuit detectedThis signal is followed by a signal of the range 21165 . . .21168 to get better information

Possible reasons:- High current and at the same time a low voltage detected



Further steps:----


CTOvercurrent 21171 Alarm Generator Current measurement fault: Current out of measurable range

Possible reasons:- Sensing current > 1,53 A (7.65A) 1.53%

Default reaction:

- Alarm- Blocking of single phase CT-Monitoring

Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ EnableMaschineMeasCTMon

Further steps:----

ActiveCHFlt 21172 Error Active Channel fault

Possible reasons:- The active channel is faulty and there is no possibility to transfer to another channel



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


316 3BHS258033 E07

MANFltinMAN 21173 Alarm Manual fault in manual mode:

Possible reasons:

- There is a Manual Fault while the Unit is running in Manual Mode



Further steps:----

AUTOandMANFlt 21174 Alarm Auto and Manual fault:

Possible reasons:- Auto Mode as well as Manual Mode of the same channel are faulty


Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----

NegFieldCurrFlt 21175 Error Negative bridge fault while applying negative current

Possible reasons:- Check the Event List regarding event numbers 20700 to 20795



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


317 3BHS258033 E07

ConverterCfgFlt 21176 Alarm Converter configuration fault

Possible reasons:

- ConverterSystemConfigWord <1 or >8- ConverterSystemConfigWord not equal to 2 and parameter EnableColdStandby = True- ConverterNegCurrConfigWord =1 and parameter EnableColdStandby = True

Default reaction:- All pulses blocked

Related parameters:Conv_ConverterSystem1 \ ConverterSystemConfigWordConverterNegCurrConfigWordEnableColdStandby

Further steps:----

ChannelCfgFlt 21177 Alarm Channel configuration fault:

Possible reasons:- ChannelConfigWord <1 or >3

Default reaction:- System deadlocked

Related parameters:Sys_ExcitationSystem \ ChannelConfigWord

Further steps:----

IOCfgFlt 21178 Alarm IO configuration fault

Possible reasons:- CIOConfigWord <1 or >32767


Related parameters:Meas_CIOConfig \ CIOConfigWord

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


318 3BHS258033 E07

IntSCDet 21179 Alarm Internal Short-Circuit detected.

Possible reasons:

- Defective Thyristor




Further steps:----

OtherCHLink1Flt 21180 Alarm Other Channel Redundant Link 1 Fault.

Possible reasons:- Opt cabling interrupted

- PowerLink Watchdog (>3 Link cycles (100 us) no telegram received)- PowerLink Frame Error (4 consecutive telegrams corrupt)




OtherCHLink2Flt 21181 Alarm Other Channel Redundant Link 2 Fault.

Possible reasons:- Optical cabling interrupted- PowerLink Watchdog (>3 Link cycles (100 us) no telegram received)- PowerLink Frame Error (4 consecutive telegrams corrupt)






ABBEvents


319 3BHS258033 E07

OtherCHCPUWD 21182 Alarm Other Channel CPU Watchdog

Possible reasons:


Default reaction:- Other channel HW-fault



OtherCHPwrFail 21183 Alarm Other Channel Power Fail

Possible reasons:- Internal power fail on AC 800PEC of other channel- Both power supply inputs are missing

Default reaction:- Other channel HW-fault



ExternalTrip 21184 Error External Trip

Possible reasons:- CCM I/O DI5 activated


Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----

ActUfMeasFlt 21186 Alarm Actual Uf Measurement Failure




ABBEvents


320 3BHS258033 E07

HotStartUpFlt 21188 Alarm Hot-startup fault. Channel started after: Channel fault, reset manual as soon as the Regulator deviation between

Possible reasons:

-

Default reaction:-


Further steps:----

CHFltStandbyCH 21189 Alarm Hardware Fault on this channel detected by the Other Channel or the Backup Channel

Possible reasons:-

Default reaction:-

Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----

OtherCHHWFltBU 21190 Alarm Hardware Fault on the Other Channel detected by the Backup Channel

Possible reasons:-

Default reaction:-


Further steps:----



ABBEvents


321 3BHS258033 E07

PassiveCHTrip 21191 Error Channel is not active and has a Trip

Possible reasons:

-

Default reaction:-


Further steps:----

FCB1Off1CoilFlt 21192 Alarm Field Circuit Breaker 1 Off-Coil 1 Fault

Possible reasons:- OFF command not executed within the set parameter time

"is Off" feedback signal is missing.


Related parameters:Brk_FieldBreaker1 \ EmaxOff1Off2DelayTime

Further steps:----






Further steps:----



ABBEvents


322 3BHS258033 E07

FCB1AntivalFlt 21194 Alarm Field Circuit Breaker 1 Status Antivalency Fault

Possible reasons:

- There is a wrong position indication of the breakerFeedback "is ON" and "is OFF" are both true or false at the same time


Related parameters:Brk_FieldBreaker1 \ AntivalencyCheckDisabled

AntivalencyFaultOnDelayTime

Further steps:----

FCB1TurnOnFlt 21195 Alarm Field Circuit Breaker 1 Turn-On Fault

Possible reasons:- ON command not executed within the set parameter time

"is On" feedback signal is missing.


Related parameters:Brk_FieldBreaker1 \ FCBOnDelayTime

Further steps:----

FCB1TurnOffFlt 21196 Alarm Field Circuit Breaker 1 Turn-Off Fault




Related parameters:Brk_FieldBreaker1 \ FCBOffDelayTime

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


323 3BHS258033 E07

FCB1ManOffFlt 21197 Alarm Field Circuit Breaker 1 Manual-Off Fault

Possible reasons:

- Fieldbreaker was opened without command from the fieldbreaker control module(either manually or by trip command, given directly to the OFF coil)



Further steps:----

Iso1lTurnOnFlt 21198 Alarm Isolator 1 Turn-On Fault




Related parameters:Brk_FieldIsolator1 \ IsolatorOnDelayTime

Further steps:----

Iso1lTurnOffFlt 21199 Alarm Isolator 1 Turn-Off Fault




Related parameters:Brk_FieldIsolator1 \ IsolatorOffDelayTime

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


324 3BHS258033 E07

Iso1lAntivalFlt 21200 Alarm Isolator 1 Status Antivalency Fault

Possible reasons:

- There is a wrong position indication of the breakerFeedback "is ON" and "is OFF" are both true or false at the same time


Related parameters:Brk_Fieldisolator1 \ AntivalencyCheckDisabled


Further steps:----

Iso1OnLdOffFlt 21201 Error Isolator 1 On-Load Open Fault

Possible reasons:- The Isolator was opened manually when it was on-load



Further steps:----






Further steps:----



ABBEvents


325 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- OFF command not executed within the set parameter time"is Off" feedback signal is missing.



Further steps:----


Possible reasons:- There is a wrong position indication of the breaker

Feedback "is ON" and "is OFF" are both true or false at the same time




Further steps:----






Further steps:----



ABBEvents


327 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- ON command not executed within the set parameter time"is Off" feedback signal is missing.



Further steps:----







Further steps:----


Possible reasons:- The Isolator was opened manually when it was on-load



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


328 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- OFF command not executed within the set parameter time"is Off" feedback signal is missing.



Further steps:----






Further steps:----







Further steps:----



ABBEvents


329 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- ON command not executed within the set parameter time"is On" feedback signal is missing.



Further steps:----

FCB3TurnOffFlt 21216 Alarm Field Circuit Breaker 3 Turn-Off Fault




Related parameters:Brk_FieldBreaker3 \ FCBOffDelayTime

Further steps:----

FCB3ManOffFlt 21217 Alarm Field Circuit Breaker 3 Manual-Off Fault

Possible reasons:- Fieldbreaker was opened without command from the fieldbreaker control module

(either manually or by trip command, given directly to the OFF coil)



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


330 3BHS258033 E07

Iso3lTurnOnFlt 21218 Alarm Isolator 3 Turn-On Fault

Possible reasons:

- ON command not executed within the set parameter time"is On" feedback signal is missing.


Related parameters:Brk_FieldIsolator3 \ IsolatorOnDelayTime

Further steps:----






Further steps:----







Further steps:----



ABBEvents


331 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- The Isolator was opened manually when it was on load



Further steps:----

FCBNotChgdFlt 21222 Alarm Field Circuit Breaker "not charged" fault

FireAllTrip 21223 Error Trip while system running with fire all

Possible reasons:- Too high synchronous voltage, generator voltage or field current while excitation start with fire all thyristors


Related parameters:Prot_Protection \ EnableFireAllTripDet

Further steps:----

Event8_00 21224 Information < Can be used for Engineering >















ABBEvents


332 3BHS258033 E07




Event8_16 21240 Alarm < Can be used for Engineering >
















UnderFreqFlt 21256 Error Under frequency fault

Possible reasons:- The V/Hz-Limiter initiated an emergency stop because the frequency was <20% or

the generator voltage was <10% on the V/Hz-limiter characteristic.Possibly the unitwas shut-down without giving an off command to the excitation system.

Default reaction:- EmergencyStop

Related parameters:Reg_AVR_SetPt_VHz_Lim \ Limiter_Release

\ LimiterGradient\ LimiterVfn

Further steps:- Check if the unit was shut-down without giving an off command to the excitation system.- Check the V/Hz-limiter settings.



ABBEvents


333 3BHS258033 E07

ConvOvrTempTrip 21257 Error Converter overtemperature trip

Possible reasons:

- Any Converter air outlet temperature was >140ºC



Further steps:----

LinkFault_CIO1 22000 Alarm CIO1. Link Fault

Possible reasons:- Optical link cabling to CIO interrupted (OM2 Link 5)- PowerLink Watchdog (>3 Link cycles (100 us) no telegram received)- PowerLink Frame Error (4 consecutive telegrams corrupt)

Default reaction:- CIO Trip


Further steps:- Check optical link cabling to CIO

RedPwrFail1_CIO1 22001 Alarm CIO1. Redundant Power fail 1




Further steps:




ABBEvents


335 3BHS258033 E07

VersionFlt_CIO1 22005 Alarm CIO1. Software Version fault

Possible reasons:

- Wrong converter interface SW version




AddressErr_CIO1 22006 Alarm CIO1. Address Error

Possible reasons:- Wrong HEX Switch setting at CIO


Related parameters:

----

Further steps:- Check Hex-Switch setting on CIO

DevTypeErr_CIO1 22007 Alarm CIO1. Device Type Error

Possible reasons:- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (OM2 Link 5)- Wrong installer archive loaded to CIO






ABBEvents


336 3BHS258033 E07

SigConsistFlt_CIO1 22008 Alarm CIO1 Digital IO deviation between IO's of Channel 1 and Channel 2

Possible reasons:

- Defective I/O section on CIO Board- Wiring faults




Temp1SnsFlt_CIO1 22009 Alarm CIO1. Temperature Sensor 1 fault

Possible reasons:PT100 PTC- Short circuit at sensor cabling < 82.5 Ohm < 20 Ohm- Open circuit at sensor cabling > 181.6 Ohm > --- Ohm



Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


338 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:








Related parameters:

Prot_PowerSupplyMon \ EnableRedundantSupply


PrciPwrFail_CIO2 22103 Alarm CIO2. Precision Power fail

Possible reasons:- Internal power fail on CIO- Both power supply inputs are missing






ABBEvents


339 3BHS258033 E07

CPUWatchdog_CIO2 22104 Alarm CIO2. CPU Watchdog

Possible reasons:











Possible reasons:- Wrong HEX Switch setting at CIO



Further steps:- Check Hex-Swtich setting on CIO



ABBEvents


340 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (OM6 Link 3)- Wrong installer archive loaded to CIO




SigConsistFlt_CIO2 22108 Alarm CIO2. Digital IO deviation between IO's of Channel 1 and Channel 2

Possible reasons:- Defective I/O section on CIO Board- Wiring faults








Further steps:----



ABBEvents


341 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

PT100 PTC- Short circuit at sensor cabling < 82.5 Ohm < 20 Ohm- Open circuit at sensor cabling > 181.6 Ohm > --- Ohm



Further steps:----





Further steps:----

Event1_12_CIO2 22112 Information CIO event. Keinem Ereignis zugeordnet

Event1_13_CIO2 22113 Information CIO event. Not usable for engineering

Event1_14_CIO2 22114 Alarm CIO event. Not usable for engineering




ABBEvents


342 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Optical link cabling to CIO interrupted (OM2 Link 6)







Related parameters:

----









ABBEvents


343 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Internal power fail on CIO- Both power supply inputs are missing












Related parameters:

----




ABBEvents


344 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

- Wrong HEX Switch setting at CIO





Possible reasons:- Wrong device connected to AC 800PEC (OM2 Link 6)- Wrong installer archive loaded to CIO3











ABBEvents


345 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----





Further steps:----





Further steps:----





ABBEvents


346 3BHS258033 E07




Possible reasons:- Optical link cabling to CIO interrupted (OM6 Link 3)
















ABBEvents


347 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


348 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


349 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----





Further steps:----





Further steps:----





ABBEvents


350 3BHS258033 E07




















ABBEvents


351 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


352 3BHS258033 E07

AddressErr_CIO5 22406 Alarm CIO5. Address ErrorPossible reasons:- Wrong HEX Switch setting at CIO







Related parameters:

----


SigConsistFlt_CIO5 22408 Alarm CIO5.Digital IO deviation between IO's of Channel 1 and Channel 2







ABBEvents


353 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----





Further steps:----





Further steps:----





ABBEvents


354 3BHS258033 E07




















ABBEvents


355 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:













Related parameters:

----




ABBEvents


356 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


357 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----





Further steps:----





Further steps:----





ABBEvents


358 3BHS258033 E07




















ABBEvents


359 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:













Related parameters:

----




ABBEvents


360 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


361 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----





Further steps:----





Further steps:----





ABBEvents


362 3BHS258033 E07










Default reaction:

- Redundancy Fault







Further steps:




ABBEvents


363 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:













Related parameters:

----




ABBEvents


364 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:

















ABBEvents


365 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----





Further steps:----





Further steps:----





ABBEvents


366 3BHS258033 E07



ChannelFault 23000 Alarm Channel Fault - Group alarm

Possible reasons:- One or more events which are assigned to "Channel Fault" has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Force Channel Fault"

Default reaction:- Single channel -> Trip- Redundant system -> Channel transfer


Further steps:- According to individual event description

AutoFault 23001 Alarm Auto Fault - Group alarm

Possible reasons:

- One or more events which are assigned to "Auto Fault" has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Force Auto Fault"

Default reaction:- Single channel -> Transfer to "Manual Mode"- Redundant system -> Channel transfer, own channel transfer to "Manual Mode"


Further steps:- according to individual event description

ManualFault 23002 Alarm Manual Fault - Group alarm

Possible reasons:- One or more events which are assigned to "Manual Fault" has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Force Manual Fault"

Default reaction:- Single channel -> Trip- Redundant system -> Channel transfer





ABBEvents


367 3BHS258033 E07

OtherCHHWFault 23003 Alarm Other Channel Hardware Fault - Group alarm

Possible reasons:

- One or more events which are assigned to "Other Channel Hardware Fault" has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Force Other Channel Hardware Fault"

Default reaction:- Blocking of channel transfer ability to "Other Channel"



BUCHHWFault 23004 Alarm Backup Channel Hardware Fault - Group alarm

Possible reasons:- One or more events which are assigned to Back-up Fault has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Force Back-up Fault"

Default reaction:- If Back-up channel is active -> Trip

- If Back-up channel is not active -> Alarm



CHtoBULinkLoss 23005 Alarm Channel to Backup Link Loss - Group alarm

Possible reasons:- One or more events which are assigned to Channel to Backup Link Loss has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Channel to Backup Link Loss"

Default reaction:- Blocking of channel transfer ability to Backup Channel





ABBEvents


368 3BHS258033 E07

EmergencyStop 23006 Error Emergency Stop - Group alarm

Possible reasons:

- One or more events which are assigned to "Emergency Stop" has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Emergency Stop"

Default reaction:- Excitation is switched off- Fieldbreaker is opened



Trip1 23007 Error Trip 1 - Group alarm

Possible reasons:- One or more events which are assigned to "Trip 1" has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Trip 1"

Default reaction:- Trip command given to Plant Protection- Excitation is switched off- Fieldbreaker is opened



Trip2 23008 Error Trip 2 - Group alarm

Possible reasons:- One or more events which are assigned to "Trip 2" has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Trip 2"

Default reaction:- Trip request given to Plant Protection- If accepted

- Excitation is switched off- Fieldbreaker is opened





ABBEvents


369 3BHS258033 E07

StartupInhibit 23009 Alarm Startup Inhibit - Group alarm

Possible reasons:

- One or more events which are assigned to "Startup Inhibit" has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Force Startup Inhibit"

Default reaction:- Blocking of Fieldbreaker Close command- Blocking of Excitation On command



RedundancyFault 23010 Alarm Redundancy Fault - Group alarm

Possible reasons:- One or more events which are assigned to "Redundancy Fault" has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Redundancy Fault"




Alarm 23011 Alarm Alarm - Group alarm

Possible reasons:- One or more events which are assigned to "Alarm" has (have) occurred- The signal was forced by the command "Alarm"






ABBEvents


370 3BHS258033 E07

ForceChannelFault 23100 Information Force Channel Fault

Possible reasons:

- The signal was forced by the manually given command. Typically activated to test the System / Plant behavio



Further steps:----

ForceAutoFault 23101 Information Force Auto Fault

Possible reasons:- The signal was forced by the manually given command. Typically activated to test the System / Plant behavio


Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----

ForceManualFault 23102 Information Force Manual Fault




Further steps:----



ABBEvents


371 3BHS258033 E07

ForceOtherCHHWFault 23103 Information Force Other Channel Hardware Fault

Possible reasons:




Further steps:----

ForceBUCHHWFault 23104 Information Force Backup Channel Hardware Fault



Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----

ForceCHtoBULinkLoss 23105 Information Force Channel to Backup Link Loss




Further steps:----



ABBEvents


372 3BHS258033 E07

ForceEmergencyStop 23106 Information Force Emergency Stop

Possible reasons:




Further steps:----

ForceTrip1 23107 Information Force Trip 1



Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----

ForceTrip2 23108 Information Force Trip 2




Further steps:----



ABBEvents


373 3BHS258033 E07

ForceStartupInhibit 23109 Information Force Startup Inhibit

Possible reasons:




Further steps:----

ForceRedundancyFault 23110 Information Force Redundancy Fault



Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----

ForceAlarm 23111 Information Force Alarm




Further steps:----



ABBEvents


374 3BHS258033 E07

ForceCCI1Trip 23200 Information Force CCI1 Trip

Possible reasons:




Further steps:----




Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


375 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----




Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


376 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----




Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----

ForceCIO1Trip 23300 Information Force CIO1 Trip




Further steps:----



ABBEvents


377 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----




Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


378 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----




Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----





Further steps:----



ABBEvents


379 3BHS258033 E07


Possible reasons:




Further steps:----

Reset 23400 Information Reset

Possible reasons:- A Reset command was given to the Excitation System


Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----

AuxReady 23401 Information AuxReady State

Possible reasons:- The Excitation System reached the "AuxReady" main state



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


380 3BHS258033 E07

AuxOn 23402 Information AuxOn State

Possible reasons:

- The Excitation System reached the "AuxOn" main state



Further steps:----

Ready 23403 Information Ready State

Possible reasons:- The Excitation System reached the "Ready" main state


Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----

Operation 23404 Information Operation State

Possible reasons:- The Excitation System reached the "Operation" main State



Further steps:----



ABBEvents


381 3BHS258033 E07

ManualControl 23405 Information Manual Control Active

Possible reasons:

- The Excitation System changed to "Manual" Mode



Further steps:----

ChannelActive 23406 Information Channel Active

Possible reasons:- The Excitation System changed the control to "this Channel"


Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----

TRTrig 23407 Information Transient Recorder Trigger

Possible reasons:- The Transient Recorder in the Excitation System was triggered either by a

- Trip- Channel Fault- Auto Fault- Manual Faultor- manually


Related parameters:

----

Further steps:----



ABBEvents


382 3BHS258033 E07

ChannelStartup 23408 Information Channel Startup

Possible reasons:

- The channel hardware was powered up



Further steps:----

SW_Reboot 23409 Information The SW was restarted

ForceAuto 23410 Information A forced transfer to Auto Channel took place

ForceManual 23411 Information A forced transfer to Manual Channel took place

ForceChannel1 23412 Information A forced transfer to Channel1 took place

ForceChannel2 23413 Information A forced transfer to Channel2 took place

ForceBU 23414 Information A forced transfer to Auto Channel took place

NoCHAlarmActive 23415 Information No Alarm is active

SaveToFlashOK 23416 Information The Writing of parameters to Flash was successful

Converter1Active 23417 Information Converter 1 Active

Reasons:- The twin converter 1 became active

Converter2Active 23418 Information Converter 2 Active

Reasons:- The twin converter 2 became active



ABBEvents


383 3BHS258033 E07

StallMon_Flt 25006 Error Stall Monitor Fault

Possible reasons:

- Motor stalls at startup- Motor startup is too slow


Related parameters:Prot_Protection / EnableStallMonProt_StallMon / ZeroSpeedStallTime

/ Time00/ Time30/ Time60/ Time80/ Time90/ MaxStartTime

Further steps:- Reduce Motor load

BackupSupply 25507 Information Backup Supply Active

Reasons:- The backup converter supply became active

MainSupply 25508 Information Main Supply Active

Reasons:- The main converter supply became active



ABB


UNITROL®6000 Operating InstructionsConverter Type UNL13300


Revision Status Rev. D

Date 08 / 2010



ABB

2 3BHS260553 E02 UNL13300, Operating Instructions





ABB

UNL13300, Operating Instructions 3BHS260553 E02 3

Table of Contents


List of Figures......................................................................................................................5

List of Tables .......................................................................................................................5

General Information ............................................................................................................6

Chapter 1 - Introduction ....................................................................................................7

Chapter 2 - Safety Instructions .........................................................................................8

2.1.

Safety Concept .............................................................................................................. 8

2.1.1. General .......................................................................................................................... 8

2.1.2. Safety Rules................................................................................................................... 8

2.1.3. Qualifications and Responsibilities ................................................................................. 8

2.1.4. Consequences of Failure to Comply............................................................................... 9

2.2. Safety Regulations........................................................................................................10

2.2.1. Structure of the Safety Instructions ...............................................................................10

2.2.2. General Safety Instructions ...........................................................................................10

2.2.3. Additional Safety Instructions........................................................................................12

2.3. Safety Labels ................................................................................................................13

Chapter 3 -

Description of the Device ............................................................................14

3.1. Introduction ...................................................................................................................14

3.2. Field of Application........................................................................................................14

3.3. Electrical Units, Overview..............................................................................................14

3.4. Operation of the Converter............................................................................................15

3.5. Mechanical Layout ........................................................................................................16

3.6. Description of the Individual Units .................................................................................19

3.6.1. Converter Module..........................................................................................................19

3.6.2. Snubber ........................................................................................................................20

3.6.3. Control Unit...................................................................................................................21

3.6.4. Types of Ventilation.......................................................................................................21

Chapter 4 -

Maintenance..................................................................................................23

4.1. Safety Instructions.........................................................................................................23

4.2. Introduction ...................................................................................................................23

4.3. Operating Conditions during Maintenance Work ...........................................................23

4.4. Maintenance Schedule..................................................................................................24

4.5. Specific Maintenance Tasks..........................................................................................24

4.5.1. Visual Inspection...........................................................................................................24

4.5.2. Functional Inspection ....................................................................................................25

4.5.3. Maintenance Work, Cleaning ........................................................................................26

4.5.4. Maintenance Work, Fans ..............................................................................................27



ABB


Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 28

5.1. Safety Instructions........................................................................................................ 28

5.2. Operating Conditions during Repair Work .................................................................... 28

5.3. Replacement of Defective Components ....................................................................... 28

5.4.

Cause of Failure and Remedy...................................................................................... 29 5.4.1. Preparation procedures:............................................................................................... 29

5.4.2. Fault sources and fault elimination ............................................................................... 29

5.4.3. Thyristor Failure ........................................................................................................... 30

5.4.4. Faults in the Snubber Circuit ........................................................................................ 33

5.4.5. Fault in the Fan Box / Replacing the Fan Box .............................................................. 35

5.4.6. Fault in the CCI Device / Replacing the Device ............................................................ 36

5.4.7. Fault in the Electronics / Replacing a Board ................................................................. 37

5.5. Changing a Thyristor.................................................................................................... 37

5.5.1. Tools and auxiliary materials........................................................................................ 37

5.5.2. Polarity of the Thyristors mounted between the Heat Sinks.......................................... 38

5.5.3. Replacement of Thyristors UNS 4680 .......................................................................... 39

Chapter 6 - Final Check................................................................................................... 42

Chapter 7 - Spares........................................................................................................... 43



ABB


List of Figures

Figure 2-1 - PPE .............................................................................................................................12

Figure 2-2 - Structure of Safety Label..............................................................................................13

Figure 2-3 - Safety Labels ...............................................................................................................13

Figure 3-1 - Converter cubicle with branch fuses on the DC side ....................................................16

Figure 3-2 - Converter cubicle with branch fuses on the AC side.....................................................17

Figure 3-3 – Door of the cubicle ......................................................................................................18

Figure 3-4 – Overvoltage protection (Snubber)................................................................................18

Figure 3-5 - Converter Module with branch fuses on the DC side....................................................19

Figure 3-6 - Snubber .......................................................................................................................20

Figure 3-7 - Supply of the CCI.........................................................................................................21

Figure 3-8 - Natural Ventilation........................................................................................................21

Figure 3-9 - Forced Ventilation ........................................................................................................22

Figure 3-10 - Fan Arrangement .......................................................................................................22

Figure 5-1 - Branch Fuse.................................................................................................................30

Figure 5-2 - Thyristor Blocking Ability ..............................................................................................31

Figure 5-3 - Thyristor Firing Ability...................................................................................................31

Figure 5-4 - Diode Module of the Snubber Circuit............................................................................33

Figure 5-5 - Snubber Circuit ............................................................................................................34

Figure 5-6 - Replacing the Fan Box.................................................................................................35

Figure 5-7 - Changing a Fan ...........................................................................................................35

Figure 5-8 - CCI Device...................................................................................................................36

Figure 5-9 – Mounting Direction of the Thyristor..............................................................................38

Figure 5-10 - Replacement of a Thyristor ........................................................................................41

List of Tables

Table 4-1 - Maintenance Schedule..................................................................................................24

Table 4-2 - Maximum Fan Operating Days......................................................................................25

Table 4-3 - Test Redundant Fan......................................................................................................26

Table 4-4 - Heat Sink and Air Temperature of the Converter...........................................................26

Table 5-1 - Operating Conditions for Replacement of Components.................................................28

Table 7-1 - Order Numbers for Spare Parts.....................................................................................43



ABB


General Information


If any questions arise, consult the local ABB representative or the factory.



ABB



This document describes the maintenance and troubleshootingprocedures for the UNL13300 converter in the UNITROL 6000 excitationsystem.



ABB



2.1. Safety Concept

2.1.1. General

The Safety Instructions for maintenance and troubleshooting must beadhered to. It is important to read all the instructions carefully beforecarrying out any activity on the equipment, and to keep the OperatingInstructions in a safe place for future use.

It should be noted that the Safety Instructions listed in the User Manual ofthe excitation system must also be strictly followed.

2.1.2. Safety Rules

The following safety procedures according to EN 50110-1 must absolutelybe followed if any (maintenance) work is carried out on the excitationsystem:

1 Disconnect completely.

2 Secure against re-connection.

3 Verify that the installation is dead.

4 Carry out grounding and short-circuiting.

5 Provide protection against adjacent live parts.

2.1.3. Qualifications and Responsibilities

Maintenance and repair personnel must have received training in theprocedures for working with the excitation system and must have beenmade aware of the dangers related to the currently valid regulations.

Maintenance personnel must have been instructed in emergency switch-off measures and must be aware how to isolate the equipment from themains in an emergency.

Maintenance personnel must be familiar with accident preventionmeasures that apply to their workplace and must have received training infirst aid and firefighting.



ABB Chapter 2 - Safety Instructions


The operator guarantees that all persons involved in maintenance andrepair activities on the excitation system have received appropriatetraining together with the necessary instructions, and have thoroughlyread and clearly understood the Safety Instructions in this chapter.

2.1.4. Consequences of Failure to Comply

Failure to comply with the safety regulations increases the danger thatpersonnel may suffer electric shock, and that the equipment andmachinery may be damaged. Third parties who approach the installationare also at risk.

If the scheduled maintenance activities are performed only partially or notat all, damage may occur with associated expensive repair costs.Particularly soiling and dust deposits on the converter increase the riskand favor conditions for voltage flashovers that can cause substantialdamage.



Chapter 2 - Safety Instructions ABB



2.2.1. Structure of the Safety Instructions

Safety sign

Signal Word!

Situation - Type of Hazard Statement

Possible consequence - Consequence Statement

Essential safety measure - Avoidance Statement

The signal word is divided into these categories and emphasized by theuse of the following safety signs:

DANGER!This symbol indicates an imminent danger resulting from mechanicalforces or high voltage. A non-observance leads to life-threateningphysical injury or death.

!WARNING!

This symbol indicates a dangerous situation. A non-observance maylead to bad or life-threatening physical injury or death.

CAUTION!

This symbol indicates a dangerous situation. A non-observance maylead to physical injury or cause damage to the converter.

NOTICE!

This symbol emphasizes important information. A non-observance maycause damage to the converter or to objects close to it.

IMPORTANT!

This symbol indicates useful information. Not to be used to indicatedangerous situations.

2.2.2. General Safety Instructions

The operating voltage in the control cabinets is above 50 V. In the powerpart, voltages can reach 1080 V ac and short-circuit currents can be very





high. In order to warn personnel against opening the doors duringoperation, warning signs are affixed to all cabinet doors.

Other warning signs are mounted on the inside of the cabinet doors andon the covers of the converter modules.

DANGER!

UNITROL 6000-Systems operate with dangerous voltages of up to1080 V ac.

Handling live parts can lead to life-threatening situations, injury of thepersons involved or damage to equipment.

All troubleshooting activities must be carried out with the systemswitched off and grounded.

DANGER!

The secondary voltage of the transformer and the machine voltages arepresent in the excitation cabinet.

There is a danger of electric shock.

All troubleshooting activities must be carried out with the systemswitched off and grounded.

DANGER!

Removal of covers serving as protection against contact.

There is increased risk of injury or death due to accidental contact withlive parts.

All troubleshooting activities must be carried out with the convertermodule switched off and grounded.

!WARNING!

The capacitor of the snubber circuit may still be charged.

This may cause an electric shock.

The capacitor of the snubber circuit must be discharged.

CAUTION!

Electrical parts and Cu-busbars may still be hot.

This may cause slight burns.

Do not touch any parts immediately after removing the module cover.



Chapter 2 - Safety Instructions ABB


2.2.3. Additional Safety Instructions

Local and factory safety regulations must be followed strictly for allactivities while the system is operating and when the doors to theconverter cubicle (+EG) are open.

For additional safety, it isrecommended to wear protectiveclothing, a face shield and hearingprotection.(PPE = Personal ProtectiveEquipment)

Figure 2-1 - PPE

Additional special measures must also be implemented:

Access to the work area must be restricted (safety fence) and yellowwarning signs with the words “Caution Extremely Dangerous HighVoltage" must be displayed prominently.

Steps must be taken to ensure that switched-off systems cannot beswitched on again due to control errors or by third parties (e.g. disableactivation switches with padlocks).





2.3. Safety Labels

Safety labels are affixed to any equipment / location where a potentialdanger applies.

The degree and likelihood of such dangers are denoted by the signalwords DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION. The content of the warningsign contains information about the situation in question and thepreventive safety measures that must be taken.

Sign Description

DANGER

Hazardous voltage inside.

Disconnect power and

ground equipment beforemaintenance work.

Signal word

Situation

Essential safety measure

Figure 2-2 - Structure of Safety Label

Sign Description

DANGER

DANGER, electrical

This symbol indicates imminent dangerthat will result in life-threateningphysical injury or death.

WARNING

WARNING, electrical

This symbol indicates a possibledangerous situation that could result inserious physical injury or death.

CAUTION

CAUTION, electrical

This symbol indicates a possibledangerous situation that could result inmoderate physical injury. This signalword can also be used for warningsrelating to equipment damage.

Figure 2-3 - Safety Labels



ABB


Chapter 3 - Description of the Device

3.1. Introduction

The UNL13300 converter is the latest design of a power component in astatic excitation system for supplying power to a synchronous machinerotor.

The entire system is air- or self-cooled. Each converter can be equippedwith up to two fan boxes. The mechanical configuration of the cabinetsdefines the protection class (IP).

The modular design allows the thyristors and the snubber circuit

components to be fitted optimally according to the input voltage.

3.2. Field of Application

This converter is a part of the excitation system that is used to supplypower to a synchronous machine. The system is not suitable for use inany other application.

3.3. Electrical Units, Overview

A converter cabinet of the UNL 13300 type has a modular constructionand consists of the following units:

For technical performance data see data sheet 3BHS260553 E01.

Converter Module (-G01)

The converter module UNS 4680 is a fully controlled 3-phase bridge withsix thyristors cooled on both sides. To protect the thyristors againstovercurrents, which can result from internal or external short-circuits,

each thyristor branch has an ultra-fast fuse with defect indication switch.The Gate Drive Interface (GDI, -A02) and the Converter Signal Interface(CSI, -A03) belongs to the converter module.

Snubber (-F01)

The snubber (overvoltage protective circuit) UNS 4681 protects the sixthyristors in the converter module from undesirable overvoltages. The unithas a 3-phase protection on the input side and the fuses are fitted with adefect indication switch.



ABB Chapter 3 - Description of the Device


Snubber Resistor (-R01)

The external resistor is part of the snubber, however it must be orderedseparately.

Control Unit (-A01)

The control unit consists of the Converter Control Interface (CCI)mounted on the cubicle door.

Types of Ventilation (-E01)

A natural or forced ventilation is provided for the converter modules.Forced cooling can consist of simple or redundant ventilation.

3.4. Operation of the Converter

The Converter Control Panel (CCP) is purely a display device, which isconnected to the Control Converter Interface (CCI). It providesinformation on the principal operating functions of the converter and it isbuilt into the converter cubicle door.

For more information see the "Operating Instructions" of the CCP.The Excitation Control Terminal (ECT) is used for controlling andmonitoring the whole excitation system.

For more information see the "Operating Instructions" of the ECT.

A Service Control Panel (SCP) can be installed instead of the ECT.



Chapter 3 - Description of the Device ABB


3.5. Mechanical Layout

Standard converter cubicle with branch fuses on the DC side(This figure shows a possible cubicle layout)

Front view Left view

Figure 3-1 - Converter cubicle with branch fuses on the DC side





Standard converter cubicle with branch fuses on the AC side(This figure shows a possible cubicle layout)

Front view Left view

Figure 3-2 - Converter cubicle with branch fuses on the AC side





Door internal view, CCI (-A01) mounted on the door(This figure shows a possible door layout)

Figure 3-3 – Door of the cubicle

Overvoltage protection (Snubber), view from bottom(This figure shows a possible cubicle layout)

Figure 3-4 – Overvoltage protection (Snubber)





3.6. Description of the Individual Units

3.6.1. Converter Module

The converter module (UNS4680) consists of an assembly plate on which6 thyristors are mounted (-V1 to -V6). Each thyristor is located betweentwo heat sinks. The branch fuses (-F1 to -F6) are fixed to the front heatsinks. Each set of three is attached to a connecting rail, the upper beingthe minus rail and the lower being the plus rail. The alternating currentconnections (AK1, AK2, AK3) are arranged at the top. On the left-handside of the assembly plate, the converter signal interface CSI and thegate driver interface GDI) are fixed.

Figure 3-5 - Converter Module with branch fuses on the DC side

The converter modules are equipped with three current sensors (-T01 to-T03) at the AC busbars. Thus an automatic current balance can beachieved and the functionality of each semiconductor can be observed.The current sensors transfer the measured current values to theConverter Signal Interface (CSI).





The GDI board supplies the converter with electrically insulated firingpulses. With an isolation voltage of 7.5 kV, the pulse transformers aremounted separately for electrical isolation.

The Converter Signal Interface (CSI) conditions the AC and DC

measured values and forwards the analog values to the CCI board.The elements of the rectifier bridge are numbered so that those belongingto individual branches have equal numbers. Thus -V1, -F1 or -V2, -F2etc., create each of the six branches.

TA type plate (1) is provided on the right-hand side in order to identify themodule. The type plate contains all the necessary information for theordering of spare parts.

3.6.2. Snubber

The snubber (UNS4681) consists of the following parts:

(1) Assembly plate with the diodes (-V1 to -V6), capacitor (-C1) and fuseholder (- F02) with three fuses.

(2) Resistor (-R01). The resistor is part of the snubber, however it mustbe ordered separately.

( 2 )

-R1-R01

Figure 3-6 - Snubber





3.6.3. Control Unit

The CCI device performs decentralized control and monitoring functionsand provides a link between the pulse generator and the pulse outputstage (GDI). It also regulates current equalization between the convertersconnected in parallel.

The CCI device operates on the 24 V power supply (PS), monitored fromthe Advanced Power Distributor (APD). In order to replace the CCI, the APD offers the opportunity to switch off the CCI power supply of thisparticular converter.

Figure 3-7 - Supply of the CCI

3.6.4. Types of Ventilation

Basically the following variants are available:Natural ventilation of the converter module

The heat produced by the thyristor losses iscarried away by the natural air flow which isestablished by the chimney effect of the heatsinks. No fans are required.

To prevent the thyristor modules from mutuallyheating each other a baffle plate (1) is directingthe warm air from the lower module towards therear.

Natural ventilation is only possible in cabinetswith a roof grid according to standard IP30.Cabinets according to higher protectionstandards are not available, because a closedroof makes natural air circulation impossible.

(1)

Figure 3-8 - Natural Ventilation





Forced ventilation of the converter module

Variant 1: simple ventilation

This consists of a six part channelling kit (2)which directs the air through the convertermodule and a ventilator box (3) with twofans.

Variant 2: redundant ventilation

Like Variant 1, but with four fans. Only twofans are in operation at the same time.

Variant 3: reinforced ventilation

Like Variant 1, but with four fans. All fourfans are constantly in operation.

(2)(2)

(2)(2)

(3)

Figure 3-9 - Forced Ventilation

Arrangement of the fans and switcheswith full set.

(View from above) Air entry

-E01

M1

S1

M 3

S3

M2

S2

M 4

S4

Figure 3-10 - Fan Arrangement



ABB


Chapter 4 - Maintenance

4.1. Safety Instructions

The safety warnings and instructions described in Chapter 2 - must befollowed.

4.2. Introduction

Although electronic components do not show any signs of wear and veryfew indications of aging, the EG cubicle contains a number ofconventional electromechanical components, such as fans that aresubject to a certain degree of wear.

Dirt accumulates in the converter due to air circulation.

Therefore, some tasks must be carried out regularly to ensure operatingsafety.

Only original replacement parts must be used in maintenance work.

See Datasheet "UNL13300 Converter".

4.3. Operating Conditions during Maintenance Work


All power supplies (main and auxiliary power supplies) shut downand disconnected, and the Excitation System grounded.

5 Generator in parallel operation (synchronized).



Chapter 4 - Maintenance ABB


4.4. Maintenance Schedule

Table 4-1 - Maintenance Schedule

Action OC Level *)

Check Intervals

3 months Annual

4.5.1 Visual Inspection X

Air filter mats (Excitation system) XConverter fans X

4.5.2 Functional Inspection X

Event logger XConverter fans operating hours XConverter fans changeover test XConverter cooling air X

4.5.3 Maintenance Work, Cleaning X

Cubicles X

Converter heat sinks XControl electronics X

4.5.4 Maintenance Work, Fans If necessary If necessary

Converter fans X**)

*) OC system operating conditionsIf it is possible or makes sense, the maintenance could be done with a lower level of system operatingconditions**) The relevant converter has to be out of operation (monitoring of the fan flap)The basic status information on the Converter Control Panel (CCP) must display OFF (converterblocked)

If this maintenance schedule differs from the one for the excitationsystem, the schedule for the entire system takes precedence.The lower OC level is always valid independent of the documents (User

Manual or operating instructions).

4.5. Specific Maintenance Tasks

The time intervals indicated above must be followed strictly, particularly inthe first year of operation. The degree of soiling significantly affects themaintenance interval. This should be monitored closely during the firstyear of operation. The intervals can then be optimized according to theresults of these checks. In the event of heavy soiling, intervals must beshorter.

4.5.1. Visual Inspection

For the visual inspection proceed as follows:

Visual inspection is carried out with system operating condition5

Generator in parallel operation (synchronized), visually inspect thefollowing items:

Air Filters Mats (Excitation System)

Contamination of the air filter mats.



ABB Chapter 4 - Maintenance


1) Compare the Operating Instructions of the excitation system.

Converter Fans

2) Check if there are abnormal noises.

Since it is not possible to lubricate the bearings, fans with excessive noisemust be replaced at the next overhaul.

4.5.2. Functional Inspection

Functional inspection is carried out with system operating condition

Generator in parallel operation (synchronized). Inspect the followingitems:

Event Logger

From Converter Control Panel (CCP) or Control Terminal (ECT)

3) Check the Event Logger for active alarms/faults.

CCP: Main Menu \ FAULT LOGGER

ECT: select Events, dynamic list of actual events and the event logger

table.

No alarms/faults should be indicated.

Converter Fans Operating Days

4) Check the operating hours of the fans:

ECT: Select Parameters, choose path [Control IT \ Out \ …

Table 4-2 - Maximum Fan Operating Days

…Path] Converter # Signal name Criteria

Conv_ConverterFanControl1] 1 Fan 1 and 2Fan 3 and 4

Fan1RunningDaysFan2RunningDays

<1 667 days<1 667 days

Conv_ConverterFanControlx] x Fan 1 and 2Fan 3 and 4

Fan1RunningDaysFan2RunningDays

<1 667 days<1 667 days

If a criterion is fulfilled, replace the corresponding fan according to

Chapter 5.4.5

Converter Fans Changeover Test

If the converter is equipped with a redundant fan, the fan that is not inoperation must be checked periodically.

5) Check the converter fan changeover:

ECT: Select Parameters, choose path [Control IT \ In \ …



Chapter 4 - Maintenance ABB


Table 4-3 - Test Redundant Fan


Conv_ConverterFanControl1] 1 Fan 1 & 2 to 3 & 4Fan 3 & 4 to 1 & 2

FanChangeOverFanChangeOver

Fan rotateFan rotate

Conv_ConverterFanControlx] x Fan 1 & 2 to 3 & 4Fan 3 & 4 to 1 & 2

FanChangeOverFanChangeOver

Fan rotateFan rotate

If a fan does not rotate, replace the corresponding fan according toChapter 5.4.5

Converter Heat Sinks and Cooling Air

6) Check the temperature of the thyristor/converter:

- R57: Cooling air 1 temperature inside the converter module

ECT: Select Parameters and choose path [Control IT \ Out \ …

Table 4-4 - Heat Sink and Air Temperature of the Converter


Conv_ConverterModule1] Cooling air 1 ConverterAirTemp <90°CConv_ConverterModulex] Cooling air 1 ConverterAirTemp <90°C

If the temperature is above 90°C, clean the converter heat sink andreplace dirty air filter mats according to Chapters 4.5.3 and 4.5.1.

4.5.3. Maintenance Work, Cleaning

7) Cleaning is carried out with system operating condition Allpower supplies (main and auxiliary power supplies) shut down anddisconnected, and the Excitation System grounded.

Cubicles

8) Clean the air outlets of the converter cubicle.

Converter Heat Sinks

9) Open the cabinet doors with the double bit key.

10) Remove the module cover.

11) Connect the grounding equipment to the two bolts (DC side) and the AC bus.

12) Clean the equipment with a brush and vacuum cleaner. Never usesolvents or compressed air.



ABB Chapter 4 - Maintenance


Control Electronics

13) Check the printed circuit boards.

Dirt and dust should not accumulate on the printed circuit boards undernormal conditions. Use a vacuum cleaner and soft brushes to clean theboards. On no account use solvents!

4.5.4. Maintenance Work, Fans

Maintenance of the fans is carried out with system operating condition.

Generator in parallel operation (synchronized).Be careful: The relevant converter must be out of operation.

DANGER!

Dangerous voltage

The live parts are located directly over the fan box area and there is nocover mounted, any contact with them will cause serious or even fatalinjury.

When the excitation system is in operation, a replacement of the fan boxmust be done with great care.

Converter Fan

Replace the fans after approximately 40 000 hours of operation.

See Chapter 5.4.5 - Fault in the Fan Box / Replacing the Fan Box



ABB



5.1. Safety Instructions

The safety warnings and instructions described in Chapter 2 - must befollowed.

5.2. Operating Conditions during Repair Work


All power supplies (main and auxiliary power supplies) shut downand disconnected, and the Excitation System grounded.

Operating condition for OFF-LINE Repair

Generator in parallel operation (synchronized)

Operating condition for ON-LINE Repair, but the relevant converter is notin operation.

5.3. Replacement of Defective Components

Table 5-1 - Operating Conditions for Replacement of Components

Replacement OC*)

OFF-LINE

ON-LINE

Converter Module, configuration standard and twin:- Thyristor

- Fan box, redundant or single- Converter Control Interface (CCI)

X

X**)X

Converter Module, configuration economic; w/o redundancy:- Thyristor- Fan box, redundant- Fan box, single- Converter Control Interface (CCI)

XXXX

*) OC system operating conditions (refer to Chapter 5.2 )If it is possible and reasonable, the maintenance could be done with a lower level of system operating conditions.

**) The relevant converter must be out of operationThe basic status information on the Converter Control Panel (CCP) must display OFF (converter blocked)



ABB Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting


5.4. Cause of Failure and Remedy

The converters described here are always an integral part of theexcitation system that consists of control electronic and power modules.

Malfunctions in an +EG cubicle (e.g. loss of air pressure) are reported tothe control electronic of the excitation system via signaling switches, andthe causes can be identified with the aid of:

• Converter Control Panel (CCP) on the +EG converter cubicle or

• Excitation Control Terminal (ECT) on the +ER control cubicle or

• User Manual of the excitation system.

The following is a list of possible causes of faults as well as the procedurefor troubleshooting internal failures in the +EG cubicle:

5.4.1. Preparation procedures:

1) Switch off the whole excitation system (See Table 5-1 - Operating Conditions for Replacement of Components).

2) Remove auxiliary voltage (See the electrical drawing of the excitationsystem).

3) Earth AC and DC busbars.

4) Remove contact protection (Plexiglass).

5.4.2. Fault sources and fault elimination

Thyristor Failure Chapter 5.4.3

Carrying out the thyristor test.Replacing a thyristor.Replacing a branch fuse.Function check.

Faults in the Snubber Circuit Chapter 5.4.4

Carry out snubber test.Changing fuses.Repairing the snubber.Function check.

Fault in the Fan Box / Replacing the Fan Box Chapter 5.4.5

Removal of the ventilator box.Changing a fan.Functional check.



Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting ABB


Fault in the CCI Device / Replacing the Device Chapter 5.4.6

Fault in the Electronics / Replacing a Board Chapter 5.4.7

Overheating due to poor Ventilation User Manual,

Contamination of the air filter mats Excitation System,Chapter 9

5.4.3. Thyristor Failure

DANGER!

Excitation system operates with dangerous voltages of up to 1080 V ac.

Handling live parts can lead to life-threatening situations, injury of thepersons involved or equipment damage.

The following tasks must only be carried out with the system switchedoff and grounded.

Carrying out the thyristor test

1) Identify the faulty thyristor branch:

A faulty semiconductor is indicated on the Converter Control Panel(CCP). This applies both for loss of voltage blocking capability and for

firing failure.

For equipment without current monitoring the auxiliary contact on thebranch fuses must be checked:

The loss of blocking capability of athyristor always leads to aresponse of the associated branchfuse. The fuses are equipped withsignaling contacts i.e. the affectedconverter branch is identifiablethrough the protruding red plastic

part of the signaling contact.(1) = response(2) = no response

(2)(1)

Figure 5-1 - Branch Fuse

2) Remove defective fuses

In Chapter 5.5.3 the step-by-step procedure for the removal of asemiconductor is described. To remove a fuse steps D1 and D2 of theseinstructions are to be followed.

3) Testing the blocking ability of the thyristor:





The blocking ability of a thyristor must be tested before its removal. In theunmounted position thyristors basically do not work since the silicon layeronly makes contact within the thyristor by pressure. A simple test can bemade with a continuity tester (torch, test buzzer) with a DC voltage of 3 Vto 10 V.

Apply the voltage of the continuitytester in the forward direction of thethyristor: for the upper half of the bridge(+) to the front heat sink, (-) to the rearone. The tester must not indicatecontinuity.

For the lower bridge half, reverse thepolarities: (+) to the back heat sink, (-)

to the front one. - V4

- +

GDI

Figure 5-2 - Thyristor Blocking Ability

If the tester shows continuity, there is a short circuit in the semiconductor.The element must be replaced and returned to the manufacturer for amore precise fault diagnosis, with a brief explanation of the origin of thefault.

4) Testing the firing ability of the thyristor.

If the thyristor blocks in the forward direction the firing can be tested.

Remove the gate wire (white) from thebelonging connection on the gate driverinterface (GDI). Now fire the thyristor bybriefly contacting the (+) potential withthe gate wire. After being fired it mustcontinue conducting until the voltage iscut off.

- V4

- +

GDI

Figure 5-3 - Thyristor Firing Ability

Should the tester show no continuity even when the gate wire is incontact, then either the cable or the thyristor is defective and thesemiconductor must be removed.





Should the tester only show continuity while the gate wire is in contact, itis possible that the latching current is not reached. According to the sizeof the layers a current of 100 to 300 mA is required for the thyristor tocontinue conducting once fired. If this current cannot be delivered by thecontinuity tester, the test must be carried out with a stronger source (apower supply or similar). However, the voltage must not exceed 10 V. Ifthe thyristor is supplied with a higher current and still does not fire, it canbe considered as defective and must be replaced.

The gate wire is to be reconnected after the test.

5) Testing with an unmounted thyristor.

When the thyristor is unmounted, the gate wire can be tested. If broken,the wire can be replaced and the thyristor reinstalled. It is importanthowever that the correct cable quality and a suitable connection plug is

used. If in doubt, replace the whole thyristor and order a gate wire setfrom the manufacturer.

Note: On changing the gate wire ensure that the plug unit (Faston, etc.) istight. This connection can no longer be checked once the thyristor ismounted.

The gate connection should never be soldered. This can damage theelement.

To test the firing directly on the gate when unmounted, the thyristorhousing must be weighted down e.g. with the removed heat sink half. Ifthe thyristor is defective it must be returned to the manufacturer with ashort explanation of the fault situation.

Replacing a Thyristor

The step-by-step procedure for changing a semiconductor is described inChapter 5.5 - Changing a Thyristor .

Replacing a Thyristor Branch Fuse

This is achieved following the step-by-step instructions in the last section.Removal: see steps D1 and D2, reinstallation as described in M5 and M6.

Functional Check on the Module After the cleaning and repair works on the primary circuit have beencompleted, a visual inspection must be carried out and the insulationchecked.

1) First, ensure that all the screws and cables are tightened again, thatall tools have been removed and that no loose parts have been leftin the module or the cubicle.

2) Once the repair works are finished, remove the grounding on theprimary circuit.





3) Connect the five main connections AK1, AK1, AK1, (+) and (-) (seeelectrical drawings) to the converter module and check thegrounding with a 500 V ac isolation tester. In this way, the pulsecables will also be checked. The insulation resistance must not beless than 1 MOhm.

4) After replacing a branch fuse, pull out the red plastic part on thesignal switch in order to check the safety fuse monitoring function.This simulates the activation of the firing pin. Now check that theevent has been signaled correctly by the control electronics.

5.4.4. Faults in the Snubber Circuit

All activity on the snubber circuit must be carried out with the convertermodule switched off and grounded.

The safety warnings and instructions described in Chapter 2.2 must befollowed in all cases.

!WARNING!

The snubber circuit capacitor may still be charged.

This may cause an electric shock.

The snubber circuit capacitor must be discharged.

Procedure for testing the snubber

1) Measure the capacitor voltage. The capacitor must be discharged. If itis not, discharge it with a wire bridge.

2) Open the fuse holders. Defective fuses are indicated by the protrusionof the set stud. This may either indicate a short-circuited diode or aflashover of the capacitor. The fuse holder can be left open for furthermeasurements.

3) Test the diodes with a continuity tester. The forward direction ispresented below. Depending on the sensitivity of the tester, the resistor

must be disconnected first. (Resistor -R01 ca. 1.2 kOhm).

Figure 5-4 - Diode Module of the Snubber Circuit





4) Test the resistor and capacitor with an Ohmmeter. To clearly identify adefective element it may be necessary to remove the wiring between thecomponents.

Changing of fusesOnly original spare parts should be used when replacing defective fuses.Ensure that the contact surfaces are clean and insert the fuses with theset stud upwards.

Repairing the snubber

Only original spare parts should be used when replacing defectivecomponents. After replacements, the wiring must be returned to itsoriginal state as shown in the following diagrams:

UNS 4681, Var. 511, Var. 513

UNS 4681, Var. 512 (only one diode in series)

Figure 5-5 - Snubber Circuit

Functional Check

A fused, three-phase secondary power supply will be needed for thefunctional check, e.g. power supply to fans, maximum voltage 50 V AC.

While the fuse holder is open, apply the secondary power after the fuseholder and then measure the voltage across the capacitor. In normaloperation, the voltage is 1.35 x rms value of the alternating voltageapplied. Tolerance is +/- 10%. Close the fuse holder and measure thecapacitor with a voltmeter.





5.4.5. Fault in the Fan Box / Replacing the Fan Box

The converter is not in operation

Replacing the Fan Box

-F5-F3-F1

-E01

(4)

(3)

(1)

(2)

1) The fans must be switched off by opening theappropriate protection switches (see electricaldrawing of the excitation system)

2) Release wire binders and pull out the plug (1).

3) Release fixing screws in positions (2) and (3).

4) Withdraw the ventilator box (-E01) from thefront (4).

5) Insert new ventilator box and refit all screws.

6) Re-insert plug (1) and fix the wire binders.

7) Reclose protection switches.

Figure 5-6 - Replacing the Fan Box

Changing a Fan

The fan can only be replaced with the ventilator box removed.

(1)

(2)

1) The cable duct within the box must be openedand the cable released from its terminal.

2) The airflap (1) on the defective fan must becarefully raised (take care not to bend theoperating flags for the auxiliary contact !).

3) The four screws (2) are to be released and thefan lifted out.

4) Install the new fan.

5) Check the operation of the air flap (easymovement, the switch will operate).

6) Reinstall the ventilator box.

Figure 5-7 - Changing a Fan





5.4.6. Fault in the CCI Device / Replacing the Device

CCI Device Preparation

Write down the device address of the old converter module before

installing a new CCI-Board.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1

0

2

46

8

C

A E

Figure 5-8 - CCI Device

Code Switch S200 for Device Address:

1) Set the number of the corresponding converter unit

If the firmware is not in the valid range, an alarm will be pending on theECT according to point 8).

Replacing the CCI Device

2) Switch off the Advanced Power Distributor (APD) switch, whichsupplies the CCI. (+ER cubicle).

• The basic status information on the Converter Control Panel (CCP)must display OFF (converter blocked).

3) Remove all cable connectors and fiber optic cables

4) Remove all screws holding the device

5) Fix the new device with all screws

6) Plug in all cable connectors and fiber optic cables

7) Switch on the APD (Power up)

8) If the firmware is not in the valid range, the alarm CCIx1) DeviceType Error is pending on the ECT.Download the corresponding firmware

1) x = Number of the CCI-Board

9) Confirm the RESET in ECT to release the converter again.

10) Check the display on the CCP in the cabinet door:

• The basic status information on the Converter Control Panel (CCP)must display ON (Converter in operation)

The converter is again in operation.





5.4.7. Fault in the Electronics / Replacing a Board

The boards are inside the converter module. For safety reasons it is notallowed to open the cover from the converter in operation.

DANGER!

Dangerous voltage

The live parts are located directly behind the cover; any contact withthem will cause serious or even fatal injury.

When the excitation system is in operation, the front cover on theconverter module must not be removed for any reason.

Preparation of the Board

No settings are necessary on any other boards.

Replacement of a Board

1) Remove all cable connectors.

2) Remove all screws holding the board.

3) Fix the new device with all screws.

4) Plug in all cable connectors.

5.5. Changing a Thyristor

In the next section, the removal of a defective thyristor and the installationof its replacement are presented in illustrated steps with comments.

The safety warnings and instructions described in Chapter 2.2 must befollowed in all cases.

Defective thyristors are replaced while the converter module is switchedoff and grounded.

For simplification purposes, only the upper bridge half is represented inthe diagram. On the lower bridge half the fuses are mounted under theheat sink. Apart from the thyristors being the other way round (Anodesand Cathodes are reversed) the procedure remains the same.

5.5.1. Tools and auxiliary materials

No special tools are required to carry out a thyristor change. In addition tothe normal tools like screwdrivers, Allen keys, spanners, etc., thefollowing tools and materials are to be available:





Tools

Torque spanner 30 NmStraightedge

A rustfree steel wire brushClamping tool for cable end connectorsFaston cable end connectors 6.3 x 0.8 mm

Auxiliary materials

Silicon grease:Temperature resistant silicon grease (Melt temperature > 180 °C)(ABB Identification No. NBT 400 725 P1)

Contact grease for rail connections: Acid free Vaseline grease without abrasive contents(ABB Identification No. NBT 400 055 P2)

Industrial alcohol (denatured light spirit)

5.5.2. Polarity of the Thyristors mounted between the Heat Sinks

Converter version with branch fuses on the DC or AC side

( + )

( - )

Figure 5-9 – Mounting Direction of the Thyristor





5.5.3. Replacement of Thyristors UNS 4680

The polarity of the thyristor which is depicted in the previous section is tobe respected during assembly

- Removal of a thyristor see steps D1 to D6

- Installation of a thyristor see steps M1 to M6

(2)

(1)

lead D1 Release nut (2), withdraw threaded bolt (1).

M6 Screw in threaded bolt (1) by hand and tighten nut(2) with a 22 Nm torque.

Note: Always screw in the threaded bolt by hand up tostop.

(4)

(3)

(5)D2 Remove the auxiliary contact from the fuse.

Release nut (3). Withdraw threaded bolt (4).Remove fuse (5). (mounted above or underneaththe heat sink)

M5 Install fuse (5) and threaded bolt (4). Tighten nut(3) with a torque of 22 Nm. Attach auxiliary contact

to fuse.





(7)

(6)

(8)

(10)

(9)(14)

D3

M4

D3 Release the pressure on the clamping fixture byloosening the nuts (6) and (7) alternately with ¼turns. Remove the nuts. Remove the yoke (8)along with its spring set.

M4 Push yoke (8) over the bolts. First tighten nuts (6)and (7) by hand. Then with a spanner alternatelytighten nuts with ¼ turns until the yoke no longerdisplays any curvature (check with straightedge(9)).

(10)

(11)

D4 Remove the front half of the heat sink (11).

M3 Push front heat sink half (11) over bolts (12).

(12)

(13)

(12)

D5 Remove gate connections to thyristor. (In the eventof a defective gate wire: remove the connectionsfrom the pulse transformer and cut away the wirebinder on the gate wire). Remove the thyristor (13)with holder.

M2 Push the new thyristor (13) with its holder over thebolts (12). Connect the gate lead to the thyristor.(In the event of a defective gate wire: lay out a newwire and fix with a wire binder. Insert the gate leadinto the pulse transformer: white to connection 6,red to 7).

Note: Before inserting the new gate wire, cut it to therequired length and fit with suitable AMP wire endterminals.





D6 State before mounting new thyristor.

M1 Clean the contact surfaces of both heat sinkhalves thoroughly with alcohol. Then apply somesilicon grease to a steel wire brush and roughenthe contact surfaces by brushing them(crosswise). This removes the aluminum oxidelayer. Wipe away the resultant black material.Finally with a clean, non fibrous cloth deposit alittle silicon grease on the heat sinks’ contactsurfaces.

Note: The contact surfaces must only be provided witha thin film of grease! Once the grease is appliedmount the thyristor immediately.

Figure 5-10 - Replacement of a Thyristor



ABB


Chapter 6 - Final Check

After all works and functional checks in the EG cubicle are completed andbefore the system is put into operation again, a final visual inspectionmust be carried out.

• Check that all screws and cables are tight, all tools have beenremoved, and no loose parts are left in the cubicle.

• Check that the grounding equipment is removed.

• Close the door of the cubicle.

• Do not forget to reset the Alarms/Events in the ECT.

The restart after troubleshooting has to be done as described in the UserManual of the excitation system.



ABB


Chapter 7 - Spares

When changing assemblies or components only original spare parts areto be used.

In order to be able to carry out the necessary repairs as quickly aspossible in the event of a breakdown, we recommend that you keepcertain spare parts in store. The numbers of these parts is dependent on:

The number of converters per equipment.

The number of equipments in the power station.

The number of redundant systems.



ABB


REVISION

Rev.

ind.

Page (P)

Chapt (C)

DescriptionDate

Dept./Init.

A(C) 2

(C) 3.5

- Safety instructions completed with safety rules

- New mechanical layouts30.01.2009 / Mo

B (C) 4.5 - Correction of tables 4.2 to 4.4 05.03.2009 / Mo

C (C) 6 - Final check, new chapter 20.03.2009 / Mo

D -- - Converter version with branch fuses on the AC side 19.08.2010 / Mo



PP D113 B AC 800PEC ControllerData Sheet

AC 800PEC

PP D113 B

Features

High Control Performance

High I/O Performance

High Reliability

Qualified for Industrial Environment

32-bit PowerPC G3

64-bit IEEE Floating-Point-Unit

64 Mbyte Memory with Error-Correction

16 Mbyte Flash

Two 10/100BASE-TX Ethernet Ports

Two UARTs

Virtex-II Field-Programmable Gate Array

140x General Purpose Programmable I/O

Voltage/Temperature Monitors

Two AnyIO interfaces

Up to six optical modules

Operation temperature range -40 to +70°C

Highlights

AC 800PEC is a high-end controller belonging toABB’s Control

IT family, it is configured and

programmed with Control Builder M andMATLAB/Simulink with Real-Time Workshop. TheController combines a very powerful CPU and largeField-Programmable Gate Array, which suites AC800PEC to control demanding Power ElectronicsSystems.

It’s utilizing Ethernet as preferred medium forconfiguration and communication to upper control.The unit mounts on a DIN rail and interfaces withABB’s S800 IO system via optical Modulebus andABB’s communication modules via communicationExpansion Bus. AC 800PEC system also supports3

rdparty Anybus-S fieldbus modules.

IO modules are connected via high-speed point topoint fiber optical connections. PP D113 B supportsup to 36 bi-directional fiber-optic links.



Technical Data

SimplifiedAC800PECBlockDiagram

Processor module (AC 800PEC-CPU)

PPC750FX@600MHz

64-bit IEEE FPU@600MHz

Virtex-II @40/80MHz

10k/20k/30k LUTs

40x/56x/96x 18x18bit Multipliers

Two PCI32@40MHz

Burst-DMA - FPGA to SDRAM

64 MB ECC memory

16 MB Flash memory

Power supply (AC 800PEC-PS)

24V Power supply unit included

2x24 Volt redundant input

Optical module (AC 800PEC-OM)

PEC800-OMs mount to PEC800-BP backplane

Max. 6 optical modules including 6 links each

OM for plastic and glass fiber optic (POF or GOF)

Any-IO (AC 800PEC-AIO-CEX)

CEX modules (RS 232 and RS 422)

Anybus-S modules (ProfiBUS, CANopen,

Ethernet Modbus/TCP, Modbus RTU)

Basic Unit (AC 800PEC-BU)

1x AC 800PEC-CPU

2x Interface for up to 6x AC 800PEC-OM

2x 800PEC-AIO-CEX

Back plane (AC 800PEC-BP)

DIN-rail mounting

PEC800 housing l 450, w 120, h 100mm

Environmental conditions

Air conditions: IEC 60068-2

Operating temp: -40 to +70°C

Relative humidity: 5% to 95% @ +40°C

Protection Class IP 20

Vibrations: IEC 60255-21-1

Traction: EN 61373

EMC: IEC 61000-4-3

IEC 61000-4-4

IEC 61000-4-5

EN 55011

TA= -25 to 55°C: PPC750FX@600MHz

TA= -40 to 70°C: PPC750FX@400MHz

Reliability: 3020 FIT (GB, 40°C)



UF D128 AC 800PEC Optical Module-I-6-V10Data Sheet

Optical Module with6 bi-directional

versatile links

Features

Low-cost versatile connector

3 or 6 links per module

1 mm POF or 200 µm HCS cable

10 Mbp/s

Up to 120 m

Safe driver shut-down

Configurable power for optical transmitters

I2C EEPROM for data storage

Highlights

AC 800PEC OM-I-V10 Versatile Optical Modules are used

to interface the AC 800PEC system to remote devices

connected by optical fiber cables. The modules support

the Agilent Versatile fiber system.

The module converts optical signals from/to LVTTL-

signals. The optical signals are transmitted and received

by means of optical fiber cables.

The transmitter power is configurable to a low- power and

a high-power mode. The low-power mode is used for

smaller systems with short POF cables. The high-power

mode is used for systems with long cables and in systems

utilizing HCS cables.

An independent input is supported for safe shut-down of

all transmitters. Safe shut-down is typically used during

system start-up or for watchdog functionality.

For module identification and non-volatile data storage an

EEPROM (I2C-bus) is available.



Technical Data

OE

EEPROM

R X

/ I O 0 1

T X

/ I O 0 2

R X

/ I O 0 3

T X

/ I O 0 4

R X

/ I O 0 5

T X

/ I O 0 6

R X

/ I O 0 7

T X

/ I O 0 8

R X

/ I O 0 9

T X

/ I O 1 0

R X

/ I O 1 1

T X

/ I O 1 2

I2C

X2X1

SimplifiedBlock Diagram

I/O compatibility

Transmitter: Agilent QFBR-1549 (HFBR-1528)

Receiver: Agilent QFBR-2549 (HFBR-2528)

1 mm POF standard fiber: -0.27 dB/m

1 mm POF low-loss fiber: -0.23 dB/m

200

m HCS fiber: -10 dB/km

Power budget, TA = 0 to 70°C: POF/HCS

High-Power (60 mA): 7.6 dB / 1.5 dB

Low-Power (30 mA): 2.6 dB / NA

Max. cable length, TA = 0 to 70°C: 30/60 mA

1 mm POF standard: 8 m / 25 m

1 mm POF low-loss: 10 m / 30 m

200

m HCS: NA / 120 m

Power budget, TA = -40 to 85°C: POF/HCS

High-Power (60 mA): 6.8 dB / 0.7 dB

Low-Power (30 mA): 1.8 dB / NA

Max. cable length, TA = -40 to 85°C: 30/60 mA

1 mm POF standard: 5 m / 20 m

1 mm POF low-loss: 6m / 25 m

200

m HCS: NA / 50 m

Other features

Global shut-down: 8

s (max)

Power requirements (type / max)

High power mode: 2.7 W / 3.0 W @ 5 V

Low power mode: 1.8 W / 2.0 W @ 5 V

I/O supply: 0.05 W / 0.1 W @ 3.3 V

Environmental requirements

Operating temp.: -40 to +70°C

Relative humidity: 5% to 95% @ +40°C

Vibrations: TBD

EMC: TBD



PC D230 A01 PEC80-CCM Communication Controland Measurement Data Sheet

PEC80-

CCMDevice

Features

Fast Controller Board PEC80-PM Processingmodule

4 port Ethernet communication switchInterface

Control panel serial interface RS 485 CAN interface 4 Optical module interfaces with maximum 12

optical links

6 fast digital 24 Volt inputs isolated with optocouplers

4 system control LED’s 2 digital relay outputs and one galvanically

isolated electronic 24 volt fast output 4 current measuring inputs 5 an 1 ampere 4 voltage inputs 110 volt ac 2 galvanically isolated analog outputs with

±10 Volts Watchdog function High Reliability Operation temperature range –25 to +70 °C

Highlights

The Communication Control and Measurement device

PC D230 A is an intelligent control and measurement

device with specially designed customer interfaces as

required within UNITROL 6000 Excitation Control

Systems.

The device is based on the AC80-PEC control

platform and includes the control module PEC80-CU

with the processor module PEC80-PM, power supply

PEC80-PS and several optical modules PEC80-OM. It

supports the software functionalities as implemented

within PEC80 control system.

A four port Ethernet switch, a panel interface, a RS485

Modbus and a CAN interface are available for

communication. In case of other fieldbus requirements

a FIG fieldbus module can be adapted additionally.

Further on it serves as a signal conditioner as required

in synchronous machine excitation systems. Eight fast

measurement inputs allows detection of three phase

machine current and voltage and one phase bus bar

current and voltage.

For control purpose the device provides 6 optical

isolated digital 24/48 Volt inputs, two relays and one

isolated electronic output. Finally two isolated analog

outputs are also available.

The device is powered by a redundant 24 volt supply

input.



Technical Data

O p t o I n t e r f a c e

A p p l i c a t i o n

I O

PEC80-CU

CAN

P E C 8 0 - P M

Communi-

cation

Opto links

to IO and

Converter

RS232

RS485

Ethernet

I2C

PEC80-PS

PEC80-OM

PEC80-EMU

Fast IO

ADC control

Supply

Supply

PEC80-CCM

PEC80-OM

4 channel 1/5 Acurrent In uts

4 channel

110 V volta e

6 channel

digital inputs

3 channel

digital outputs

2 channel

analog

SimplifiedBlockDiagram

Communication

4 x 10/100 MB Ethernet ports RS 485 CAN open interface ABB Service Control Panel RS 485 Modbus interface Fieldbus via FIG modules 4 x optical Modules

Analog voltage input

Nominal Input 110Vrms; max. 163% Input impedance < 2M

Analog accuracy < 0.1% Nominal Temperature Drift < 50 ppm/°C Input frequency 10 to 120 Hz Isolation test voltage 2 kVrms

Analog current input

Input signal range 1 / 5A; max.150% Input impedance isolated sensor input Analog accuracy <0.2% Nominal Temperature Drift < 50 ppm/°C Input frequency 10 to 120 Hz Isolation test voltage 2 kVrms

Analog output

Output signal range ±10 Volt Output current 4 mA/Channel Analog accuracy <1% FSR ;12 Bit Output bandwidth 1 kHz Isolation test voltage 500 Vrms

Device address

Setting range hex 0 to F

Digital inputs

6 isolated 24/48 volt input channels

Input current typically 6 mA Isolation test voltage 500 Vrms

Digital outputs

1 isolated 24 Volt output channel Continuous current 0.3 A

Thermal and short circuit protected Isolation test voltage 500 Vrms 2 relay outputs 250 volt / 2A; NO contacts Isolation test voltage 1.5 kVrms

Real time clock

Seconds, Minutes, Hours, Day of Week,Date of Month and Year

Backup time typical 15 days

Power supply inputs

Redundant 24V with 18 to 30V range


Operating temp: -25 to +70°C Relative humidity: 5% to 95% @ +40°C Vibrations: IEC 60255-21 EMC: IEC/EN 61000 Reliability: GB, 40°C 6’747 FIT



Data sheet

a 04-03-06 Gi c Ausgest: 00-01-07 Ru Dok.-Art Format Sprache Seite

b Änd. d Geprüft: 00-01-12 RoZust. Stelle Übern. Stelle e Normgepr.:

Entst. aus / Ers. f.: Freigeg.: 00-01-13 RuErsetzt durch:

FEATURES

• Final pulse stage for a DB6 or B2-thyristor bridge.• Suitable for disc-type thyristor up to 4".• internal (V1) or external (V2) pulse transformer

SHORT DESCRIPTION

The gate driver interface GDI is used for remote operation of a single- or three-phase converterbridge. All converter control functions have to be included in a previous device (normally inConverter Interface UNS 0880). The gate driver interface GDI is to be connected to the converterinterface CIN by flat cable.

The typical application of this device is in excitation installations with the following functions inparticular:

• Final pulse stage for a DB6- or B2-thyristor bridge with one thyristor per thyristor bridgebranch.

• The applicable range is 1.5" up to 4" thyristors.

Device Context of var.1:

GDICIN

Device Context of var.2:

GDI

CIN

TRIAX-Cable, lenght max. 30m

external Pulstransformer

EXCITATION SYSTEM UNITROL®5000

Gate Driver Interface GDIUNITROL

UNS 0881a-P, V1/V2

3BHS 107542 E01

TA A 4 E 1 14

ATPT1

Rev.



PC D235 A – AC 800PEC CIO-FU

Combined Input Output Data Sheet

PCD235 ADevice

Features

16 Relay outputs

12 digital control inputs, 24V or 48V with two

independent 24V polling voltage supplies

3 analog outputs, +/-10V

3 analog inputs, +/-10V or +/-20mA

3 interfaces to PT100 or PTC temperature sensors

Isolated bender relay interface RS485

1 optical module interface with 3 optical links

4 system control LED’s

Independent watchdog function

High Reliability

Operation temperature range –25 to +70°C

Highlights

The Combined Input Output device PC

D235 A is a general purpose interface

device which provides digital and analog

inputs and outputs. Redundancy of all

system interfaces by means of two PC

D235 A devices is supported.

The device is based on the AC 800PECcontrol platform and includes the FPGA

based control module PD D205 A,

application interface board UC D208 A,

power supply KU D210 A and one

optical module UF D202 A.

The device is powered by a redundant

24 volt supply input.



Technical Data

O

p t o i n t e r f a c e

a p p l i c a t i o n I O

PD D205 A

F P G A

Communication

ABB

PowerLinks

KU D210 A

UF D202 A

UC D208 A

IO

ADC control

Supply

Digital Output

Supply

PC D235 A

Digital Input

Analog Output

Analog Input


Power Supply Inputs

Redundant 24V 20 to 28V

Max. supply current 2A

Communication

RS 485 Isolated bender relay interface

10MBd Optical Link

Analog Inputs

Input voltage range -10V…+10V

Input current range -20mA…+20mA

Burden resistance 50

< 1% FSR

Input bandwith 2kHz

Analog Outputs

Output voltage range -10V…+10V

Max. output current 5mA

< 1% FSR

Temperature Inputs

3-Wire measurement

Suitable sensor PTC and PT100

Meas. range PT100 -40 to +240°C

Accuracy PT100 < 1.5°C

Switching resistance PTC 500

Digital Inputs

Isolated 24/48 volt

Input Channels 2 groups of 6

One polling voltage supplyper group

Input current typically 6mA

Isolation test voltage 500Vrms

Polling voltage 24V

Max. current of pollingvoltage supply 85mA

Digital Outputs

Relay output channels 2 groups of 8

Switching voltage 240VAC; 2A

Switching voltage 250VDC; 0.3A


Device Address

Setting range 0 to 15

Environmental Requirements

Operating temp -25 to +70°C

Relative humidity (40°C) 5% to 95%

Vibrations IEC 60255-21

EMC IEC/EN 61000

Reliability (GB, 40°C) 7082 FIT



PC D231 B01 PEC80-CCI Converter ControlInterface Data Sheet

PEC80-CCI

Device

Features

4 system control LED 4 port Ethernet communication switch interface Control panel serial interface RS232

CAN interface RS485

1 optical module interface with 3 optical links

Independent watchdog function

High Reliability

Operation temperature range –25 to +70°C

3-phase measurement of converter voltage Usync Measurement of converter output voltage Udc

3-phase measurement of converter current Iconv

Gate driver interface to GDI UNS 0881

8 interfaces to KTY temperature sensors

Optical interface to snubber control

8 digital power outputs 24 volt

11 digital control inputs

1 dedicated pulse blocking input

Highlights

The Converter Control Interface device PC D231 B

is an intelligent control device with thyristor bridge

rectifier specific IO and control functions as

required within UNITROL 6000 Excitation Control

Systems. It serves as an interface to the GDI, CSI

and SCI.

The device is based on the AC80-PEC control

platform and includes the control module PEC80-

CU with the processor module PEC80-PM, power

supply PEC80-PS and one optical module PEC80-

OM. It supports the whole software functionalities

as implemented within PEC80 control system.

A four port Ethernet switch, a panel interface, a

RS485 Modbus and a CAN interface are available

for communication.

The CCI is conditioner of the synchronous voltage

measurement, the converter output voltage, the 3-

phase converter current as well as temperature

inputs. In addition the following functions areimplemented:

Synchronization, Gate Control Unit, Fault

Detection Function, Redundancy Switch and

Current Equalizing Regulation.

The device is powered by a redundant 24 volt

supply input.



Technical Data

O p t o I n t e r f a c e

A p p l i c a t i o n I O

PEC80-CU

CAN

P E C 8 0 - P M

Communi-

cation

Power links

to the control

channels

RS232

RS485

Ethernet

I2C

PEC80-PS

PEC80-CCU

Fast IO

ADC control

Supply

PowerSupply

PEC80-CCI

Gate Driver Interface GDI

Converter Signal Interface CSI

12 digital inputs

8 digital outputs

PEC80-OM

8 temperature inputs

Snubber Control Interface SCI


Communication

4 x 10/100MB Ethernet ports

ABB Service Control Panel

1 x Optical Module

Control of Snubber Control Interface

Converter voltage and Udc inputs

Nominal input AC 1.133V; max. 150%

Input range -2.40 to +2.40V

Input impedance 10.0kΩ

Analog accuracy < 0.5% FSR

Input frequency 0 to 600Hz Suitable for 500V, 1kV and 1.5kV of CSI

Converter current inputs

Nominal input DC 1.00V, max. 350%

Input range -3.50 to +3.50V

Analog accuracy < 0.8% FSR

Input frequency 0 to 600Hz

Temperature inputs

Suitable for KTY10-6 sensor 2kΩ @ 25°C

Measuring range -10 to +150°C

Overall accuracy < 2.3°C

Gate driver in terface

Supply for GDI 24V, max. 1.4A

Pulse outputs 24V/300mA

Digital inputs

11 insulated input channels with internal

24V supply voltage. One out of them is

dedicated for pulse release.

1 insulated 24/48V voltage input channel,

dedicated for pulse blocking. Input current typically 6mA Isolation test voltage 500Vrms

Digital outputs

8 isolated 24 Volt output channels

Continuous current, 2 x 300mA, 6 x 50mA

Thermal and short circuit protected


Device address

Setting range 0 to 15

Power supply inputs

Redundant 24V with 20 to 28V range


Operating temp: -25 to +70°C

Relative humidity: 5% to 95% @ +40°C Vibrations: IEC 60255-21 EMC: IEC/EN 61000 Reliability: GB, 40°C 6164 FIT



UA D215 A PEC80-CSI-2 Converter Signal InterfaceData Sheet

PEC80- CSI-2Device

Features

Current Measurement

3-Phase current measurement with up to0.5% accuracy, including the ability to detectthe current’s direction.

Integrated current transformer demagne-tization unit, available with 15V and 30Vdemagnetization voltage.

Supported current transformers:5kA current transformer 3ADT751007P1

3kA current transformer 3ADT751010P1

Faston-T connectors to connect to the currenttransformers.

Voltage Measurement

3-Phase synchronous voltage measurementwith up to 0.5% accuracy.

1x converter field voltage measurement(differential, 2 voltage inputs).

CCI Interface

Depending on single or redundant outputvariant, one respectively two D-SUB

connector with 25 contacts is available.

Highlights

The UA D215 Converter Signal Interface (CSI-2) offers

the ability to measure 3-phase current, the 3-phase

synchronous system voltage and the converter DC

voltage. AC current sensing is done with passive current

transformers. An integrated current sensor demagne-

tization unit prevents saturation of the current

transformer in case of a breakdown in one of the current

phases. Further, it may occur that positive and negative

phase currents are not equal and the current

transformer core could get an unwanted DC offset. The

demagnetization unit also prevents this.

The Converter Signal Interface is available in 8 different

variants. Each variant has its own nominal input voltage

range and a defined demagnetization voltage matching

to a specific current transformer. In addition redundant

variants are available.

The device does not require a power supply.

Remark: Below the following functionalities are

mentioned in brackets: Demagnetization Voltage /

Nominal Input Voltage / Redundancy.